CA1339192C - Process for the formation of color image and band stop filter used therefor - Google Patents
Process for the formation of color image and band stop filter used thereforInfo
- Publication number
- CA1339192C CA1339192C CA 569832 CA569832A CA1339192C CA 1339192 C CA1339192 C CA 1339192C CA 569832 CA569832 CA 569832 CA 569832 A CA569832 A CA 569832A CA 1339192 C CA1339192 C CA 1339192C
- Authority
- CA
- Canada
- Prior art keywords
- color
- sensitive
- nucleus
- light
- layer
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Expired - Fee Related
Links
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 170
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 title claims abstract description 152
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 title claims abstract description 32
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 claims abstract description 235
- 230000003595 spectral effect Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 204
- 238000011161 development Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 80
- 238000009826 distribution Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 71
- 238000002156 mixing Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 64
- 239000000839 emulsion Substances 0.000 claims description 180
- 239000000243 solution Substances 0.000 claims description 176
- -1 Silver halide Chemical class 0.000 claims description 173
- 229910052709 silver Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 134
- 239000004332 silver Substances 0.000 claims description 134
- 150000001875 compounds Chemical class 0.000 claims description 85
- 230000001235 sensitizing effect Effects 0.000 claims description 62
- 206010070834 Sensitisation Diseases 0.000 claims description 57
- 230000008313 sensitization Effects 0.000 claims description 57
- 238000010521 absorption reaction Methods 0.000 claims description 48
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 claims description 47
- 229910021612 Silver iodide Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 46
- ADZWSOLPGZMUMY-UHFFFAOYSA-M silver bromide Chemical compound [Ag]Br ADZWSOLPGZMUMY-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 claims description 26
- 238000011105 stabilization Methods 0.000 claims description 26
- 238000002834 transmittance Methods 0.000 claims description 25
- 230000006641 stabilisation Effects 0.000 claims description 23
- 150000003839 salts Chemical class 0.000 claims description 22
- 230000000087 stabilizing effect Effects 0.000 claims description 20
- JKFYKCYQEWQPTM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-azaniumyl-2-(4-fluorophenyl)acetate Chemical compound OC(=O)C(N)C1=CC=C(F)C=C1 JKFYKCYQEWQPTM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 18
- 229940045105 silver iodide Drugs 0.000 claims description 18
- VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicium dioxide Chemical compound O=[Si]=O VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 16
- 239000002253 acid Substances 0.000 claims description 16
- 125000004435 hydrogen atom Chemical group [H]* 0.000 claims description 16
- 125000000623 heterocyclic group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 15
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 claims description 15
- 229910021607 Silver chloride Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 14
- 125000000217 alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 14
- HKZLPVFGJNLROG-UHFFFAOYSA-M silver monochloride Chemical compound [Cl-].[Ag+] HKZLPVFGJNLROG-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 claims description 14
- SJOOOZPMQAWAOP-UHFFFAOYSA-N [Ag].BrCl Chemical compound [Ag].BrCl SJOOOZPMQAWAOP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 12
- 239000012487 rinsing solution Substances 0.000 claims description 11
- 229910052814 silicon oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 11
- BCMCBBGGLRIHSE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,3-benzoxazole Chemical class C1=CC=C2OC=NC2=C1 BCMCBBGGLRIHSE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 10
- 125000003277 amino group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 10
- WMUIZUWOEIQJEH-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzo[e][1,3]benzoxazole Chemical class C1=CC=C2C(N=CO3)=C3C=CC2=C1 WMUIZUWOEIQJEH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 10
- HCCNHYWZYYIOFM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3h-benzo[e]benzimidazole Chemical class C1=CC=C2C(N=CN3)=C3C=CC2=C1 HCCNHYWZYYIOFM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 9
- AIGNCQCMONAWOL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,3-benzoselenazole Chemical class C1=CC=C2[se]C=NC2=C1 AIGNCQCMONAWOL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 8
- 125000003545 alkoxy group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 8
- 125000002887 hydroxy group Chemical group [H]O* 0.000 claims description 8
- 125000003710 aryl alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 7
- IOJUPLGTWVMSFF-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzothiazole Chemical class C1=CC=C2SC=NC2=C1 IOJUPLGTWVMSFF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 7
- 229910052717 sulfur Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 7
- 125000004104 aryloxy group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 6
- AMTXUWGBSGZXCJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzo[e][1,3]benzoselenazole Chemical class C1=CC=C2C(N=C[se]3)=C3C=CC2=C1 AMTXUWGBSGZXCJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 6
- 125000003178 carboxy group Chemical group [H]OC(*)=O 0.000 claims description 6
- HYZJCKYKOHLVJF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1H-benzimidazole Chemical class C1=CC=C2NC=NC2=C1 HYZJCKYKOHLVJF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 5
- BUGBHKTXTAQXES-UHFFFAOYSA-N Selenium Chemical group [Se] BUGBHKTXTAQXES-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 5
- 125000003342 alkenyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 5
- 125000000304 alkynyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 5
- 150000001556 benzimidazoles Chemical class 0.000 claims description 5
- KXNQKOAQSGJCQU-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzo[e][1,3]benzothiazole Chemical class C1=CC=C2C(N=CS3)=C3C=CC2=C1 KXNQKOAQSGJCQU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 5
- 229910052711 selenium Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 5
- 125000003282 alkyl amino group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 4
- 150000001450 anions Chemical class 0.000 claims description 4
- 150000001768 cations Chemical class 0.000 claims description 4
- 150000002460 imidazoles Chemical class 0.000 claims description 4
- 125000004434 sulfur atom Chemical group 0.000 claims description 4
- ODIRBFFBCSTPTO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,3-selenazole Chemical class C1=C[se]C=N1 ODIRBFFBCSTPTO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 3
- MVVFUAACPKXXKJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4,5-dihydro-1,3-selenazole Chemical class C1CN=C[Se]1 MVVFUAACPKXXKJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 3
- RKJUIXBNRJVNHR-UHFFFAOYSA-N indolenine group Chemical group N1=CCC2=CC=CC=C12 RKJUIXBNRJVNHR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 3
- 150000002475 indoles Chemical class 0.000 claims description 3
- 150000002916 oxazoles Chemical class 0.000 claims description 3
- 125000004430 oxygen atom Chemical group O* 0.000 claims description 3
- 150000003236 pyrrolines Chemical class 0.000 claims description 3
- 125000000542 sulfonic acid group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 3
- 125000004149 thio group Chemical group *S* 0.000 claims description 3
- FZWLAAWBMGSTSO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Thiazole Chemical group C1=CSC=N1 FZWLAAWBMGSTSO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 2
- 150000003222 pyridines Chemical class 0.000 claims description 2
- 150000003549 thiazolines Chemical class 0.000 claims description 2
- PNEYBMLMFCGWSK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Alumina Chemical compound [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[Al+3].[Al+3] PNEYBMLMFCGWSK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims 3
- 125000005044 dihydroquinolinyl group Chemical class N1(CC=CC2=CC=CC=C12)* 0.000 claims 1
- 125000002943 quinolinyl group Chemical class N1=C(C=CC2=CC=CC=C12)* 0.000 claims 1
- 230000035945 sensitivity Effects 0.000 abstract description 77
- 239000010410 layer Substances 0.000 description 369
- 239000000975 dye Substances 0.000 description 129
- 230000018109 developmental process Effects 0.000 description 75
- 239000002245 particle Substances 0.000 description 68
- 239000010408 film Substances 0.000 description 57
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 49
- 108010010803 Gelatin Proteins 0.000 description 45
- 239000008273 gelatin Substances 0.000 description 45
- 229920000159 gelatin Polymers 0.000 description 45
- 235000019322 gelatine Nutrition 0.000 description 45
- 235000011852 gelatine desserts Nutrition 0.000 description 45
- 229910001868 water Inorganic materials 0.000 description 42
- 239000003795 chemical substances by application Substances 0.000 description 40
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N water Substances O XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 40
- BQCADISMDOOEFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silver Chemical compound [Ag] BQCADISMDOOEFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 31
- 235000002639 sodium chloride Nutrition 0.000 description 24
- 125000002496 methyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 23
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 21
- 230000006872 improvement Effects 0.000 description 21
- 125000001434 methanylylidene group Chemical group [H]C#[*] 0.000 description 21
- 150000004820 halides Chemical class 0.000 description 20
- ZUNKMNLKJXRCDM-UHFFFAOYSA-N silver bromoiodide Chemical compound [Ag].IBr ZUNKMNLKJXRCDM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 20
- 238000004061 bleaching Methods 0.000 description 19
- 239000011248 coating agent Substances 0.000 description 18
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 description 18
- 238000004040 coloring Methods 0.000 description 18
- 235000010724 Wisteria floribunda Nutrition 0.000 description 17
- 238000002360 preparation method Methods 0.000 description 17
- 239000003381 stabilizer Substances 0.000 description 16
- WVDDGKGOMKODPV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Benzyl alcohol Chemical compound OCC1=CC=CC=C1 WVDDGKGOMKODPV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 15
- 238000011160 research Methods 0.000 description 15
- 239000002904 solvent Substances 0.000 description 15
- 229910052736 halogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 14
- 150000002367 halogens Chemical class 0.000 description 14
- 239000003112 inhibitor Substances 0.000 description 14
- 238000005282 brightening Methods 0.000 description 13
- 239000013078 crystal Substances 0.000 description 13
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 12
- SQGYOTSLMSWVJD-UHFFFAOYSA-N silver(1+) nitrate Chemical compound [Ag+].[O-]N(=O)=O SQGYOTSLMSWVJD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 12
- 125000003118 aryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 11
- 239000003755 preservative agent Substances 0.000 description 11
- 239000010409 thin film Substances 0.000 description 11
- 239000002738 chelating agent Substances 0.000 description 10
- 125000005843 halogen group Chemical group 0.000 description 10
- TWNQGVIAIRXVLR-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxo(oxoalumanyloxy)alumane Chemical compound O=[Al]O[Al]=O TWNQGVIAIRXVLR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 10
- BWHMMNNQKKPAPP-UHFFFAOYSA-L potassium carbonate Chemical compound [K+].[K+].[O-]C([O-])=O BWHMMNNQKKPAPP-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 10
- GEHJYWRUCIMESM-UHFFFAOYSA-L sodium sulfite Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].[O-]S([O-])=O GEHJYWRUCIMESM-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 10
- LSNNMFCWUKXFEE-UHFFFAOYSA-M Bisulfite Chemical compound OS([O-])=O LSNNMFCWUKXFEE-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 9
- QTBSBXVTEAMEQO-UHFFFAOYSA-N acetic acid Substances CC(O)=O QTBSBXVTEAMEQO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 9
- NLKNQRATVPKPDG-UHFFFAOYSA-M potassium iodide Chemical compound [K+].[I-] NLKNQRATVPKPDG-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 9
- 239000011241 protective layer Substances 0.000 description 9
- QGZKDVFQNNGYKY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ammonia Chemical compound N QGZKDVFQNNGYKY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- WSFSSNUMVMOOMR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Formaldehyde Chemical compound O=C WSFSSNUMVMOOMR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- IOLCXVTUBQKXJR-UHFFFAOYSA-M potassium bromide Chemical compound [K+].[Br-] IOLCXVTUBQKXJR-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 8
- 230000002335 preservative effect Effects 0.000 description 8
- 239000011734 sodium Substances 0.000 description 8
- 125000001424 substituent group Chemical group 0.000 description 8
- 239000006097 ultraviolet radiation absorber Substances 0.000 description 8
- 125000001931 aliphatic group Chemical group 0.000 description 7
- 239000007844 bleaching agent Substances 0.000 description 7
- 125000006297 carbonyl amino group Chemical group [H]N([*:2])C([*:1])=O 0.000 description 7
- 239000000460 chlorine Substances 0.000 description 7
- 239000003989 dielectric material Substances 0.000 description 7
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 description 7
- 238000010348 incorporation Methods 0.000 description 7
- 239000007788 liquid Substances 0.000 description 7
- 230000033458 reproduction Effects 0.000 description 7
- PAYRUJLWNCNPSJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Aniline Chemical compound NC1=CC=CC=C1 PAYRUJLWNCNPSJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 239000003109 Disodium ethylene diamine tetraacetate Substances 0.000 description 6
- KCXVZYZYPLLWCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N EDTA Chemical compound OC(=O)CN(CC(O)=O)CCN(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O KCXVZYZYPLLWCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- ZGTMUACCHSMWAC-UHFFFAOYSA-L EDTA disodium salt (anhydrous) Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].OC(=O)CN(CC([O-])=O)CCN(CC(O)=O)CC([O-])=O ZGTMUACCHSMWAC-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 6
- XEKOWRVHYACXOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethyl acetate Chemical compound CCOC(C)=O XEKOWRVHYACXOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- VTLYFUHAOXGGBS-UHFFFAOYSA-N Fe3+ Chemical class [Fe+3] VTLYFUHAOXGGBS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- XYXNTHIYBIDHGM-UHFFFAOYSA-N ammonium thiosulfate Chemical compound [NH4+].[NH4+].[O-]S([O-])(=O)=S XYXNTHIYBIDHGM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 6
- 235000019301 disodium ethylene diamine tetraacetate Nutrition 0.000 description 6
- 125000000959 isobutyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])(C([H])([H])[H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 6
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 6
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 6
- 239000002667 nucleating agent Substances 0.000 description 6
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000001179 sorption measurement Methods 0.000 description 6
- 239000000126 substance Substances 0.000 description 6
- CPELXLSAUQHCOX-UHFFFAOYSA-M Bromide Chemical compound [Br-] CPELXLSAUQHCOX-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 5
- 229940126062 Compound A Drugs 0.000 description 5
- NLDMNSXOCDLTTB-UHFFFAOYSA-N Heterophylliin A Natural products O1C2COC(=O)C3=CC(O)=C(O)C(O)=C3C3=C(O)C(O)=C(O)C=C3C(=O)OC2C(OC(=O)C=2C=C(O)C(O)=C(O)C=2)C(O)C1OC(=O)C1=CC(O)=C(O)C(O)=C1 NLDMNSXOCDLTTB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- QPCDCPDFJACHGM-UHFFFAOYSA-N N,N-bis{2-[bis(carboxymethyl)amino]ethyl}glycine Chemical compound OC(=O)CN(CC(O)=O)CCN(CC(=O)O)CCN(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O QPCDCPDFJACHGM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 239000004698 Polyethylene Substances 0.000 description 5
- 239000000654 additive Substances 0.000 description 5
- 235000019445 benzyl alcohol Nutrition 0.000 description 5
- 125000006367 bivalent amino carbonyl group Chemical group [H]N([*:1])C([*:2])=O 0.000 description 5
- 239000006172 buffering agent Substances 0.000 description 5
- 230000000052 comparative effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000010276 construction Methods 0.000 description 5
- 239000006185 dispersion Substances 0.000 description 5
- 230000005764 inhibitory process Effects 0.000 description 5
- 125000000956 methoxy group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])O* 0.000 description 5
- 230000003647 oxidation Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000007254 oxidation reaction Methods 0.000 description 5
- 229960003330 pentetic acid Drugs 0.000 description 5
- 125000001997 phenyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C(*)C([H])=C1[H] 0.000 description 5
- 239000004848 polyfunctional curative Substances 0.000 description 5
- 229920000642 polymer Polymers 0.000 description 5
- 229910000027 potassium carbonate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 5
- 229910052708 sodium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 235000010265 sodium sulphite Nutrition 0.000 description 5
- 239000010936 titanium Substances 0.000 description 5
- QIGBRXMKCJKVMJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydroquinone Chemical compound OC1=CC=C(O)C=C1 QIGBRXMKCJKVMJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- FAPWRFPIFSIZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-M Sodium chloride Chemical compound [Na+].[Cl-] FAPWRFPIFSIZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 4
- QAOWNCQODCNURD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Sulfuric acid Chemical compound OS(O)(=O)=O QAOWNCQODCNURD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229960000583 acetic acid Drugs 0.000 description 4
- 239000007864 aqueous solution Substances 0.000 description 4
- 230000007547 defect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000002542 deteriorative effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000009792 diffusion process Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000001035 drying Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000004043 dyeing Methods 0.000 description 4
- 125000001495 ethyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 4
- 150000002429 hydrazines Chemical class 0.000 description 4
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 4
- 229910052757 nitrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 150000004989 p-phenylenediamines Chemical class 0.000 description 4
- ZJAOAACCNHFJAH-UHFFFAOYSA-N phosphonoformic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)P(O)(O)=O ZJAOAACCNHFJAH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229920000573 polyethylene Polymers 0.000 description 4
- LVTJOONKWUXEFR-FZRMHRINSA-N protoneodioscin Natural products O(C[C@@H](CC[C@]1(O)[C@H](C)[C@@H]2[C@]3(C)[C@H]([C@H]4[C@@H]([C@]5(C)C(=CC4)C[C@@H](O[C@@H]4[C@H](O[C@H]6[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](C)O6)[C@@H](O)[C@H](O[C@H]6[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](C)O6)[C@H](CO)O4)CC5)CC3)C[C@@H]2O1)C)[C@H]1[C@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O1 LVTJOONKWUXEFR-FZRMHRINSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 230000002829 reductive effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000005070 ripening Effects 0.000 description 4
- 235000012239 silicon dioxide Nutrition 0.000 description 4
- 239000004094 surface-active agent Substances 0.000 description 4
- 150000003568 thioethers Chemical class 0.000 description 4
- XNCSCQSQSGDGES-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[2-[bis(carboxymethyl)amino]propyl-(carboxymethyl)amino]acetic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CN(CC(O)=O)C(C)CN(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O XNCSCQSQSGDGES-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- VHUUQVKOLVNVRT-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ammonium hydroxide Chemical compound [NH4+].[OH-] VHUUQVKOLVNVRT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 229920002284 Cellulose triacetate Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 229920001174 Diethylhydroxylamine Polymers 0.000 description 3
- MHAJPDPJQMAIIY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrogen peroxide Chemical compound OO MHAJPDPJQMAIIY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- DGAQECJNVWCQMB-PUAWFVPOSA-M Ilexoside XXIX Chemical compound C[C@@H]1CC[C@@]2(CC[C@@]3(C(=CC[C@H]4[C@]3(CC[C@@H]5[C@@]4(CC[C@@H](C5(C)C)OS(=O)(=O)[O-])C)C)[C@@H]2[C@]1(C)O)C)C(=O)O[C@H]6[C@@H]([C@H]([C@@H]([C@H](O6)CO)O)O)O.[Na+] DGAQECJNVWCQMB-PUAWFVPOSA-M 0.000 description 3
- OKKJLVBELUTLKV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Methanol Chemical compound OC OKKJLVBELUTLKV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 229910006069 SO3H Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- PMZURENOXWZQFD-UHFFFAOYSA-L Sodium Sulfate Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].[O-]S([O-])(=O)=O PMZURENOXWZQFD-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 3
- NINIDFKCEFEMDL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Sulfur Chemical compound [S] NINIDFKCEFEMDL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- LSNNMFCWUKXFEE-UHFFFAOYSA-N Sulfurous acid Chemical compound OS(O)=O LSNNMFCWUKXFEE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- NNLVGZFZQQXQNW-ADJNRHBOSA-N [(2r,3r,4s,5r,6s)-4,5-diacetyloxy-3-[(2s,3r,4s,5r,6r)-3,4,5-triacetyloxy-6-(acetyloxymethyl)oxan-2-yl]oxy-6-[(2r,3r,4s,5r,6s)-4,5,6-triacetyloxy-2-(acetyloxymethyl)oxan-3-yl]oxyoxan-2-yl]methyl acetate Chemical compound O([C@@H]1O[C@@H]([C@H]([C@H](OC(C)=O)[C@H]1OC(C)=O)O[C@H]1[C@@H]([C@@H](OC(C)=O)[C@H](OC(C)=O)[C@@H](COC(C)=O)O1)OC(C)=O)COC(=O)C)[C@@H]1[C@@H](COC(C)=O)O[C@@H](OC(C)=O)[C@H](OC(C)=O)[C@H]1OC(C)=O NNLVGZFZQQXQNW-ADJNRHBOSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 230000002378 acidificating effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- UMGDCJDMYOKAJW-UHFFFAOYSA-N aminothiocarboxamide Natural products NC(N)=S UMGDCJDMYOKAJW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 125000001769 aryl amino group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 125000004429 atom Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- XNSQZBOCSSMHSZ-UHFFFAOYSA-K azane;2-[2-[bis(carboxylatomethyl)amino]ethyl-(carboxymethyl)amino]acetate;iron(3+) Chemical compound [NH4+].[Fe+3].[O-]C(=O)CN(CC([O-])=O)CCN(CC([O-])=O)CC([O-])=O XNSQZBOCSSMHSZ-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 3
- 125000000484 butyl group Chemical group [H]C([*])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 3
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 229910052801 chlorine Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- FVCOIAYSJZGECG-UHFFFAOYSA-N diethylhydroxylamine Chemical compound CCN(O)CC FVCOIAYSJZGECG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 239000000539 dimer Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000010894 electron beam technology Methods 0.000 description 3
- 229940042795 hydrazides for tuberculosis treatment Drugs 0.000 description 3
- 150000002430 hydrocarbons Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 229910052739 hydrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 230000002401 inhibitory effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 150000002503 iridium Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 230000000873 masking effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000012071 phase Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000002035 prolonged effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000010453 quartz Substances 0.000 description 3
- 150000003242 quaternary ammonium salts Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 239000011669 selenium Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229910052938 sodium sulfate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 235000011152 sodium sulphate Nutrition 0.000 description 3
- AKHNMLFCWUSKQB-UHFFFAOYSA-L sodium thiosulfate Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].[O-]S([O-])(=O)=S AKHNMLFCWUSKQB-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 3
- 235000019345 sodium thiosulphate Nutrition 0.000 description 3
- 125000000547 substituted alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 239000011593 sulfur Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000001360 synchronised effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- DHCDFWKWKRSZHF-UHFFFAOYSA-L thiosulfate(2-) Chemical compound [O-]S([S-])(=O)=O DHCDFWKWKRSZHF-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 3
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 3
- 125000002023 trifluoromethyl group Chemical group FC(F)(F)* 0.000 description 3
- 229910052984 zinc sulfide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- QGKMIGUHVLGJBR-UHFFFAOYSA-M (4z)-1-(3-methylbutyl)-4-[[1-(3-methylbutyl)quinolin-1-ium-4-yl]methylidene]quinoline;iodide Chemical compound [I-].C12=CC=CC=C2N(CCC(C)C)C=CC1=CC1=CC=[N+](CCC(C)C)C2=CC=CC=C12 QGKMIGUHVLGJBR-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- PAWQVTBBRAZDMG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(3-bromo-2-fluorophenyl)acetic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CC1=CC=CC(Br)=C1F PAWQVTBBRAZDMG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- DMQQXDPCRUGSQB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[3-[bis(carboxymethyl)amino]propyl-(carboxymethyl)amino]acetic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CN(CC(O)=O)CCCN(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O DMQQXDPCRUGSQB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- XWSGEVNYFYKXCP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[carboxymethyl(methyl)amino]acetic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CN(C)CC(O)=O XWSGEVNYFYKXCP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000000094 2-phenylethyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C(C([H])=C1[H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 2
- QTFFUUQJZHEORK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5,6-dihydroxybenzene-1,2,4-trisulfonic acid Chemical compound OC1=C(O)C(S(O)(=O)=O)=C(S(O)(=O)=O)C=C1S(O)(=O)=O QTFFUUQJZHEORK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- SEKMAUCMRCHQMC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-chloro-2-methyl-1,2-thiazolidin-3-one Chemical compound CN1SC(Cl)CC1=O SEKMAUCMRCHQMC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- NLXLAEXVIDQMFP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ammonia chloride Chemical compound [NH4+].[Cl-] NLXLAEXVIDQMFP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- XKRFYHLGVUSROY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Argon Chemical compound [Ar] XKRFYHLGVUSROY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- CIWBSHSKHKDKBQ-JLAZNSOCSA-N Ascorbic acid Chemical compound OC[C@H](O)[C@H]1OC(=O)C(O)=C1O CIWBSHSKHKDKBQ-JLAZNSOCSA-N 0.000 description 2
- IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Atomic nitrogen Chemical compound N#N IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- WKBOTKDWSSQWDR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Bromine atom Chemical group [Br] WKBOTKDWSSQWDR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- OYPRJOBELJOOCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N Calcium Chemical compound [Ca] OYPRJOBELJOOCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- FEWJPZIEWOKRBE-JCYAYHJZSA-N Dextrotartaric acid Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)C(O)=O FEWJPZIEWOKRBE-JCYAYHJZSA-N 0.000 description 2
- ZRALSGWEFCBTJO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Guanidine Chemical compound NC(N)=N ZRALSGWEFCBTJO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- OAKJQQAXSVQMHS-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrazine Chemical compound NN OAKJQQAXSVQMHS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 101000618467 Hypocrea jecorina (strain ATCC 56765 / BCRC 32924 / NRRL 11460 / Rut C-30) Endo-1,4-beta-xylanase 2 Proteins 0.000 description 2
- FYYHWMGAXLPEAU-UHFFFAOYSA-N Magnesium Chemical compound [Mg] FYYHWMGAXLPEAU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 101100221809 Neurospora crassa (strain ATCC 24698 / 74-OR23-1A / CBS 708.71 / DSM 1257 / FGSC 987) cpd-7 gene Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 229910019142 PO4 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- ABLZXFCXXLZCGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phosphorous acid Chemical compound OP(O)=O ABLZXFCXXLZCGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- WCUXLLCKKVVCTQ-UHFFFAOYSA-M Potassium chloride Chemical compound [Cl-].[K+] WCUXLLCKKVVCTQ-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- CDBYLPFSWZWCQE-UHFFFAOYSA-L Sodium Carbonate Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].[O-]C([O-])=O CDBYLPFSWZWCQE-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 2
- DWAQJAXMDSEUJJ-UHFFFAOYSA-M Sodium bisulfite Chemical compound [Na+].OS([O-])=O DWAQJAXMDSEUJJ-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- QAOWNCQODCNURD-UHFFFAOYSA-L Sulfate Chemical compound [O-]S([O-])(=O)=O QAOWNCQODCNURD-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 2
- FEWJPZIEWOKRBE-UHFFFAOYSA-N Tartaric acid Natural products [H+].[H+].[O-]C(=O)C(O)C(O)C([O-])=O FEWJPZIEWOKRBE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- RTAQQCXQSZGOHL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Titanium Chemical compound [Ti] RTAQQCXQSZGOHL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- GSEJCLTVZPLZKY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Triethanolamine Chemical compound OCCN(CCO)CCO GSEJCLTVZPLZKY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- XSQUKJJJFZCRTK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Urea Natural products NC(N)=O XSQUKJJJFZCRTK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- XLOMVQKBTHCTTD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Zinc monoxide Chemical compound [Zn]=O XLOMVQKBTHCTTD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000006096 absorbing agent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000013543 active substance Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000000996 additive effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 150000001298 alcohols Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 229910052782 aluminium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminium Chemical compound [Al] XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 150000001412 amines Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 229910021529 ammonia Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- SWLVFNYSXGMGBS-UHFFFAOYSA-N ammonium bromide Chemical compound [NH4+].[Br-] SWLVFNYSXGMGBS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229940107816 ammonium iodide Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 150000003863 ammonium salts Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 239000002518 antifoaming agent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229940121375 antifungal agent Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 239000003429 antifungal agent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 125000005110 aryl thio group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- SATZVFKUEAMFPB-UHFFFAOYSA-N azanium;sodium;chloride Chemical compound [NH4+].[Na].[Cl-] SATZVFKUEAMFPB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 2
- 125000001797 benzyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C(C([H])=C1[H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 2
- 229940006460 bromide ion Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 229910052794 bromium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 230000003139 buffering effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000011575 calcium Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052791 calcium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 150000001720 carbohydrates Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 150000004649 carbonic acid derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 229920001429 chelating resin Polymers 0.000 description 2
- ZUIVNYGZFPOXFW-UHFFFAOYSA-N chembl1717603 Chemical compound N1=C(C)C=C(O)N2N=CN=C21 ZUIVNYGZFPOXFW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000005229 chemical vapour deposition Methods 0.000 description 2
- 125000001309 chloro group Chemical group Cl* 0.000 description 2
- 239000003086 colorant Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000007796 conventional method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229910000365 copper sulfate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- ARUVKPQLZAKDPS-UHFFFAOYSA-L copper(II) sulfate Chemical compound [Cu+2].[O-][S+2]([O-])([O-])[O-] ARUVKPQLZAKDPS-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 2
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000000151 deposition Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000006866 deterioration Effects 0.000 description 2
- 150000004985 diamines Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- GVGUFUZHNYFZLC-UHFFFAOYSA-N dodecyl benzenesulfonate;sodium Chemical compound [Na].CCCCCCCCCCCCOS(=O)(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 GVGUFUZHNYFZLC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000001301 ethoxy group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])O* 0.000 description 2
- DEFVIWRASFVYLL-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethylene glycol bis(2-aminoethyl)tetraacetic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CN(CC(O)=O)CCOCCOCCN(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O DEFVIWRASFVYLL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000000816 ethylene group Chemical group [H]C([H])([*:1])C([H])([H])[*:2] 0.000 description 2
- 238000001704 evaporation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000008020 evaporation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229960005102 foscarnet Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 238000010438 heat treatment Methods 0.000 description 2
- 150000002443 hydroxylamines Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 150000002500 ions Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 150000002505 iron Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- VCJMYUPGQJHHFU-UHFFFAOYSA-N iron(3+);trinitrate Chemical compound [Fe+3].[O-][N+]([O-])=O.[O-][N+]([O-])=O.[O-][N+]([O-])=O VCJMYUPGQJHHFU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000001788 irregular Effects 0.000 description 2
- 125000001449 isopropyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])(*)C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 2
- 239000004816 latex Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920000126 latex Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000011777 magnesium Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052749 magnesium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 150000002739 metals Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- BEGLCMHJXHIJLR-UHFFFAOYSA-N methylisothiazolinone Chemical compound CN1SC=CC1=O BEGLCMHJXHIJLR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- AJDUTMFFZHIJEM-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-(9,10-dioxoanthracen-1-yl)-4-[4-[[4-[4-[(9,10-dioxoanthracen-1-yl)carbamoyl]phenyl]phenyl]diazenyl]phenyl]benzamide Chemical compound O=C1C2=CC=CC=C2C(=O)C2=C1C=CC=C2NC(=O)C(C=C1)=CC=C1C(C=C1)=CC=C1N=NC(C=C1)=CC=C1C(C=C1)=CC=C1C(=O)NC1=CC=CC2=C1C(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1C2=O AJDUTMFFZHIJEM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- MGFYIUFZLHCRTH-UHFFFAOYSA-N nitrilotriacetic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CN(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O MGFYIUFZLHCRTH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910000510 noble metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 150000007524 organic acids Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 150000002894 organic compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 150000002989 phenols Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 125000000951 phenoxy group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C(O*)C([H])=C1[H] 0.000 description 2
- 235000021317 phosphate Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 150000003013 phosphoric acid derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 238000005240 physical vapour deposition Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229920000768 polyamine Polymers 0.000 description 2
- DJEHXEMURTVAOE-UHFFFAOYSA-M potassium bisulfite Chemical compound [K+].OS([O-])=O DJEHXEMURTVAOE-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- 229940099427 potassium bisulfite Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 235000010259 potassium hydrogen sulphite Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 229940043349 potassium metabisulfite Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 235000010263 potassium metabisulphite Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- BHZRJJOHZFYXTO-UHFFFAOYSA-L potassium sulfite Chemical compound [K+].[K+].[O-]S([O-])=O BHZRJJOHZFYXTO-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 2
- 235000019252 potassium sulphite Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 239000002243 precursor Substances 0.000 description 2
- 125000002924 primary amino group Chemical group [H]N([H])* 0.000 description 2
- NDGRWYRVNANFNB-UHFFFAOYSA-N pyrazolidin-3-one Chemical compound O=C1CCNN1 NDGRWYRVNANFNB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- GZTPJDLYPMPRDF-UHFFFAOYSA-N pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyrazole Chemical class N1=NC2=CC=NC2=C1 GZTPJDLYPMPRDF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000005855 radiation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000011347 resin Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920005989 resin Polymers 0.000 description 2
- YGSDEFSMJLZEOE-UHFFFAOYSA-N salicylic acid Chemical class OC(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1O YGSDEFSMJLZEOE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000000926 separation method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229910052710 silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000010703 silicon Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229940001607 sodium bisulfite Drugs 0.000 description 2
- JHJLBTNAGRQEKS-UHFFFAOYSA-M sodium bromide Chemical compound [Na+].[Br-] JHJLBTNAGRQEKS-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- 239000011780 sodium chloride Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229940080264 sodium dodecylbenzenesulfonate Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 235000010267 sodium hydrogen sulphite Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- GGCZERPQGJTIQP-UHFFFAOYSA-N sodium;9,10-dioxoanthracene-2-sulfonic acid Chemical compound [Na+].C1=CC=C2C(=O)C3=CC(S(=O)(=O)O)=CC=C3C(=O)C2=C1 GGCZERPQGJTIQP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000000020 sulfo group Chemical group O=S(=O)([*])O[H] 0.000 description 2
- 239000011975 tartaric acid Substances 0.000 description 2
- 235000002906 tartaric acid Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 229910052719 titanium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- IMNIMPAHZVJRPE-UHFFFAOYSA-N triethylenediamine Chemical compound C1CN2CCN1CC2 IMNIMPAHZVJRPE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229960004418 trolamine Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 238000007738 vacuum evaporation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000001043 yellow dye Substances 0.000 description 2
- BJEPYKJPYRNKOW-REOHCLBHSA-N (S)-malic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](O)CC(O)=O BJEPYKJPYRNKOW-REOHCLBHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FTTATHOUSOIFOQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,2,3,4,6,7,8,8a-octahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]pyrazine Chemical compound C1NCCN2CCCC21 FTTATHOUSOIFOQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NWUYHJFMYQTDRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,2-bis(ethenyl)benzene;1-ethenyl-2-ethylbenzene;styrene Chemical compound C=CC1=CC=CC=C1.CCC1=CC=CC=C1C=C.C=CC1=CC=CC=C1C=C NWUYHJFMYQTDRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- IRFSXVIRXMYULF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,2-dihydroquinoline Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C=CCNC2=C1 IRFSXVIRXMYULF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- IPVORJLWOBDFGD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,3-selenazolidine Chemical compound C1C[Se]CN1 IPVORJLWOBDFGD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OGYGFUAIIOPWQD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,3-thiazolidine Chemical compound C1CSCN1 OGYGFUAIIOPWQD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- YNGDWRXWKFWCJY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,4-Dihydropyridine Chemical compound C1C=CNC=C1 YNGDWRXWKFWCJY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZRHUHDUEXWHZMA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,4-dihydropyrazol-5-one Chemical compound O=C1CC=NN1 ZRHUHDUEXWHZMA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CBCKQZAAMUWICA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,4-phenylenediamine Chemical group NC1=CC=C(N)C=C1 CBCKQZAAMUWICA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- AOSFMYBATFLTAQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-amino-3-(benzimidazol-1-yl)propan-2-ol Chemical compound C1=CC=C2N(CC(O)CN)C=NC2=C1 AOSFMYBATFLTAQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PTXVSDKCUJCCLC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-hydroxyindole Chemical group C1=CC=C2N(O)C=CC2=C1 PTXVSDKCUJCCLC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KJCVRFUGPWSIIH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-naphthol Chemical group C1=CC=C2C(O)=CC=CC2=C1 KJCVRFUGPWSIIH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BAXOFTOLAUCFNW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1H-indazole Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C=NNC2=C1 BAXOFTOLAUCFNW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WOHLSTOWRAOMSG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,3-dihydro-1,3-benzothiazole Chemical compound C1=CC=C2SCNC2=C1 WOHLSTOWRAOMSG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SUVZGLSQFGNBQI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,5-bis(sulfanyl)hexanedioic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C(S)CCC(S)C(O)=O SUVZGLSQFGNBQI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JBAITADHMBPOQQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(1h-benzimidazol-2-yl)-1,3-thiazole Chemical compound C1=CSC(C=2NC3=CC=CC=C3N=2)=N1 JBAITADHMBPOQQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QADPIHSGFPJNFS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(1h-benzimidazol-2-ylmethyl)-1,3-thiazole Chemical compound N=1C2=CC=CC=C2NC=1CC1=NC=CS1 QADPIHSGFPJNFS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XZXYQEHISUMZAT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[(2-hydroxy-5-methylphenyl)methyl]-4-methylphenol Chemical compound CC1=CC=C(O)C(CC=2C(=CC=C(C)C=2)O)=C1 XZXYQEHISUMZAT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PDHFSBXFZGYBIP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[2-(2-hydroxyethylsulfanyl)ethylsulfanyl]ethanol Chemical compound OCCSCCSCCO PDHFSBXFZGYBIP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UOMQUZPKALKDCA-UHFFFAOYSA-K 2-[2-[bis(carboxylatomethyl)amino]ethyl-(carboxymethyl)amino]acetate;iron(3+) Chemical compound [Fe+3].OC(=O)CN(CC([O-])=O)CCN(CC([O-])=O)CC([O-])=O UOMQUZPKALKDCA-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 1
- GRUVVLWKPGIYEG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[2-[carboxymethyl-[(2-hydroxyphenyl)methyl]amino]ethyl-[(2-hydroxyphenyl)methyl]amino]acetic acid Chemical compound C=1C=CC=C(O)C=1CN(CC(=O)O)CCN(CC(O)=O)CC1=CC=CC=C1O GRUVVLWKPGIYEG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RNMCCPMYXUKHAZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[3,3-diamino-1,2,2-tris(carboxymethyl)cyclohexyl]acetic acid Chemical compound NC1(N)CCCC(CC(O)=O)(CC(O)=O)C1(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O RNMCCPMYXUKHAZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WZIMSXIXZTUBSO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[[bis(carboxymethyl)amino]methyl-(carboxymethyl)amino]acetic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CN(CC(O)=O)CN(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O WZIMSXIXZTUBSO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UXFQFBNBSPQBJW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-amino-2-methylpropane-1,3-diol Chemical class OCC(N)(C)CO UXFQFBNBSPQBJW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CDAWCLOXVUBKRW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-aminophenol Chemical compound NC1=CC=CC=C1O CDAWCLOXVUBKRW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NEAQRZUHTPSBBM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-hydroxy-3,3-dimethyl-7-nitro-4h-isoquinolin-1-one Chemical class C1=C([N+]([O-])=O)C=C2C(=O)N(O)C(C)(C)CC2=C1 NEAQRZUHTPSBBM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000003903 2-propenyl group Chemical group [H]C([*])([H])C([H])=C([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- MBMKGIRTTXAGCM-YFKPBYRVSA-N 3, 4 Dihydroxy phenyl alanine Chemical class OC(=O)[C@H](C)NC1=CC=C(O)C(O)=C1 MBMKGIRTTXAGCM-YFKPBYRVSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FPFSGDXIBUDDKZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-decyl-2-hydroxycyclopent-2-en-1-one Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCC1=C(O)C(=O)CC1 FPFSGDXIBUDDKZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HSJKGGMUJITCBW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-hydroxybutanal Chemical class CC(O)CC=O HSJKGGMUJITCBW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XRZDIHADHZSFBB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-oxo-n,3-diphenylpropanamide Chemical compound C=1C=CC=CC=1NC(=O)CC(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 XRZDIHADHZSFBB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NYYSPVRERVXMLJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4,4-difluorocyclohexan-1-one Chemical compound FC1(F)CCC(=O)CC1 NYYSPVRERVXMLJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZYKBEIDPRRYKKQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-[4-(diethylamino)-2-methylphenyl]imino-1-oxo-n-phenylnaphthalene-2-carboxamide Chemical compound CC1=CC(N(CC)CC)=CC=C1N=C1C2=CC=CC=C2C(=O)C(C(=O)NC=2C=CC=CC=2)=C1 ZYKBEIDPRRYKKQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZNBNBTIDJSKEAM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-[7-hydroxy-2-[5-[5-[6-hydroxy-6-(hydroxymethyl)-3,5-dimethyloxan-2-yl]-3-methyloxolan-2-yl]-5-methyloxolan-2-yl]-2,8-dimethyl-1,10-dioxaspiro[4.5]decan-9-yl]-2-methyl-3-propanoyloxypentanoic acid Chemical compound C1C(O)C(C)C(C(C)C(OC(=O)CC)C(C)C(O)=O)OC11OC(C)(C2OC(C)(CC2)C2C(CC(O2)C2C(CC(C)C(O)(CO)O2)C)C)CC1 ZNBNBTIDJSKEAM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZFIQGRISGKSVAG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-methylaminophenol Chemical compound CNC1=CC=C(O)C=C1 ZFIQGRISGKSVAG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XBTWVJKPQPQTDW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-n,4-n-diethyl-2-methylbenzene-1,4-diamine Chemical compound CCN(CC)C1=CC=C(N)C(C)=C1 XBTWVJKPQPQTDW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QNGVNLMMEQUVQK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-n,4-n-diethylbenzene-1,4-diamine Chemical compound CCN(CC)C1=CC=C(N)C=C1 QNGVNLMMEQUVQK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MTOCKMVNXPZCJW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-n-dodecyl-4-n-ethyl-2-methylbenzene-1,4-diamine Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCN(CC)C1=CC=C(N)C(C)=C1 MTOCKMVNXPZCJW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FFAJEKUNEVVYCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-n-ethyl-4-n-(2-methoxyethyl)-2-methylbenzene-1,4-diamine Chemical compound COCCN(CC)C1=CC=C(N)C(C)=C1 FFAJEKUNEVVYCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000002373 5 membered heterocyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- BQRBAXFOPZRMCU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-chloro-1h-imidazole Chemical group ClC1=CN=CN1 BQRBAXFOPZRMCU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PZBQVZFITSVHAW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-chloro-2h-benzotriazole Chemical compound C1=C(Cl)C=CC2=NNN=C21 PZBQVZFITSVHAW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LRUDIIUSNGCQKF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-methyl-1H-benzotriazole Chemical compound C1=C(C)C=CC2=NNN=C21 LRUDIIUSNGCQKF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- AOCDQWRMYHJTMY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-nitro-2h-benzotriazole Chemical compound C1=C([N+](=O)[O-])C=CC2=NNN=C21 AOCDQWRMYHJTMY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000004070 6 membered heterocyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- XPAZGLFMMUODDK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 6-nitro-1h-benzimidazole Chemical compound [O-][N+](=O)C1=CC=C2N=CNC2=C1 XPAZGLFMMUODDK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229930024421 Adenine Natural products 0.000 description 1
- GFFGJBXGBJISGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Adenine Chemical compound NC1=NC=NC2=C1N=CN2 GFFGJBXGBJISGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000012935 Averaging Methods 0.000 description 1
- 101100501963 Caenorhabditis elegans exc-4 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000004215 Carbon black (E152) Substances 0.000 description 1
- VEXZGXHMUGYJMC-UHFFFAOYSA-M Chloride anion Chemical compound [Cl-] VEXZGXHMUGYJMC-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- ZAMOUSCENKQFHK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Chlorine atom Chemical compound [Cl] ZAMOUSCENKQFHK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241000723353 Chrysanthemum Species 0.000 description 1
- 235000007516 Chrysanthemum Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 244000067456 Chrysanthemum coronarium Species 0.000 description 1
- 235000005979 Citrus limon Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 244000131522 Citrus pyriformis Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000218916 Cycas Species 0.000 description 1
- 229910014569 C—OOH Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- PQUCIEFHOVEZAU-UHFFFAOYSA-N Diammonium sulfite Chemical compound [NH4+].[NH4+].[O-]S([O-])=O PQUCIEFHOVEZAU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MYMOFIZGZYHOMD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Dioxygen Chemical compound O=O MYMOFIZGZYHOMD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241000196324 Embryophyta Species 0.000 description 1
- 239000005955 Ferric phosphate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004812 Fluorinated ethylene propylene Substances 0.000 description 1
- 241000233866 Fungi Species 0.000 description 1
- VEXZGXHMUGYJMC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrochloric acid Chemical compound Cl VEXZGXHMUGYJMC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 101000913968 Ipomoea purpurea Chalcone synthase C Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229910021578 Iron(III) chloride Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- KDXKERNSBIXSRK-YFKPBYRVSA-N L-lysine Chemical class NCCCC[C@H](N)C(O)=O KDXKERNSBIXSRK-YFKPBYRVSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LRQKBLKVPFOOQJ-YFKPBYRVSA-N L-norleucine Chemical class CCCC[C@H]([NH3+])C([O-])=O LRQKBLKVPFOOQJ-YFKPBYRVSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 101100400378 Mus musculus Marveld2 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- BZORFPDSXLZWJF-UHFFFAOYSA-N N,N-dimethyl-1,4-phenylenediamine Chemical compound CN(C)C1=CC=C(N)C=C1 BZORFPDSXLZWJF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FFDGPVCHZBVARC-UHFFFAOYSA-N N,N-dimethylglycine Chemical class CN(C)CC(O)=O FFDGPVCHZBVARC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000007945 N-acyl ureas Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- CHJJGSNFBQVOTG-UHFFFAOYSA-N N-methyl-guanidine Natural products CNC(N)=N CHJJGSNFBQVOTG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052779 Neodymium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 101000907988 Petunia hybrida Chalcone-flavanone isomerase C Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 206010034960 Photophobia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229920002319 Poly(methyl acrylate) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002873 Polyethylenimine Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004642 Polyimide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004743 Polypropylene Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004793 Polystyrene Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004372 Polyvinyl alcohol Substances 0.000 description 1
- ZLMJMSJWJFRBEC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Potassium Chemical compound [K] ZLMJMSJWJFRBEC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000002262 Schiff base Substances 0.000 description 1
- XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicon Chemical compound [Si] XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FOIXSVOLVBLSDH-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silver ion Chemical compound [Ag+] FOIXSVOLVBLSDH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VMHLLURERBWHNL-UHFFFAOYSA-M Sodium acetate Chemical compound [Na+].CC([O-])=O VMHLLURERBWHNL-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- YSMRWXYRXBRSND-UHFFFAOYSA-N TOTP Chemical compound CC1=CC=CC=C1OP(=O)(OC=1C(=CC=CC=1)C)OC1=CC=CC=C1C YSMRWXYRXBRSND-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004809 Teflon Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920006362 Teflon® Polymers 0.000 description 1
- ZMZDMBWJUHKJPS-UHFFFAOYSA-M Thiocyanate anion Chemical compound [S-]C#N ZMZDMBWJUHKJPS-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 241001061127 Thione Species 0.000 description 1
- ZMANZCXQSJIPKH-UHFFFAOYSA-N Triethylamine Chemical compound CCN(CC)CC ZMANZCXQSJIPKH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000004833 X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000005083 Zinc sulfide Substances 0.000 description 1
- VDEKZRMFBLPJOD-UHFFFAOYSA-N [dihydroxy(oxo)-$l^{6}-sulfanylidene]methanone Chemical compound OS(O)(=O)=C=O VDEKZRMFBLPJOD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000009825 accumulation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000002777 acetyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C(*)=O 0.000 description 1
- 125000004442 acylamino group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229960000643 adenine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 150000001294 alanine derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000001299 aldehydes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000007933 aliphatic carboxylic acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000004183 alkoxy alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- RMRFFCXPLWYOOY-UHFFFAOYSA-N allyl radical Chemical compound [CH2]C=C RMRFFCXPLWYOOY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QWCKQJZIFLGMSD-UHFFFAOYSA-N alpha-aminobutyric acid Chemical class CCC(N)C(O)=O QWCKQJZIFLGMSD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BJEPYKJPYRNKOW-UHFFFAOYSA-N alpha-hydroxysuccinic acid Natural products OC(=O)C(O)CC(O)=O BJEPYKJPYRNKOW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000004397 aminosulfonyl group Chemical group NS(=O)(=O)* 0.000 description 1
- 235000019270 ammonium chloride Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 150000003868 ammonium compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- SOIFLUNRINLCBN-UHFFFAOYSA-N ammonium thiocyanate Chemical compound [NH4+].[S-]C#N SOIFLUNRINLCBN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000002490 anilino group Chemical group [H]N(*)C1=C([H])C([H])=C([H])C([H])=C1[H] 0.000 description 1
- 239000003957 anion exchange resin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000001000 anthraquinone dye Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000002216 antistatic agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052786 argon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 235000010323 ascorbic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229960005070 ascorbic acid Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000011668 ascorbic acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000012298 atmosphere Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000987 azo dye Substances 0.000 description 1
- IRERQBUNZFJFGC-UHFFFAOYSA-L azure blue Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].[Na+].[Na+].[Na+].[Na+].[Na+].[Na+].[Al+3].[Al+3].[Al+3].[Al+3].[Al+3].[Al+3].[S-]S[S-].[O-][Si]([O-])([O-])[O-].[O-][Si]([O-])([O-])[O-].[O-][Si]([O-])([O-])[O-].[O-][Si]([O-])([O-])[O-].[O-][Si]([O-])([O-])[O-].[O-][Si]([O-])([O-])[O-] IRERQBUNZFJFGC-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 230000001580 bacterial effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- MXMZCLLIUQEKSN-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzimidazoline Chemical compound C1=CC=C2NCNC2=C1 MXMZCLLIUQEKSN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WPYMKLBDIGXBTP-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzoic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 WPYMKLBDIGXBTP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QRUDEWIWKLJBPS-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzotriazole Chemical compound C1=CC=C2N[N][N]C2=C1 QRUDEWIWKLJBPS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000012964 benzotriazole Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000011230 binding agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000001045 blue dye Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000009835 boiling Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910021538 borax Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- KGBXLFKZBHKPEV-UHFFFAOYSA-N boric acid Chemical compound OB(O)O KGBXLFKZBHKPEV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004327 boric acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000001642 boronic acid derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- GDTBXPJZTBHREO-UHFFFAOYSA-N bromine Substances BrBr GDTBXPJZTBHREO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000004106 butoxy group Chemical group [*]OC([H])([H])C([H])([H])C(C([H])([H])[H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 150000001661 cadmium Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000003917 carbamoyl group Chemical group [H]N([H])C(*)=O 0.000 description 1
- 229910052799 carbon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000011203 carbon fibre reinforced carbon Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000001728 carbonyl compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000005606 carbostyryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000004181 carboxyalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000002843 carboxylic acid group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 239000000919 ceramic Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000003638 chemical reducing agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000004965 chloroalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000000068 chlorophenyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- GTKRFUAGOKINCA-UHFFFAOYSA-M chlorosilver;silver Chemical compound [Ag].[Ag]Cl GTKRFUAGOKINCA-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 229910017052 cobalt Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000010941 cobalt Substances 0.000 description 1
- GUTLYIVDDKVIGB-UHFFFAOYSA-N cobalt atom Chemical compound [Co] GUTLYIVDDKVIGB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000002860 competitive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000002131 composite material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920001577 copolymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 230000007797 corrosion Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005260 corrosion Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005520 cutting process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000004093 cyano group Chemical group *C#N 0.000 description 1
- 125000004122 cyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- YMHQVDAATAEZLO-UHFFFAOYSA-N cyclohexane-1,1-diamine Chemical compound NC1(N)CCCCC1 YMHQVDAATAEZLO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000008021 deposition Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005137 deposition process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000586 desensitisation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000001470 diamides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000002147 dimethylamino group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])N(*)C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- SWSQBOPZIKWTGO-UHFFFAOYSA-N dimethylaminoamidine Natural products CN(C)C(N)=N SWSQBOPZIKWTGO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910001882 dioxygen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000002845 discoloration Methods 0.000 description 1
- SRPOMGSPELCIGZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N disulfino carbonate Chemical compound OS(=O)OC(=O)OS(O)=O SRPOMGSPELCIGZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WBZKQQHYRPRKNJ-UHFFFAOYSA-L disulfite Chemical compound [O-]S(=O)S([O-])(=O)=O WBZKQQHYRPRKNJ-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- PCAXGMRPPOMODZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N disulfurous acid, diammonium salt Chemical compound [NH4+].[NH4+].[O-]S(=O)S([O-])(=O)=O PCAXGMRPPOMODZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000003438 dodecyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- KOWWOODYPWDWOJ-LVBPXUMQSA-N elatine Chemical compound C([C@]12CN(C3[C@@]45OCO[C@]44[C@H]6[C@@H](OC)[C@@H]([C@H](C4)OC)C[C@H]6[C@@]3([C@@H]1[C@@H]5OC)[C@@H](OC)CC2)CC)OC(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1N1C(=O)CC(C)C1=O KOWWOODYPWDWOJ-LVBPXUMQSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000008030 elimination Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000003379 elimination reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- HQQADJVZYDDRJT-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethene;prop-1-ene Chemical group C=C.CC=C HQQADJVZYDDRJT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000000031 ethylamino group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])N([H])[*] 0.000 description 1
- 239000004744 fabric Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910001447 ferric ion Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229940032958 ferric phosphate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000005189 flocculation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000016615 flocculation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000007789 gas Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052732 germanium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- GNPVGFCGXDBREM-UHFFFAOYSA-N germanium atom Chemical compound [Ge] GNPVGFCGXDBREM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000012362 glacial acetic acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000002332 glycine derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- PCHJSUWPFVWCPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N gold Chemical compound [Au] PCHJSUWPFVWCPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052737 gold Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000010931 gold Substances 0.000 description 1
- UYTPUPDQBNUYGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N guanine Chemical class O=C1NC(N)=NC2=C1N=CN2 UYTPUPDQBNUYGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940093915 gynecological organic acid Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000001307 helium Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052734 helium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- SWQJXJOGLNCZEY-UHFFFAOYSA-N helium atom Chemical compound [He] SWQJXJOGLNCZEY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229930195733 hydrocarbon Natural products 0.000 description 1
- XMBWDFGMSWQBCA-UHFFFAOYSA-N hydrogen iodide Chemical compound I XMBWDFGMSWQBCA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZMZDMBWJUHKJPS-UHFFFAOYSA-N hydrogen thiocyanate Natural products SC#N ZMZDMBWJUHKJPS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000002209 hydrophobic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 125000002768 hydroxyalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229910000378 hydroxylammonium sulfate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000005286 illumination Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000003384 imaging method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000002883 imidazolyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- NBZBKCUXIYYUSX-UHFFFAOYSA-N iminodiacetic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CNCC(O)=O NBZBKCUXIYYUSX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000005470 impregnation Methods 0.000 description 1
- COHYTHOBJLSHDF-BUHFOSPRSA-N indigo dye Chemical compound N\1C2=CC=CC=C2C(=O)C/1=C1/C(=O)C2=CC=CC=C2N1 COHYTHOBJLSHDF-BUHFOSPRSA-N 0.000 description 1
- COHYTHOBJLSHDF-UHFFFAOYSA-N indigo powder Natural products N1C2=CC=CC=C2C(=O)C1=C1C(=O)C2=CC=CC=C2N1 COHYTHOBJLSHDF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000011261 inert gas Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000002484 inorganic compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229910010272 inorganic material Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000003780 insertion Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000037431 insertion Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910052740 iodine Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- PNDPGZBMCMUPRI-UHFFFAOYSA-N iodine Chemical compound II PNDPGZBMCMUPRI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000003456 ion exchange resin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000007733 ion plating Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229920003303 ion-exchange polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229910052741 iridium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910052742 iron Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- XEEYBQQBJWHFJM-UHFFFAOYSA-N iron Substances [Fe] XEEYBQQBJWHFJM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RBTARNINKXHZNM-UHFFFAOYSA-K iron trichloride Chemical compound Cl[Fe](Cl)Cl RBTARNINKXHZNM-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 1
- WBJZTOZJJYAKHQ-UHFFFAOYSA-K iron(3+) phosphate Chemical compound [Fe+3].[O-]P([O-])([O-])=O WBJZTOZJJYAKHQ-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 1
- RUTXIHLAWFEWGM-UHFFFAOYSA-H iron(3+) sulfate Chemical compound [Fe+3].[Fe+3].[O-]S([O-])(=O)=O.[O-]S([O-])(=O)=O.[O-]S([O-])(=O)=O RUTXIHLAWFEWGM-UHFFFAOYSA-H 0.000 description 1
- JEIPFZHSYJVQDO-UHFFFAOYSA-N iron(III) oxide Inorganic materials O=[Fe]O[Fe]=O JEIPFZHSYJVQDO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910000399 iron(III) phosphate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910000360 iron(III) sulfate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 125000001909 leucine group Chemical class [H]N(*)C(C(*)=O)C([H])([H])C(C([H])([H])[H])C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 230000031700 light absorption Effects 0.000 description 1
- 208000013469 light sensitivity Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229940057995 liquid paraffin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000007791 liquid phase Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910003002 lithium salt Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 159000000002 lithium salts Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000000314 lubricant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910001635 magnesium fluoride Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000001630 malic acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000011090 malic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000002736 metal compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000000250 methylamino group Chemical group [H]N(*)C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 150000007522 mineralic acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- RGQFFQXJSCXIJX-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-[2-[2-amino-5-(diethylamino)phenyl]ethyl]methanesulfonamide Chemical compound CCN(CC)C1=CC=C(N)C(CCNS(C)(=O)=O)=C1 RGQFFQXJSCXIJX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HFWWEMPLBCKNNM-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-[bis(hydroxyamino)methyl]hydroxylamine Chemical class ONC(NO)NO HFWWEMPLBCKNNM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QEFYFXOXNSNQGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N neodymium atom Chemical compound [Nd] QEFYFXOXNSNQGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000007935 neutral effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 125000004433 nitrogen atom Chemical group N* 0.000 description 1
- QJGQUHMNIGDVPM-UHFFFAOYSA-N nitrogen group Chemical group [N] QJGQUHMNIGDVPM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 235000012149 noodles Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000003921 oil Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000005985 organic acids Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000003960 organic solvent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000002923 oximes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000001820 oxy group Chemical group [*:1]O[*:2] 0.000 description 1
- RVTZCBVAJQQJTK-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxygen(2-);zirconium(4+) Chemical compound [O-2].[O-2].[Zr+4] RVTZCBVAJQQJTK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000002885 p-hydroxyanilino group Chemical group [H]OC1=C([H])C([H])=C(N([H])*)C([H])=C1[H] 0.000 description 1
- 229910052763 palladium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- KDLHZDBZIXYQEI-UHFFFAOYSA-N palladium Substances [Pd] KDLHZDBZIXYQEI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920009441 perflouroethylene propylene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- JRKICGRDRMAZLK-UHFFFAOYSA-L peroxydisulfate Chemical compound [O-]S(=O)(=O)OOS([O-])(=O)=O JRKICGRDRMAZLK-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- CMCWWLVWPDLCRM-UHFFFAOYSA-N phenidone Chemical class N1C(=O)CCN1C1=CC=CC=C1 CMCWWLVWPDLCRM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ISWSIDIOOBJBQZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N phenol group Chemical group C1(=CC=CC=C1)O ISWSIDIOOBJBQZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ACVYVLVWPXVTIT-UHFFFAOYSA-N phosphinic acid Chemical compound O[PH2]=O ACVYVLVWPXVTIT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XNGIFLGASWRNHJ-UHFFFAOYSA-L phthalate(2-) Chemical compound [O-]C(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1C([O-])=O XNGIFLGASWRNHJ-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 239000001007 phthalocyanine dye Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920003023 plastic Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004033 plastic Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000002985 plastic film Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920006255 plastic film Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004014 plasticizer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052697 platinum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229920000233 poly(alkylene oxides) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001721 polyimide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 238000006116 polymerization reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229920001155 polypropylene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002223 polystyrene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002451 polyvinyl alcohol Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000001267 polyvinylpyrrolidone Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000036 polyvinylpyrrolidone Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 235000013855 polyvinylpyrrolidone Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000011591 potassium Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052700 potassium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229960003975 potassium Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000007686 potassium Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000001103 potassium chloride Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000011164 potassium chloride Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- RWPGFSMJFRPDDP-UHFFFAOYSA-L potassium metabisulfite Chemical compound [K+].[K+].[O-]S(=O)S([O-])(=O)=O RWPGFSMJFRPDDP-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 159000000001 potassium salts Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- ZNNZYHKDIALBAK-UHFFFAOYSA-M potassium thiocyanate Chemical compound [K+].[S-]C#N ZNNZYHKDIALBAK-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 229940116357 potassium thiocyanate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000002265 prevention Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000003141 primary amines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000035755 proliferation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 125000001500 prolyl group Chemical class [H]N1C([H])(C(=O)[*])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C1([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 125000006308 propyl amino group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 150000003254 radicals Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229910052703 rhodium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000003283 rhodium Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000010948 rhodium Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000008237 rinsing water Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000003870 salicylic acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229910052594 sapphire Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000010980 sapphire Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000004062 sedimentation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910000077 silane Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000000377 silicon dioxide Substances 0.000 description 1
- LIVNPJMFVYWSIS-UHFFFAOYSA-N silicon monoxide Chemical compound [Si-]#[O+] LIVNPJMFVYWSIS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000003378 silver Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- RHUVFRWZKMEWNS-UHFFFAOYSA-M silver thiocyanate Chemical compound [Ag+].[S-]C#N RHUVFRWZKMEWNS-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 239000001632 sodium acetate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000017281 sodium acetate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229910000029 sodium carbonate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000001509 sodium citrate Substances 0.000 description 1
- NLJMYIDDQXHKNR-UHFFFAOYSA-K sodium citrate Chemical compound O.O.[Na+].[Na+].[Na+].[O-]C(=O)CC(O)(CC([O-])=O)C([O-])=O NLJMYIDDQXHKNR-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 1
- HRZFUMHJMZEROT-UHFFFAOYSA-L sodium disulfite Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].[O-]S(=O)S([O-])(=O)=O HRZFUMHJMZEROT-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 229940001584 sodium metabisulfite Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000010262 sodium metabisulphite Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- NVIFVTYDZMXWGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N sodium metaborate Chemical compound [Na+].[O-]B=O NVIFVTYDZMXWGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000001488 sodium phosphate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910000162 sodium phosphate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 159000000000 sodium salts Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000004328 sodium tetraborate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000010339 sodium tetraborate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- VGTPCRGMBIAPIM-UHFFFAOYSA-M sodium thiocyanate Chemical compound [Na+].[S-]C#N VGTPCRGMBIAPIM-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000004544 sputter deposition Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000005415 substituted alkoxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- LSNNMFCWUKXFEE-UHFFFAOYSA-L sulfite Chemical class [O-]S([O-])=O LSNNMFCWUKXFEE-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 125000004964 sulfoalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000000472 sulfonyl group Chemical group *S(*)(=O)=O 0.000 description 1
- 150000003467 sulfuric acid derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 238000003786 synthesis reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000008399 tap water Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000020679 tap water Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229910052714 tellurium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- PORWMNRCUJJQNO-UHFFFAOYSA-N tellurium atom Chemical compound [Te] PORWMNRCUJJQNO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000003512 tertiary amines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000003536 tetrazoles Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229910052716 thallium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000003475 thallium Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- BKVIYDNLLOSFOA-UHFFFAOYSA-N thallium Chemical compound [Tl] BKVIYDNLLOSFOA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000003557 thiazoles Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- CBDKQYKMCICBOF-UHFFFAOYSA-N thiazoline Chemical compound C1CN=CS1 CBDKQYKMCICBOF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000003396 thiol group Chemical group [H]S* 0.000 description 1
- 150000003585 thioureas Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- XOLBLPGZBRYERU-UHFFFAOYSA-N tin dioxide Chemical compound O=[Sn]=O XOLBLPGZBRYERU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910001887 tin oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- JOXIMZWYDAKGHI-UHFFFAOYSA-N toluene-4-sulfonic acid Chemical class CC1=CC=C(S(O)(=O)=O)C=C1 JOXIMZWYDAKGHI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- AAAQKTZKLRYKHR-UHFFFAOYSA-N triphenylmethane Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1C(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1 AAAQKTZKLRYKHR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RYFMWSXOAZQYPI-UHFFFAOYSA-K trisodium phosphate Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].[Na+].[O-]P([O-])([O-])=O RYFMWSXOAZQYPI-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 1
- 238000000108 ultra-filtration Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000003673 urethanes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 238000001771 vacuum deposition Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000002987 valine group Chemical class [H]N([H])C([H])(C(*)=O)C([H])(C([H])([H])[H])C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 239000002699 waste material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000012463 white pigment Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052727 yttrium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000003751 zinc Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000011787 zinc oxide Substances 0.000 description 1
- DRDVZXDWVBGGMH-UHFFFAOYSA-N zinc;sulfide Chemical compound [S-2].[Zn+2] DRDVZXDWVBGGMH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910001928 zirconium oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03C—PHOTOSENSITIVE MATERIALS FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC PURPOSES; PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES, e.g. CINE, X-RAY, COLOUR, STEREO-PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES; AUXILIARY PROCESSES IN PHOTOGRAPHY
- G03C7/00—Multicolour photographic processes or agents therefor; Regeneration of such processing agents; Photosensitive materials for multicolour processes
- G03C7/30—Colour processes using colour-coupling substances; Materials therefor; Preparing or processing such materials
- G03C7/3041—Materials with specific sensitometric characteristics, e.g. gamma, density
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03C—PHOTOSENSITIVE MATERIALS FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC PURPOSES; PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES, e.g. CINE, X-RAY, COLOUR, STEREO-PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES; AUXILIARY PROCESSES IN PHOTOGRAPHY
- G03C1/00—Photosensitive materials
- G03C1/76—Photosensitive materials characterised by the base or auxiliary layers
- G03C1/825—Photosensitive materials characterised by the base or auxiliary layers characterised by antireflection means or visible-light filtering means, e.g. antihalation
Landscapes
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Materials Engineering (AREA)
- Silver Salt Photography Or Processing Solution Therefor (AREA)
Abstract
A process for the formation of color images are disclosed wherein it comoprises printing on a color printing light-sensitive material comprising a blue-sensitive layer, a green-sensitive layer and a red-sensitive layer provided on a support from a color print original in a subtractive exposure process, and then substantially subsequent color development, characterized in that the effective spectral sensitivity distribution of at least two light-sensitive layers in light-sensitive layers of the color printing light-sensitive material are substantially independent from each other in a wavelength band of 400 to 750 nm and thereby the average color mixing degree in each said light-sensitive layers is 0.13 or less.
Description
PROCESS FOR THE FORMATION OF COLOR IMAGE
AND BAND STOP FILTER USED THEREFOR
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
The present invention relates to a process for the formation of color images which comprises printing images on a color printing light-sensitive material from a color print original in a subtractive color exposure process, and then color-developing the color printing light-sensitive material. More particularly, the present invention relates to a process for the formation of color images which improves color reproducibility without deteriorating the conventional productivity, particularly without prolonged printing time.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
In recent years, as multilayer color light-sensitive materials have been used for in color photograph, copying color originals, imaging or recording digital color data, etc., it has been desired to attain further excellent picture quality such as sharpness, graininess and color reproducibility, without deteriorating the productivity or rapidity in the process for the formation of images on silver halide color light-sensitive materials.
133919~
In the system for the formation of positive-positive images by printing on a color reversal light-sensitive material or direct positive color light-sensitive material from color print originals such as transparent positive images obtained from photographing color reversal light-sensitive materials, color photo-graphs obtained from instant photographic materials or color photographic papers, and color printed matters, color reproducibility faithful to color print originals has also been desired.
In the system for the formation of so-called negative-positive images using photographing color light-sensitive materials and printing light-sensitive materials, many improvements to improve reproducibility of objects have been proposed applying advantageous conditions of color negative light-sensitive materials to photographing color light-sensitive materials. In particular, improvements have been made in three color dyes, blue-sensitive, green-sensitive and red-sensitive special sensitivity distributions, and color masking process for correcting improper spectral absorption by three color dyes. Furthermore, attempts have been made to eliminate color mixture between emulsion layers having different color development to use DIR compounds/to use a functional light-sensitive layer which has a different 133~:13~
spectral sensitivity distribution of the light-sensitive layers from that of the above described light-sensitive layers in addition to the above described light-sensitive layers, etc. The details of such approaches are described in patents cited in Research Disclosure Nos. 17,643, and 18,717, U.S. Patent Nos. 2,407,210, 2,875,057, 3,265,506, 3,408,194, 3,447,928, 3,933,501,,402,262, 4,401,752, g,326,024, 4,310,619, 4,351,897,3,061,432, 3,725,067, 2,369,929, 2,801,171, 2,772,162,2,895,826, 3,772,002, 2,772,162, 3,758,308, 4,126,396,4,334,011, 4,327,173, 3,446,622, 4,333,999, 4,451,559,4,427,767, 4,163,670, 4,004,929, 4,138,258, 3,451,820,4,080,211, 4,500,630, 4,540,654, and 4,367,282, Japanese Patent Publication Nos.
10,739/83, and 39,413/82, Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 43,659/85, and 34,541/86 (the term "OPI" as used herein means an "unexamined published application"), Research Disclosure Nos. 18,053, 24,220, and 24,230, British Patent Nos. 1,425,020, 1,i46,368, and 2,102,173, West German Patent Application Nos. 2,219,917, 2,261,362, 2,329,587, 2,433,812, and 3,234,533, and European Patent Nos. 73,636, and 96,570.
The spectral sensitivity distribution may be improved by the selection of a proper sensitizing dye or modification of crystal habit of particulate silver halide 13331~
or process for the addition of particulate silver halide.
However, such approaches are not necessarily enough.
The modification of spectral sensitivity distribution can be also accomplished by a use of a suitable photographic dye as described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 1,419/76, and West German Patent No.
1,015,683. However, such an approach is disadvantageous, because only the overlapped portion of spectral sensitivity distribution of a specific layer and that of a layer other than the specific light-sensitive layer among a plurality of light-sensitive layers of a light-sensitive material is desensitized. Furthermore, such a photographic dye lowers sensitivity itself or has a desensitizing effect. Moreover, it is difficult for such a photo-graphic dye to be fixed on a predetermined layer.
Such a photographic dye is also disadvantageous in that it tends to leave color after the formation of images. In particular, such a photographic dye often inhibit the spectral sensitization of silver halide emulsion brought by using a sensitizing dye. Improvements to fix tehse dyes in a predetermined layer also have been made. Such an approach are described in U.S. Patent Nos. 3,247,127, 2,390,707, 2,255,077, 2,493,747, 2,843,486, 4,420,555, 2,S48,564, 2,484,430, 3,148,061, and 3,756,814, and 133~19~
British Patent Nos. 506,385, 584,609, 685,475, and 850,281.
Improvements for color printing light-sensitive materials have been made to obtain faithful color reproducibility as well as excellent sharpness and graininess of images using an excellent print original obtained from an excellent photographing color light-sensitive material. Besides the improvement in photographing color light-sensitive materials, improvements have been made in color couplers and their color dyes and spectral sensitivity distribution in blue-sensitive, green sensitive and red-sensitive layers.
Furthermore, efforts have been made to inhibit color mixture between various layers.
Improvements in printing light-sensitive materials are described in Research Disclosure No. 18,716. Suitable silver halide emulsions which can be used improve in spectral sensitivity distribution are described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 5,423/73, 149,345/84, and 119,344/84, and U.S. Patent No. 3,655,394.
Suitable sensitizing dyes for this purpose and process for the use of these sensitizing dyes are described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 114,418/74, 139,323/76, 26,589/80, 28,738/83, 5,238/84, 48,756/84, 133,540/84, 196,749/85, 210,345/86, and 205,929/86, and 133!~13~
U.S. Patent No. 4,183,756. Examples of improvements in color couplers are described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 105,229/83.
However, these approaches is still insufficient, because the objective data obtained on photographing color light-sensitive materials cannot be fully transferred to prints to deteriorate faithful color reproducibility of the objective image. Such a defect becomes remarkable as the properties of color couplers for use in color printing light-sensitive materials and color images produced therefrom are improved.
This is also the case where images on a color print original obtained from a photographing reversal color light-sensitive material or dupe light-sensitive material are printed on a direct color positive light-sensitive material or reversal color light-sensitive material. However, for direct color positive light-sensitive materials or reversal -color printing light-sensitive materials, no process for decreasing the over-lapping of spectral sensitivity distribution of a light-sensitive layer with that of other light-sensitive layers by using a suitable photographic dye has been suggested.
Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 113,627/76 discloses a process using a suitable light filter to cut a copying light in a wavelength band of 500 nm in which the 133!~2 blue sensitivity and the green sensitivity of a copying paper overlap each other, when an original is copied. The object of the process is to decrease copy trials to obtain color balance of copy previously or to adjust deviation in color balance which is caused on getting color balance.
However, this approach effexcts on only copying conditions by cutting both blue and green light in a wavelength band in which the blue sensitivity and the green sensitivity of a copying paper overlapeach other. If a light filter having a wide absorption wavelength range is used, the blue sensitivity and green sensitivity of a copying paper are lowered. To compensate for this disadvantage, a stronger light for copy is required. This results in an increase in the remaining color mixture.
Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 64,037/78 and 113627/76 disclose a printer which is provided with filters such that the respective spectral sensitivities of a color paper are matched to that of blue light, green light and red light receivers in order to facilitate the adjustment of exposure time for the color paper when printing is made on a color paper from a negative film.
However, these approaches disclosed in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 113,627/76 and 64,037/78 contemplate stabilization of copying or printing process.
133919~
Accordingly, it cannot be said that these approaches can satisfactorily improve the quality of images.
Processes for printing on a color printing light-sensitive material from a color print original include additive process and subtractive process. In the light of productivity, subtractive exposure process, particularly using a white light source has been commonly put into practical use. In particular, this process provides a high processing capability per unit input, advantageous procedure for stabilization of photographic properties, efficient use of a light source, high quality level of color images on a print, etc. This process also enables a rapid or lln~ned printing process.
The subtractive process such as white light subtractive process have been widely used in the form of an autoprinter because it can provide a high productivity and rapidity. However, such a process is disadvantageous to be improved in the finish quality and its stability.
In order to eliminate these defects, many approaches have been suggested.
For example, U.S. Patent No. 2,997,389 suggests the use of a filter having a spectral absorption band in a yellow region and between 465 nm and 490 nm during the printing of 'a color transparent image on a color printing light-sensitive material in the subtractive exposure 133~192 process. The above described U.S. Patent also suggests that a filter comprising a ZnS layer and an MgF2 layer may be preferably used. U.S. Patent No. 4,050,807 suggests the combined use of a subtractive color filter and a filter adapted to remove wavelengths in which spectral sensitivity curves of a copying photographic paper cross each other during enlarging and printing of photographic images or copy printing in the subtractive process.
Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 64,037/78 suggests that an autoprinter for printing on a color paper from a color negative film may be provided with a filter adapted to cut light in a wavelength band of 460 to 540 nm and a filter adapted to cut light in a wavelength band of 570 to 640 nm to unite the spectral sensitivity of the receptor in the autoprinter with the spectral sensitivity distribution of the color papér increasing an accuracy of the exposure control in the autoprinter. However, the latter two patents have no description about the constituting elements of such suitable filters.
For known filters, approaches have been heretofore suggested to modify the spectral sensitivity of the color light-sensitive material used or provide a light for print adapted for the spectral sensitivity of the color light-sensitive material or the spectral sensitivity distribution in the receptor in the color print. However, in order to improve the color reproducibility, it is necessary to consider the spectral absorption characteristics of each original color images such as yellow image, magenta image, and cyan image, in a color negative film or color slide. In processes for the exposure of a color light-sensitive material comprising at least three light-sensi-tive layers, subtractive exposure l-process is advantageous in that it can be easily effected with a high rapidity, providing a high productivity.
However, the subtractive exposure process is also disadvantageous in that it is difficult to conform the spectral intensity distribution of the exposing light source to the spectral sensitivity distribution of three light-sensitive layers and to the spectral absorption characteristics of the corresponding color originals or materials to be copied. A filter having a spectral absorption in a wavelength band out of an absorption wavelength band of 465 to 490 nm as described in U.S.
Patent No. 2,997,389 or a filter having a spectral absorption in a wavelength band out of the wavelength in which the spectral sensitivity curves of a copying photographic paper cross each other as described in U.S.
Patent No. 4,050,807 is often useful. Accordingly, it has been desired to develop a filter having sharp spectral absorption characteristics excellent in transparency and a 133gl~
transmission wavelength band which is not limited to these wavelength bands but can be freely selected.
If such a filter is used interposed between the light source in a printer and a color light-sensitive material as described in U.S. Patent No. 2,997,389 and Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 64,037/78, the deterioration of the filter due to the high illumination and heat from the light source causes a problem. Such a filter as described in the above described two U.S.
Patents cannot stand the prolonged use for more than one month. The use of such a filter may cause a change in the finish quality of a print obtained from a color light-sensitive material. Such a filter is mechanically mounted on and removed from the printer very often and is susceptible to be scratched.
Processes for image exposure such as photographing objects to be copied and copying or printing from a color original include three processes. In the first process, the entire surface of a color light-sensitive material is imagewise exposed at the same time. This process requires lens and a shutter. An exposing machine to be used in this process may have a simple construction. In this process, the exposure can be effected only once or several times (sequential exposure process). This process can provide an excellent picture quality. Ordinary cameras and autoprinters employ this process. The second process is a slit exposure process. In this exposure process, a slit moves across the light axis between the object to be copied or color original and the color light-sensitive material to effect image exposure. The third process is a synchronous slit exposure process. In this exposure process, the object to be copied or color original and the color light-sensitive material are synchronously moved during image exposure. The exposing machines according to these processes are relatively small but are susceptible to uneven scanning or image distortion due to unevenness in the speed of synchronous movement or insufficient accuracy of synchronous movement. In the above described simultaneous exposure process, a wide radiation angle is obtained. However, the filter used in this process is included in an interference filter of the kind which varies in spectral absorption characteristics depending on the angle of incidence of the light, causing unevenness in the finish quality of color prints. Therefore, it has been desired to develop a band stop filter which is particularly improved so as to provide a less radiation angle dependency of spectral absorption.
C
~3391~2 SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
According to a first aspect of the invention there is provided a process for the formation of color images which comprises printing on a color printing light-sensitive material comprising a blue-sensitive layer, a green-sensitive layer, and a red-sensitive layer provided on a support from a color print original in a subtractive exposure process, and then subsequent color development. A band stop filter or a band stop filter layer is interposed between the light source and the particular light-sensitive layer of the color printing light-sensitive material so that the effective spectral sensitive energy distribution of at least two light-sensitive layers of the light-sensitive layers of the color printing light-sensitive material becomes independent from each other in a wavelength band of 400 to 750 nrn. The average color mixing degree in each of the light-sensitive layers becomes 0.10 or less. The blue-sensitive layer contains a yellow coupler, the green-sensitive layer contains a magenta coupler and the red-sensitive layer contains a cyan coupler provided on a support. The color printing light-sensitive material satisfies conditions A), B), and C) defined hereinafter.
'C
-133~:192 In accordance with a second aspect of the invention there is provided a process for the formation of color images which comprises printing on a color printing light-sensitive material from a color print original in a subtractive exposure process, and subsequently color-developing said color printing light-sensitive material, whereby the color printing light-sensitive material comprises at least one blue-sensitive layer, at least one green-sensitive layer and at least one red-sensitive layer provided on a support. The green-sensitive layer has an effective spectral sensitive energy distribution which is substantially formed by a J-type spectral sensitization, the red-sensitive layer has an effective spectral sensitive energy distribution which is substantially formed by an M-type or J-type spectral sensitization, the effective spectral sensitive energy distribution of the green-sensitive layer and the red-sensitive layer, and/or the spectral sensitive energy distribution of the green-sensitive layer and the blue-sensitive layer are substantially independent, and thereby the average color mixing degree at the printing in each of the light-sensitive layers is 0.12 or less. The color development process of the color printing light-sensitive material satisfies the condition that at least one of color development, blix, and rinse and/or stabilization is carried out in the presence of at least one compound represented by the general formula (XI) set out below.
133~19~
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
Figs. l(a), 2(a), 3(a) and 4(a) show the effective spectral sensitive energy distribution ~or effective spectral light amount distribution) E (~) in various light-sensitive layers in comparative examples or in the present invention;
G
133~1~2 Fig. S(a) shows a representation of a color print obtained in the present invention in CIE(L*a*b) color specification system.
Fig. l(b) is the spectral sensitivity curve (shown at GL) of a green-sensitive layer in a color printing light-sensitive material used in Example 3 of the present invention and the spectral energy distribution curve (shown at P) of a printer used in the same example;
Fig. l(c) is the spectral sensitivity (relative) curve of a color printing light-sensitive material to be used in the present invention;
Fig. 2(c) is the effective spectral sensitive light amount distribution in a comparative color printing light-sensitive material in an image formation system;
Figs. 3(c), 4(c), 5(c) and 8(c) show the effective spectral sensitive light amount distribution in a color printing light-sensitive material of the present invention in an image formation system;
Fig. 6(c) shows a representation of the effect of the present invention in a CIE color specification system;
and Fig. 7(c) shows the spectral transmittance curve of a band stop filter or sharp cut filter to be used in the present invention;
1~39132 Figs. l(d), 2(d) and 3(d) show the spectral transmittance curve of filter Samples 1, 2 and 3 used to be in the present invention, respectively.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
The color print original used in the present invention is a color light-sensitive material for use in photo-graphing such as color negative light-sensitive material, color reversal light-sensitive material, and instant photographic light-sensitive material, negative film or transparent positive film obtained from dupe color light-sensitive material, or color photograph or printed matter comprising a transparent or reflective support.
These light-sensitive materials normally have an image comprising at least three primaries, i.e., yellow coloring material (Y), magenta coloring material (M) and cyan coloring material (C) on a support.
Examples of a color printing light-sensitive material of the present invention include color photographic paper, direct positive color light-sensitive material, and reversal color light-sensitive material.
The present invention may be preferably applied to the subtractive exposure process, particularly color image formation process comprising a printing process by means of an automatic printer using a white light source.
13391~2 In the color printing light-sensitive material, it is necessary to receive image data such as color hue and gradation, independently, which each has different spectral absorption characteristics due to yellow, magenta and cyan coloring materials in a color print original. In the present invention, to this end, it is most desirable to receive data only in the vicinity of the maximum sensitivity wavelength of the yellow, magenta and cyan coloring light-sensitive layers in a color printing light-sensitive material (Abs.max, ~gs.max and Ars.max respectively).
In the color printing light-sensitive material, the blue-sensitive layer may substantially have a spectral sensitivity in a wavelength band of 400 to 485 nm, the green-sensitive layer may substantially have a spectral sensitivity in a wavelength band of 485 to 570 nm, and the red-sensitive layer may substantially have a spectral sensitivity in a wavelength band of 570 to 750 nm. The blue-sensitive layer may have a maximum sensitivity wave-length (~s max) of 400 to 470 nm, the green-sensitive layer may have a maximum sensitivity wavelength of 520 to 570 nm, and the red-sensitive layer may have a maximum sensitivity wavelength of 600 to 740 nm.
The effective spectral light amount distribution of the present color printing light-sensitive material will be explained hereinafter. Assuming that the spectral transmittance distribution of coloring materials in a color print original such as color negative film is T
(A), the spectral sensitivity distribution of a light-sensitive layer such as green-sensitive layer in a color printing light-sensitive material is S (A), and the energy distribution of the printing light is P(A), the effective spectral sensitive energy distribution E (A) in the light-sensitive layer is given by the equation (1~
E (A) = S (A)-T (A)-P (A) (1-1) Accordingly, the effective sensitive light amount of, for example, the green sensitive layer is given by the equation (1-2):
~ 570 Eg = J Sg (A)-Tm (A)-P (A) dA (1-2) The effective spectral sensitive energy distribu-tion given by the equation (1-1) is called effective spectral light amount distribution.
The present invention features that at least two of the effective spectral light amount distribution of a blue-sensitive layer (BL), a green-sensitive layer (GL) 13~31~
and a red-sensitive layer (RL) in a printing light-sensi-tive material, i.e., Eb (A), Eg (A) and Er (A), respectively, are substantially independent each other.
In the present invention, it is preferred that at least Eg (A) and Er (A) or Eg (A) and Eb (A), preferably Eb (A), Eg (A) and Er (A) each is substantially independent each other. In particular, if within a range of 10% or less, preferably 7% or less of the effective spectral light amount (Eb, Eg or Er) of a light-sensitive layer obtained by printing grey images from a color negative film obtained by photographing a grey object, are contained or not contained, the effective spectral light amounts of the other light-sensitive layers~or if within a range of only about 15% or less or preferably about 7% or less of the maximum value of the effective spectral light amount distribution (Eb (A), Eg (A) or Er (A)) of a light-sensitive layer, effective spectral light amount distributions of the other light-sensitive layers are contained, the color mixture is not substantially definitely observed, and this means that the effective spectral light amount distribution in these light-sensitive layers are substantially independent.
For example, for the green-sensitive layer (GL) in a color printing light-sensitive material, if in a wavelength band of 485 to 570 nm Er (A) and Ef (A) are limited within a range of Eg (A) x 0.15 or less or there are no Er (~) and Eb (~), or if in a wavelength band of 485 to 570 nm Er and Eb are limited within a range of Eg x 0.10 or less or there are no Er and Eb, it can be said that the effective spectral sensitive light amount distribution Eg (~) of the green-sensitive layer is substantially independent from that of the other light-sensitive layers.
In order to improve color reproducibility, it is necessary that the coloring material to be used in the color printing light-sensitive material be particularly improved and the color development doesn't cause mixture on color images due to residual color, stain, poor desilvering, etc. Preferably, it is necessary that the spectral sensitivity of a photographing color light-sensitive material be predetermined as described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 89,850/88. More preferably, it is necessary that a coloring material comprising a yellow coupler or magenta coupler be improved so as to have a block type spectral transmittance.
The silver halide emulsion to be incorporated in the present color printing light-sensitive material, particularly in GL or RL preferably doesn't have an inherent sensitivity in the wavelength band for BL and a longer wavelength band.
13391~2 The present color printing light-sensitive material is formed of such a silver halide emulsion and spectrally sensitized in such a manner that Eb (~), Eg (~) or Er (~) of each light-sensitive layer is independent.
The blue-sensitive layer (BL) is not always required to be spectally sensitized due to an inherent sensitivity of silver halide, but it may be preferably spectrally sensitized in such a manner that the maximum inherent sensitive wavelength thereof is set at 460 nm or less, preferably the wavelength band for BL or less, to provide a high rapidness in color development or inhibit mixture. Preferably, in order to provide a wavelength ~smaX of the maximum S(~) of BL given by a J-type spectral sensitization, any suitable sensitizing dye selected from those represented by the general formula (I) explained later may be used.
In order to evaluate the color reproducibility, a Macbeth chart comprising 18 ch~omatic colors and 6 achromatic colors may be commonly used. Examples of such a Macbeth chart are described in C.S.M. MaCamy, "J. Appl.
Phot. Eng.", Vol. 2, pp. 95-99, 1976.
In the present invention, such a Macbeth chart is used to define the average color mixing degree in a color printing light-sensitive material as described hereinafter. By setting the average color mixing degree thus defined at 0.13 or less, an unprecedentedly excellent color reproduction on a color printing light-sensitive material from a color print original can be attained.
In the color printing light-sensitive material, the green-sensitive layer generally tends to deteriorate the color reproducibility among the three light-sensitive layers, i.e., blue-sensitive layer, green-sensitive layer and red-sensitive layer. Therefore, the green-sensitive layer in the color printing light-sensitive material will be further described hereinafter. Assuming that the spectral transmittance distribution of a color negative material obtained by photographing color chart i is Ti(A), the spectral sensitivity distribution of the green-sensitive layer in a color printing light-sensitive material is S(A), and the energy distribution of a printing light source is P(A), the exposure of the green-sensitive layer for color chart i is given by the equation (2-1).
Ei = S(A) ~ Ti(A) ~P(A) ~dA (2-1) 485 i = 1 to 24 1339I9~
In general, printing is made in such manner that achromatic image having a middle density are printed to get achromatic image having a predetermined density on a color printing light-sensitive material. Accordingly, if the exposure amount Ei of the color charts are determined based on the exposure amount E22 of achromatic chart (i=22 an optical density is amount about 0.7) Hi defined by the following equation (2-2) can represent whether the color exposure amount ~i of chart i is larger or smaller;
comparing with a standard of achromatic iamge.
Hi = Ei/E22 (2-2) A spectral sensitivity distribution in a delta function form having a 5 nm width in the center of the main maximum sensitive wavelength of the green-sensitive layer is the most preferable spectral sensitivity distribution, and Hi at the main maximum sensitive wavelength is defined as Hi~, ~i defined on the equation (2-3) represents the magnitude of the deviation of the exposure amount of color chart i from the ideal exposure amount.
~i = Hi/Hi~ (2-3) Accordingly, the color mixing degree on an exposure for printing or at the printing (hereinafter refer to the color mixing degree) Bi of color chart i can be defined as shown by the equation (2-4).
133~92 Bi = ~i ~ 1.0 (2-4) Therefore, the average color mixing degree on an exposure for printing (hereinafter refer to the average color mixing degree) r can be defined by averaging the color mixing degree ~i of color chart i over 18 Macbeth chromatic charts as shown in the equation (2-5).
r= 18 x~ (2-5) The average color mixing degree of the blue-sensitive layer and the red-sensitive layer can be similarly defined and easily determined with the effective wavelength band set at 390 to 485 nm and 570 to 740 nm, respectively.
According to the Inventors' study, with respect to a color printing light-sensitive material, the color mixing degree of each chromatic chart has a close relathionship with the average color mixing degree. In the present invention, the degree of color mixture can be represented by the color mixing degree or average color mixing degree on an exposure for printing (at the printing) in each of the light-sensitive layers. When the average color mixing degree is 0.13 or less, preferably 13391~
0.12 or less, particularly 0.10 or less in each of the light-sensitive layers, an excellent color reproducibility can be attained. Alternatively, when the color mixing degree of a Macbeth chart Y (i = 16) of at least one light-sensitive layer of the color printing light-sensitive material is 0.44 or less, preferably 0.42 or less, particularly 0.40 or less, an excellent reproducibility can be attained. When there is no color mixture, the color mixing degree is 0Ø However, if the average color mixing degree is 0.03 or less, it can be said that there is substantially no color mixing degree.
In the present invention, the blue-sensitive layer, the green-sensitive layer and the red-sensitive layer all have 0.13 or less of average color mixing degree thus defined above.
The silver halide light-sensitive emulsion generally absorbs light to provide a latent image or becomes light-sensitive in a wavelength band of less than about 540 nm for a silver bromoiodide emulsion, less than about 500 nm for a silver bromide emulsion, or less than about 420 nm for a silver chloride emulsion as described in T. H. James, "The Theory of the Photographic Process", 4th Ed., 1977, pp. 39-44. Therefore, the halogen composition of particulate silver halide and the process 13391~2 for the formation of crystalline particulate silver halide are important in the present invention.
In the case of the blue-sensitive layer, the silver halide light-sensitive emulsion may or may not be subjected to spectral sensitization to obtain a blue-sensitive layer. The inherent spectral sensitivity distribution of the silver halide is an important factor to improve the color mixing degree. The shorter the wavelength band of the inherent spectral sensitivity distribution is, the more advantageous is the effect.
In the case of the green-sensitive or red-sensitive layer, a silver halide light-sensitive emulsion which has been spectrally sensitized may or may not be provided with a dye-containing layer such as a filter layer which is adapted to cut light in a blue-sensitive wave-length band. Such a green-sensitive layer or red-sensitive layer may be provided on a support. Therefore, it is important to decrease the color mixing degree, especially, between the blue-sensitive layer and the green-sensitive layer or between the blue-sensitive layer and the red-sensitive layer is lowered.
In the present invention, a silver halide emulsion having a low silver iodide content or average silver bromide content is preferably incoporated in the silver halide emulsion layer, particularly in the blue-sensitive layer and/or green-sensitive layer. Particularly, a silver halide emulsion layer having 2 mol% or less of layer average silver iodide content, or being free of silver iodide is preferably used. Furthermore, a silver halide emulsion layer having an average silver bromide content of 80 mol% or less is preferably used.
According to the present invention in which at least two or three of effective spectral light amount distributions Eb (~), Eg (~) and Er (~) are made substantially independent from each other color reproducibility is remarkably improved when the distribution of proper spectral sensitivity of the photographing color light-sensitive material to the object of the photographing color light-sensitive material to the object is fully improved by a suitable method as described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 34,541/86, 201,245/86, 158,779/87 and 89850/88 or a coloring material to be used in the color printing light-sensitive material, especially coupler is fully improved.
As a method to attain the objects of the present invention, a suitable filter or a filter layer can be used. A suitable filter or a filter layer can be used to restrict the main sensitive wavelength band of the blue-sensitive layer, the green-sensitive lauyer and the red-sensitive layer in the present color printing light-sensitive material to, for example, 400 to 485 nm, 485 to 570 nm, and 570 to 750 nm, respectively. However, if the spectral absorption distribution of the filter is broad or is not predetermined in a proper wavelength band, it may deteriorate color balance or color reproduction.
In the present invention, the average color mixing degree as defined above can be adjusted to 0.13 or less by providing a filter or a filter layer substantially between the light source and the light-sensitive layer in the color printing light-sensitive material when images are printed on the color printing light-sensitive material in a subtractive exposure process. Alternatively, the average color mixing degree as defined above can be adjusted to 0.13 or less by providing in combination a color printing light-sensitive material comprising a blue-sensitive layer, a green-sensitive layer and a red-sensitive layer as described above and the filter or filter layer as described above.
The filter which can be used in the present invention may be interposed between the light source for use in the subtractive exposure process and the concerned light-sensitive layer in the printing light-sensitive material. Any optical filter otherwise prepared, filter layer incorporated in a color print original or filter layer provided on the light source side in the 133~192 concerned light-sensitive layer in a color printing light-sensitive material may be preferably used so long as it gives 0.13 or less for the degree of color mixture in the color printing light-sensitive material.
In the present invention, a filter having a spectral absorption band which substantially exists in a wavelength band excluding the band of ~20 nm, preferably ~15 nm of the maximum effective spectral light amount ~EmaX of each light-sensitive layer is preferably interposed between the light source and the color printing light-sensitive material during the printing process.
The terminology "substantially exists" means half the width value or three-fourths the width value is used in the spectral transmittance curve.
A filter having an absorption band in a wavelength band, e.g., of less than 400 nm, 485 to 525 nm, or 570 to 630 nm may be preferably used.
Furthermore, a filter layer previously provided on a color negative film or a filter layer provided on the top layer of a light-sensitive layer in a color printing light-sensitive material may be preferably used in combination with such a filter. In addition, it is important that within a rangd of the main sensitivity zone of the concerned light sensitive layer,which lies in a range of ~smaX ( the maximum sensitive wavelength) +20 nm, preferably ~smax ~30 nm, more preferably ~EmaX (the maximum effective spectral light amount) ~15 nm, most particularly ~EmaX ~20 nm, the other layers substantially have no spectral sensitivity. Por example, the green-sensitive layer is not sensitive to the light within a range of the wavelength ~bsmax ~20 nm to which range the blue-sensitive layer is sensitive. To this end, the green-sensitive layer may be subjected to a spectral sensitization process which gives a sharp spectral sensitivity distribution. Secondly, the green-sensitive layer may comprise a silver halide emulsion having substantially no or low sensitivity in the above described wavelength band. This can apply to other light-sensitive layers.
As a suitable filter there may be preferably used a band cut filter which comprises a multilayer dielectric-compound thin film as described hereinafter.
The band stop filter to be used in the present invention is a solid filter which has been prepared by repeatedly applying a silicon oxide layer and an aluminum oxide layer on a transparent substrate.
As a suitable substrate there may be used a substrate capable of withstanding a heat treatment such as hot coating. Examples of such a substrate include quartz, glass, ceramics, and plastic. Preferred among these 133~132 materials are silicon oxide containing materials such as quartz and glass. The thickness of the substrate is preferably in the range of 0.2 to 2 mm. The silicon oxide or aluminum oxide layer has a thickness of 300 to 5,000 A.
The silicon oxide layer and the aluminum oxide layer are alternately provided on the substrate.
The present band stop filter having any spectral absorption characteristics in the visible band can be obtained by providing a multilayer structure of silicon oxide layer and aluminum oxide layer having different optical thicknesses (refractive index and thickness).
Such a multilayer structure can provide a stabilized finish quality excellent in fastness to light, heat and scratch.
The filter has preferably 7 or more, more preferably 21 to 101, particularly 47 or more layers. The more, particularly more than 20, the number of layers is, the higher is the maximum absorptivity of the band stop filter, and the sharper is the spectral absorption charac-teristics obtained in the specified wave length band.
Such a multilayer structure can provide a less change in the spectral absorption characteristics due to a deviation of the angle of incidence from the axial direction in the band stop filter.
1333l92 In the present filter, a protective layer having a thickness preferably greater than that of the other layers is provided as its top layer. Such a protective layer can be provided by applying preferably a layer of silicon oxide or aluminum oxide, more preferably a layer of silicon oxide, to a thickness of 500 A to 1 ~m. Such a protective layer having a greater thickness than the other layers can further improve the scratch resistance and chemically protect the multilayer film, providing a band stop filter excellent in strage ability.
Therefore, a suitable filter according to the present invention is a band stop filter which has been prepared by applying 5 or more layers, preferably 21 to 101 layers, on a substrate and providing a protective layer having a greater thickness than the other layers thereon.
The present band stop filter can be obtained by alternately depositing silicon oxidè and aluminum oxide on a substrate. The deposition of the material can be accomplished by any common method such as vacuum deposition, PVD (Physical Vapor Deposition) process such as ion plating process , or CFD (Chemical Vapor Deposition) process such as plasma deposition process.
The degree of vacuum is preferably in the range of lO-ll to 10-4 torr, particularly 10-6 to 10-4 torr with nitrogen 133919~
gas or an inert gas such as argon and helium, optionally mixed with oxygen gas.
The layer structure, thickness and constituting material of the present stop filter can be determined by observing the section of the filter under an electron microscope or by ESCA. -The process for the formation of color images on asilver halide color light-sensitive material comprises photographing an object or image exposure such as copying or printing from a color original, and then color-devel-oping the silver halide color light-sensitive material.
Particularly, the image exposure can be effected by any suitable method selected from the three processes (collective simultaneous exposure process, slit exposure process, and simultaneous slit exposure process), additive exposure process, and subtractive exposure process. The band stop filter according to the present invention can be effectively used in all thesè exposure processes, particularly in the subtractive exposure process.
As a suitable silver halide color light-sensitive material for the present invention there can be preferably used a negative/positive or positive/positive working process printing color light-sensitive material such as color photographic paper, color reversal photographic paper, color reversal film, silver die bleach process 133~192 color photographic paper, direct positive type color photographic paper, diffusion transfer type color photographic paper, heat-developable diffusion transfer type color photographic paper or film. These color light-sensitive materials can be used to directly photograph objects. Therefore, the present band stop filter can be used for an exposing machine, printer, mini-laboratory system printer and copying machine by which these color light-sensitive materials are processed. The present band stop filter can be preferably used in place of a band stop filter or band cut filter as described in Japanese Patent Application Nos. 229,856/87, 223,053/87, 239,032/87, and 260,357/87. The present band stop filter can also be used for an exposing machine or autoprinter for printing on an ordinary color photographic paper in the white light subtractive process as described in Japanese Patent Application Nos. 146,542/87, 200,508/87, 146,544/87, 191,187/87, and 255,048/87.
The present band stop filter preferably has a maximum absorption wavelength, preferably an absorption wavelength band, in a wavelength band outside the maximum wavelength il5 nm, preferably the maximum wavelength ~20 nm, in the maximum sensitiave wavelength or the effective spectral light amount distribution of the blue-sensitive layer, green-sensitive layer or red-sensitive layer in such a liqht-sensitive layer.
The present band stop filter preferably has a sharp spectral absorption. In its spectral transmittance curve, the ratio of a width of 1/4 value of spectral transmittance (Wl/4)to a width of 3/4 value of spectral transmittance (W3/4) is in the range of 0.50 or more, preferably 0.60 or more, more preferably 0.75 or more. As described above, such spectral characteristics can be attained by properly arranging layer thicknesses and a multilayer structure of repeating layers.
As such a substrate material there may be commonly used glass, silicon, sapphire, quartz, or surface-treated plastic film or plate. As suitable dielectrics there may be used dielectrics as described in Japan Society for the Promotion of Science's No. 131 Thin Film Committee, Handbook of Thin Film, Ohm-sha, 1983, Chapter 2.2 on page 817 and Table 2.6 on page 820. Examples of such dielectrics include inorganic compounds such as silicon dioxide, aluminum oxide, tin oxide, zirconium oxide, titanium, zinc sulfide, silicon, germanium, and tellurium, metal such as silver, aluminum, neodymium, titanium, and thallium, and organic dielectrics, particularly high molecular dfelectrics as described in Japan Society for the Promotion of Science's No. 131 Thin Film Committee, 13391g~
Handbook of Thin Film Ohm-sha, 1983, Chapter 2.2 on page 817, such as polystyrene, polypropylene, polyimide, FEP
(Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene Resin) teflon, and poly y-benzyl glutamate. These dielectrics may be used in combination.
A multilayer comprising 5 to 50 layers, optionally more layers, can be provided by repeatedly coating at least two dielectrics having different refractive indexes to a predetermined thickness. The design of such a multilayer is described in Japan Society for the Promotion of Science's No. 131 Thin Film Committee, Handbook of Thin Film, Chapter 4 on page 823, and Shiro Fujiwara, Optical Thin Film, 2nd ed., 1986, Kyoritsu Shuppan Co., Ltd., Chapter 6. Such a multilayer thin film can be prepared by the sputtering process, CVD film-forming process or vacuum evaporation process.
A suitable band stop filter to be used in the present invention has a narrow absorption band having a half value width on the spectral transmittance curve (Wl/2) of preferably less than 60 nm, more preferably 10 to 60 nm. Furthermore, the present band stop filter has a minimum transmittance of preferably 30% or less, more preferably 20% or less, particularly 10% or less.
Furthermore, a band stop filter preferably having a spectral transmittance of 70% or more and a lowest transmittance in spectral absorption band of preferably 20% or less, more preferably 10% or less, may be preferably has a shape coefficient Wl/4/W3/4 ( W1~4 represents 1/4 of spectral transmittance, and W3/4 represents 3/4 of spectral transmittance) of 0.5 or more.
Furthermore, a band stop filter having a spectral absorption in a wavelength band of 430 nm or less, 490 to 530 nm, or 570 to 630 nm.
The average color mixing degree in the present invention can widely vary depending on the sensitizing dye used, halogen composition, etc. However, since the average color mixing degree in each element can be adjusted to 0.13 or less in accordance with the present invention by providing a filter having a necessary spectral transmittance (calculated from the average color mixing degree), such a multilayer dielectric-deposited thin film is advantageous in that it can easily attain the present average color mixing degree.
Another example of a suitable layer is a filter layer to be incorporated in a color negative light-sensitive material. This process is intended to provide the light-sensitive layer side or back side in the color negative light-sensitive material with a spectral absorption by a masking colored coupler. For example, such a filter layer may be provided as a nondecolorizable dye-containing filter layer. This process may also be intended to correct undesired absorption by color dyes incorporated in the color negative light-sensitive material. Such a filter layer can be formed using, a colored coupler which has been prepared by optimizing the spectral absorptivity of a conventional colored coupler so as to give 0.13 or less for the color mixing degree in a color printing light-sensitive material. As such a filter layer there can be used a filter layer comprising a colored coupler as described in U.S. Patent Nos.
2,852,370, 2,860,975, 2,841,678, and 3,184,307, French Patent No. 73,826, West German Patent Application Disclosure No. 2,125,220, Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 45,732/72, 123,341/75, and 130,024/79, Japanese Patent Publication Nos. 19,889/73, and 21,565/73, and British Patent No. 755,458. Part'icularly preferred are colored couplers as described in the patent application 129,143/87.
Such a filter layer may be provided by dyeing a hydrophilic light-sensitive layer (which may serve as an antihalation layer at the same time) disposed between a support and the nearest light-sensitive layer in a color negative light-sensitive material, dyeing the back layer of the support, or dyeing the support itself.
Particularly preferred dyes which can be used in such a dyeing can be selected from the group consisting of nondecolorizable dyes having a sharp spectral absorption in a wavelength band between the maximum spectral sensitivity of BL and GL in the color negative light-sensitive material, e.g., 485 to 530 nm, such as dyes described as specific examples in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 45,237/85 (pages. 6 to 11).
Alternatively, a nondecolorizable dye having a sharp spectral absorption in a wavelength band between the maximum spectral sensitivity of GL and RL in the color negative light-sensitive material, e.g., 570 to 630 nm may be preferably used. Such a nondecolorizable dye can be selected from the group consisting of anthraquinone dye, triphenylmethane dye, cyanine dye, melocyanine dye, pyrazolonexazole dye, azo dye, phthalocyanine dye, indoaniline dye, and indigo dye. If the above described two types of filter layers are provided in combination, the printing by the subtractive exposure process can be effected as easily as in the conventional process. This process can improve the color mixing degree without deteriorating the color reproducibility, sensitivity and sharpness of the color negative light-sensitive material.
1~391~
Further example of a suitable filter layer is a filter layer incorporated in the color printing light-sensitive material. Such a filter layer may be a filter layer capable of being decolored after development, provided on the light source side in a predetermined light-sensitive layer. Suitable dyes which can be incorporated in such a filter layer can be selected from the group consisting of dyes described in Japanese Patent Publication Nos. consisting of dyes described in Japanese Patent Publication Nos. 1,419/76, and 10,187/80, Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 154,439/84, and 64,346/85, French Patent Nos. 1,108,788, 2,182,329, and 3,514,450, and West German Patent No. 2,429,228. These dyes and a suitable method as described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 65,230/75, 56,345/86, and 19,842/87 can be used to provide the desired filter layer.
Particularly, functional dyes as described in Japanese Patent Application No. 106,892/87 to the present applicant may be preferably used in the present invention.
In the present printing light-sensitive material, it is preferred that a suitable filter layer is used while the spectral sensitivity distribution in the silver halide emulsion to be incorporated in the blue-sensitive layer and/or green-sensitive layer is shifted to a shorter wavelength band by reducing the average silver iodide 1~3919~
content and average silver bromide content and the mutual color separation in the spectral sensitivity distribution in the blue-sensitive layer, green-sensitive layer and red-sensitive layer is improved by properly selecting sensitizing dyes.
Conditions A), B) and C) referred to above in connection with the first aspect of the invention are as follows:
A) Silver halide emulsion used in the blue-sensitive layer and/or green-sensitive layer is an emulsion of silver chloride, silver bromide or silver chlorobromide containing 2 mol% or less (including 0%) of an average silver iodide content;
B) Silver halide emulsion used in the blue-sensitive layer is not spectrally sensitized or spectrally sensitized using at least one sensitizing dye selected from the group consisting of the compounds represented by the following formula (I) and (II);
C) Silver halide emulsion used in the green-sensitive layer is spectrally sensitized using at least one sensitizing dye selected from the group consisting of the compounds represented by the following formula (III).
..... -- Zl............ ... -- Z2 --Rl-N C=CH-C N - R2 (I) (CH=CH)jl (CH=CH) kl-(Xl)nl wherein Zl and Z2 each represents a benzothiazole nucleus, naphthothiazole nucleus, benzoselenazole nucleus, naphthoselenazole nucleus, benzooxazole nucleus, naphthooxazole nucleus, benzoimidazole nucleus, naphthoimidazole nucleus, indolenine nucleus, benzoindolenine nucleus, indole nucleus or guinoline nucleus which may be substitued; Rl and R2 each represents an alkyl group, alkenyl group, alkynyl group or aralkyl group; either or both of Rl and R2 each has at least one sulfonic acid group, carboxyl group or hydroxyl group; il and kl each represents an integer of O or l; nl represents an integer of O or l; and Xl~ represents an acid anion, with the proviso that when nl is 0, it indicates that an intramolecular salt is formed.
..--- Z2l.... / Q2 ~
R2l-N / ~ C N / (II) (CH=CH)j2 0 ~ R22 wherein Z21 has the same meaning as Zl or represents a thiazole nucleus, selenazole nucleus, oxazole nucleus, imidazole nucleus, thiazolizine nucleus, thiazoline nucleus, benzothiazoline nucleus, naphthothiazoline nucleus, selenazolizine nucleus, selenazoline nucleus, benzoselenazoline nucleus, naphthoselenazoline nucleus, benzooxazoline nucleus, naphthooxazoline nucleus, benzimidazoline nucleus, naphothoimidazoline nucleus, pyrroline nucleus, pryridine nucleus, dihydroprydine nucleus, dihydro~uinoline nucleus, benzoimidazoline nucleus or naphthoimidazoline nucleus which may be substituted; Q2 represents a sulfur atom, oxygen atom, selenium atom or ~N-R23; R2l, R22, and R23 each has the same meaning as Rl; and i2 has the same meaning as il.
In the general formulae (I) and (II), the heterocycle formed by Zl, Z2 and Z21 may contain a substituent such as halogen atom, e.g., F. Cl and Br, 133~192 lower alkyl group, e.g., methyl group, ethyl group, trifluoromethyl group, benzyl group, phenethyl group, hydroxyl group, and alkoxy group, acetyl group e.g., phenyl group, chlorophenyl group, carboxyl group and estrified carboxyl group, carbamoyl group, and sulfamoyl group. Particularlly, a group which particularly forms a J-band, halogen atom, trifluoromethyl group, aryl group, and estrified carboxyl group may be preferably used.
As Rl, R2, R2l, R22 or R23 there can be used a group commonly used for cyanine dye, such as Cl_6 lower alkyl group, alkoxyalkyl group, acetoxyalkyl group, alkylureidoalkyl group, hydroxyalkyl group, chloroalkyl group, sulfoalkyl group, carboxyalkyl group, allyl group, benzyl group, and phenethyl group. A combination of a compound represented by the general formula (I) and a compound represented by the general formula (II) may be used.
Specific examples of compounds represented by the general formulae (I) and (II) will be shown hereinafter.
However, the present invention should not be construed as being limited to these examples.
I-- (1) c e > c H~N~C
(CHz)3 tCH2)3 S 03N a S 03 I-- (2) H 3 C O N> C H~+ ~0 H
(CHz)3 (CHz)s C 3 ~- (3) +~ C H /
( C H z) 4 ( C H 2) ~
S 03 S 03HN(CzHs)3 ~ 46 --I - ( 4 ) N > C H ~ S
( C H 2) z ( C H 2) 2 S 0 3 K ~S 0 3 I - ( ~ ) ~ > C H
( C H 2) 3 ( C H 2) 3 S 0 3 N a S 0 3 I - ( 6 ) ( C H 2) I ( C H 2) 3 133~19~
1- (7) J~ > C H ~ +
( C H z~ s ( C H 2) 3 S OsK - I
I-- (8) ,J~ ~> C H ~--< +~
H3C I I OCHs ( C H 2) 3 S O 3( C H 2) S S 0 3 N a I-- t9 ) ~3Cse> ~ S ~3 - (CH2)s tC H2)3 SOsK
-- 48 ~
13~192 I- (1 0) N> C H~ ;~3 S03K - i I-- tl 1) - -( C ~ ~) I-- (1 2) ¢~ > C H~ ' ~ C H 3 (CH 2) s CH2 I o~N>-' (CHz)J
S 03N a ~- (2) [~ N> o ~N>--(CH2)2S 03K
~- (3) ¢~( C }12) 3 S 03~ a 13391'92 ~- (4) Na 03S(C Hz)~ S>_ O
~- (5) ~ ~5 (CH2)3 C z H s S 05N a ~- (6) ~N> ~>~ S
N
( IC H 2) 3 ~
S 03N a ~- (7) [~CN> ~S' (C Hz)3 ~ C2Hs S 03N a ~- (8) (CHz)3 0 S 03N a The amount of the compound of the general formula (I) and/or (II) to be incorporated in the blue-sensitive layer is not specifically limited but is normally in the range of 10-6 to 1 x 10-2 mol, preferably S x 10-5 to 2 x 10-3 mol per 1 mol of silver halide.
Furthermore, a sensitizing dye which is strongly spectrally sensitized in a wavelength band of 485 to 570 nm, preferably about 520 nm, to 570 nm, particularly 530 nm to 570 nm may be preferably incorporated in the green-sensitive layer. A silver halide emulsion wherein inherent sensitivity of silver halide has been shifted to a short wavelength band shorter than 420 nm by using low silver iodide and silver bromide content silver halide particles may be preferably incorporated in the green-sensitive layer. In particular, a silver halide emulsion which is sensitized in a J-band may be preferably incorporated in the green-sensitive layer. Preferred examples of such a compound include those represented by the general formula (III):
Z3~ l33 Z32 Rl-N C=CH-C=CH-C N - R2 ~ D+ ( III) (CH=CH)j3 (CH=CH)k3 (X3~)n3 133~
wherein Z31 has represents benzimidazole nucleus, benzooxazole nucleus, naphthoimidazole nucleus or naphthooxazole nucleus; Z32 represents benzimidazole nucleus, naphthoimidazole nucleus benzooxazole nucleus, naphthooxazole nucleus, benzothiazole nucleus or benzoselenazole nucleus which may be substitued; R3l and R32 each has the same meaning as Rl and R2 in the general formula (I); R33 represents a hydrogen atom, lower alkyl group or aralkyl group; j3 and k3 have the same meaning as il in the general formula (I); n3 has the same meaning as nl in the general fromula (I); and X3- represents an acid anion. .
Examples of suitable substituents which can be contained in the heterocycle formed by Z31 and Z32 in the general formula (III) include those described a suitable substituents for heterocycle formed by Zlt Z2 and Z21 with reference to the general formulae (I) and (II).
Specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (II) will be shown hereinafter, but the present invention should not be construed as being limited thereto.
m~
C2Hs ,CH3 >~C H--C = C H~\+~i~'C H 3 (C H2)3 (C H2)3 S.03K S 03 m ( 2) C H--8 = c H~+ ~ c e (CH2)3 (CH2)3 S OsK S 03 m- (3) C2 H s C ~ >--C H--C H= C H~+~
CH2(CH2)2H (C H2)3 m- (4) = ~~>~C H--C----C H--<~
C2Hs (C H2)3 ~ 55 --m- (s) CH-C=CH
S03H-N(C2Hs)3 23 m- (6) C 2 Hs CH-C=CH~
(4H2)3 (~H2)3 ~ .
S03H-N(CzHs)3 ¦
m- (7) CH-C=CH-~
S03H-N ~ (CHz)3 m- (8) C2Hs - ~ ~ CH-C=CH ~ +
N N
(CHz)3S03N a - 56 ~
13391~;~
m-C2Hs C ~. >~ C H--C = C H ~ ~
(CH2)3 ( Hz)3 S 03K ~ 03 m - ( 1 o ) F >--C H--C= C H~ i ~L''F
(CHz)3S 03N a (CHz)3S 03 m- (1 1) C Q C2Hs C~H5 C
~' ~. >--CH - CH= C H~
CF3 (CH2)3S03Na (CHz)~S03 m - ( 1 2 ) C 2 H s C Q >--C H - C = C H--~ ~'~C
(CHz)3 ( Hz)s I
S 03N a - S 03 m ~ ( 1 3 ) >~C H--C H = C H--~ ~
C2Hs (CH2)~S O 3 m- (14) X~ ~C H = C H--C H--<
S OsK S 03 m - ( 1 5 ) C2Hs - C2Hs ~ ~CH--CH=CH~
H3C(CH2) 300C ( C H 2) 3 I COO~CH2~ :-CI~
~ 58 ~
The amount of the compound of the general formula (III) to be incorporated in the green-sensitive layer is not specifically limited but is normally in the range of 1 x 10-6 to 1 x 10-2 mol, preferably 5 x 10-5 to 2 x 10-3 mol per 1 mol of silver halide. Two or more sensitizing dyes of the general formula (III) may be incorporated in combination in the green-sensitive layer.
As described above, a silver halide emulsion having a low silver iodide content or low silver a bromide content may be advantageously incorporated in the green-sensitive layer to inhibit color mixture with the blue-sensitive layer.
The red-sensitive layer is spectrally sensitized with a sensitizing dye which gives a strong spectral sensitization in a wavelength band where the spectral absorption by a magenta dye is not observed, e.g., wavelength band of longer than 600 nm, preferably 630 nm, depending on the spectral absorption by a cyan dye in the color negative original. A silver halide emulsion as described above may be preferably incorporated in the red-sensitive layer to inhibit overlapping with the blue-sensitive layer.
Spectral sensitization preferably carried out so that an average color mixing degree with blue sensitive 133gl~2 layer and a color mixing degree with green sensitive layer is each less than 0.13.
The red-sensitive layer to be used in the present invention may be preferably spectrally sensitized with a sensitizing dye represented by the general formula (IV), (V), or (VI).
... Z41 .......... R143 ;~44 ....... Z42 .
R41-N (CH=CII) j4 C=CH (C = C)m4l C =CH-CH~= i~ (IV) (X4~)n4 133319~
wherein Z41 and Z42 each represents a 5- or 6-membered heterocyclic nucleus such as thiazole nucleus, benzothiazole nucleus, naphthothiazole nucleus, selenazole nucleus, benzoselenazole nucleus, naphthoselenazole nucleus, oxazole nucleus, benzooxazole nucleus, naphthooxazole nucleus, imidazole nucleus, benzimidazole nucleus, naphthoimidazole nucleus, 4-quinoline nucleus, pyrroline nucleus, pyridine nucleus, tetrazole nucleus, indolenine nucleus, benzindolenine nucleus, indole nucleus, telrazole nucleus, benzotelrazole nucleus, and naphthotelrazole nucleus; R41 and R42 each represents an alkyl group which may be substituted by a substituent such as halogen atom, cyano group, alkoxy group, substituted or unsubstituted amino group, carboxylic acid group, sulfononic acid group, and hydroxy group; alkenyl group;
alkynyl group or aralkyl group; m41 represents an integer of 1 to 3; j4 and k4 each represents an integer of O to l;
X4 represents an acid ion; and n4 represents an integer of O or 1, with the proviso than when m4l is 1, R43 represents a hydrogen atom, lower alkyl group, aralkyl group or aryl group and R44 represents a hydrogen atom, when m41 is 2 or 3, R43 represents a hydrogen atom and R44 represents a hydrogen atom, lower alkyl group or aralkyl group, and R43 may be connected to other R43's to form a hydrocarbon ring or a heterocyclic ring.
.Zsl..... , 754 Qs .................. Z52 Rsl-N (CH=C~)j5 C=CH (C ~ C C=CH-C ~ CH-CH ~ N~
n5 ll I R52 o Rs3 (Xs )n5 (V) ~here In whcrcn Z51 and Z52 each has the same meaning as Z41 or Z42;
Rsl and Z52 each has the same meaning as R41 or R42: R53 represents an alkyl group, alkenyl group, alkynyl group or aryl group such as substituted or unsubstitued phenyl group; m5 represents an integer of 0, 1 or 2; R54 represents a hydrogen atom, lower alkyl group or aryl; Q5 re~resenfs rcpr~6cnt a sulfur atom, oxygen atom, selenium atom or >N-R55 in which R55 has the same meaning as R53; J5, R5l,X5~e and n5 have the same meaning as J4, K4, x4e and n4, respectively, with the proviso that when m5 represents 2, R54 may be connceted to other R54's to form a hydrocarbon ring or a heterocyclic ring which is preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring.
13391~2 Z6l 763 R61-N (CH=CII)j6 C-C~ - C - C C=S (VI) m6 C N
Il I
wheren Z61 represents an atomic garoup required to form a heterocyclic ring (e.g. those as described with reference to Z41 and Z42, such as thiazolidine, thiazoline, benzo-thiazoline, naphthothiazoline, selenazolidine, selena-zoline, benzoselenazoline, naphthoselenazoline, benzo-oxazoline, naphthooxazoline, dihydropyridine, dihydro-quinoline, benzimidazoline, and haphthoimidazoline); Q6 has the same meansing as Q5; R61 has the same meaning as R51 or R52; R62 has the same meaning as R53; m6 has the same meaning as m5; ~ has the same meansing as R54; and j6 has the same meaning as j5, with the proviso that when m6 is 2 or 3, R63 may be connceted to other R63's to form a hydrocarbon or heterocyclic ring.
Specific examples of suitable sensitizing dyes which can be used in the present invention will be shown hereinafter.
133~1~2 J~ >--C H--C= C H~
CQ ' I I C~
(CH2)3 tCHz)3 S03Na S03-IV- (2) C H--C -- C H ~
(CH2)3 ( I H2) S 03N a S 03-IV- (3) S
~C >~ C H--C = C H ~
[~ C 2 H s ( C ~I 2) 3 ~JJ
~- (4) - ~ ~ CH-C=CH
- (CHz)4 (CH2)~
S03N a - S 03-N-- (5) C2Hs ~ ~ CH-C=CH ~ ~
C~ I I C-OOH
(CH2)3 C2Hs S Os ~- (6) CH-CH=CH ~ C 2 Hs CHzCOOH
133919~
N-- (7) ~' JS>_~ H~CH~ CH3 H3C CzHs (CH2)3 (8) C H~C H
C2Hs I~) CzHs r~- (9) ~ >~ C H~C H ~ ~
H3CO C2Hs IO CzHs ~ 66 ~
r~-- (1 O) H3C ~S \ I . S ~, CH3 CH--CH= C--CH=CH~+ ~
(CH2)3s03 CH2CH2 ~3 IV- ( 1 1 ) H3CO >--C H ~C H ~+ :1~ O C H 3 C 2 ~I S (CH2)3S03 IV - ( 1 2 ) + ~--CH--CH = C--CN = CH~ + ~3 (CH2)3SO3Na (CH2)3S03 IV- (13) C H 3 ~3 (CH2)3S03Na (CHz)3S03 - ( 1 4 ) ~~ >--CN--Cll = C--Cll = CII~
(CHz)3S 03 C2Hs IV- ( 1 5 ) C2Hs C2Hs ~T C~ >--CN--Cll= C--CH=CN~ =cc ,Ç!, (CH2)3S 03K (CH2)3S 03 ~ 68 --133919~
IV- (16) j~;>~C H~C H~Se~J
C 2 Hs (C H.) 3 S 0 3 ~t-- (1 7) ,~Se I ~S ~C H3 CH--CH= C--CH=C8~ _~~ C H3 (CHz)z ~3 (CHz)4SOs V- (1) >--C H--C H~ >-- CEI ~ ~
bJ C2H5 CH2CH=CH2 (CH2)3S 03 , Vl--(1) ~>--C H--C H--C--C H~5 >=5 .H~ CHzC00 Vl-- ( 2 ) C ~3 . C H
)~CN >~ C H ~ >=S
( C H 2) 3 S O s K C 2 H s VI--(3) H . C O >--C H--C H = C--C li ~--~ >~S
( C H2)SS 03K C2~1s 1339~92 The sensitizing dyes of the presenht invention represented by the general formulae (IV), (V) and (VI) mkay be used in an amount of 1 x 10-6 to 5 x lo-6 to 1 x 10-3 mol per 1 mol of silver halide, singly or in combination with other susper sensitizers.
In the present invention, the spectral transmittance distriubiton Ti(~) of a dye image obtained by the coupling reaction of a yellow, magenta or cyan coupler in a photographic color light-sensitaive material with a color developing agent affects the color mixing degree ~ or the layer average color mixing degree r as shown in Equation (2-1) or (2-5). a couler which provides an excellent color separation between dye images, e~
General formula (XI) referred to in the second aspect of the invention discussed previously, reads as follows:
Rl X N~ ~ CH=CE; ~ ~ ~ (XI
Y ~, N S03M M03S y wherein Rl, R2, R3 and R4 each represents ~ hydroxy group, \ halogen atom, heterocyclic amino group, ~ heterocyclic thio group, alkoxy group, amino group, alkylamino group, aryloxy group or arylamino group; X and Y each represents =N- or =CH-; and M represents a monovalent cation, with the proviso that X and Y don't represent =CH- at the same time, Preferably the pH value of the bleaching or blix solution is in the range of 3.5 to 6.0 and the replenishing amount of the rinsing solution and/or stabilizing solution is 3 to 50 times the amount of said solution carried over from the pre-bath~
_ ,, Unlike the blue-sensitive layer and the green-sensitive layer, the red-sensitive layer (RL) can be more easily provided depending on T( ~) of the coloring material in the color print original on a wavelength band longer than the wavelength band for the green-sensitive layer. Therefore, in order to make Er(~) independent from the other effective spectral sensitive energy distributions, any suitable sensitizing dye selected from those represent~d by the general formulas (IV), (V) and (VI) may be used to provide a maximum S( ~) given by a J-type or M-type spectral sensitization. Sensitizing dyes represented by the general formula (IV) may be used to give a J-type spectral sensitivity. Sensitizing dyes represented by the general formulas (V) and (VI) may be used to give an M-type spectral sensitivity.
The spectral sensitization in the present color printing light-sensitive material essentially features a J-type spectral sensitization or M-type spectral sensitization.
In the present invention, the effective spectral sensitive light volume distribution in the green-sensitive layer (Eg(~ )) is given substantially by a J-type spectral sensitization, and the effective spectral sensitive distribution in the red-sensitive layer (Er(~)) is given substantially by an M-type spectral sensitization or J-type spectral sensitization.
A J-type spectral sensitization is a sensitization by spectral absorption obtained by adsorption by J aggregates on a silver halide adsorbing substrate of a sensitizing dye. An M-type spectral sensitization is a sensitization by spectral absorption obtained by molecular adsorption by a sensitizing dye.
Examples of these types of spectral sensitizations are described in T. H. James, "The Theory of the Photographic Process", 4th ed., 1977, pp. 218-222.
For examplke, if Eg(~) is attributed to a J-type spectral sensitization, it means that Eg(~ doesn't exhibit the maximum value of Eg(~) corresponding to an M-type spectral esnsitization.
If Eg(~) is substantially attributed to a J-type spectral sensitization, it means that in the wavelength band for the green-sensitive layer the maximum value of Eg(A) corresponding to an M-type spectral sensitization does not exhibit a value over the value of about one-second, preferably one-third the maximum value of Eg(~ corresponding to a J-type spectral esnsitization.
, .
133gl92 In accordance with the relationship between the effective spectral sensitive light volume distribution E(~) and the spectral sensitivity distribution S(A, in a color printing light-sensitive material determined by the equation Ul), when S( ~) is attributed to a J-type spectral sensitization, E(~) corresponding to the wavelength is normally attributed to a J-type spectral sensitization. Those skilled in the art can determine whether E (A ) is attibuted to a J-type spectral sensitization or M-t~pe spectral sensitization from the structure of a sensitization dye used, the spectral absorption characteristics of the solution of the sensitizing dye, and the spectral absorption characteristics of the sensitizing dye adsorbed by silver halide. In general, the compound represented by the general formula (XI)has a strong effect of supersensitization for the M-type spectral sensitization of the present invention and thus tends to convert an H-type or J-type adsorption into an M-type adsorption. Those skilled in the art can unde.sL~ if-a spectral sensitization hPl~ngq to M~type or noe from the spectral absol ~ on characteristics of the sensitizing dye with respect to a silver halide adsorbing substrate which has been adjusted for a proper halogen composition by the use of, for example, Compound XI-(9) among compounds represented by the general formula (XI).
1339i~2 The present invention is advantageous in that S(~), which is a factor of E(~), is attributed to an M-type spectral sensitization, J-type spectral sensiitzation, or a spectral sensitization of a single structure such as inherent sensitivity of silver halide. Therefore, the gradation of images has a less fluctuation due to conditions of the object and printing conditions, and the gradation reproduction has a wide latitude. This is extremely advantageous to the present invention. On the other hand, the use of a J-type spectral sensitization leaves to be desired in that it is difficult for aggregates of a sensitizing dye to be removed during the color development, causing color leaving and stain. Furthermore, the use of a J-type spectral sensitization is disadvantageous in that it tends to retard the progress of color development, particularly the progress of blix of reduced silver. Therefore, such a defect can be eliminated by an improvement in the development process.
A coloring material in which T(~) of the coloring material in a photographing color light-sensitive material is reflected by E(~), particularly a magenta coloring material and a yellow coloring material is important in the present invention. Parti-cularly, a coupler represented by the general formula (VIII) may by advantageously used in the present invention. Such a coupler is advantageous in that it facilitates the use of a masking coloring material for the longer wavelength side in a yellow coloring material or filter coloring material which is adapted to improve E( ~ of GL in a color printing light-sensitive material. The use of such a coupler or a benzoylacetanilide type yellow co~pler can provide a thin light-sensitive layer or improve image sharpness.
In a green sensitive layer (GL), the sensitizing dye may be selected from those represented by formula (III) to provide a maximum S(A) given by J-type spectral sensitization in order to make Eg(A) independent from Eb(A) or Er(A). Especially, it is preferred to carry out spectral sensitization so as to decrease a contribution by M-type spectral sensitization. For the purpose, a use of CR-compounds disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Nos.
311131/86 and 47225/87 is preferred.
' 1339192 The color printing light-sensitive material according to the present invention may be printed from a color print original, particularly from a color genative film or color slide, in the above described white color exposure process.
A sharp band stop filter having a spectral absorption band in a wavelength band other than the range of ~ ~ax + 20 nm, ~\smax being a wavelength of the m~x;mllm S (~ of a light-sensitive layer of a color printing light-sensitive material, may be preferably used in this exposure process. As a suitable sharp band stop filter there may be preferably used a band stop filter.
In the present invention, at least one of the color development bleach, fixing (or blix) and rinse and/or stabi-lization is effecteed in the presence of at least one of compounds represented by the general formula (XI). Preferably, in the color development, at least one of the color develop-ing solution, blix solution, bleaching solution, fixing solution, stabilizing bath, and rinsing bath may contain, as a fluorescent brightening agent or residual color remover, a compound represented by the general formula (XI) where X
and Y preferably each represents -N=. Alternatively, the compound represented by the general formula (XI) may be incorporated in the light-sensitive material to be processed.
In the present invention, the pH value of the bleaching solution or blix solution is in the range of 3.5 to 6Ø The rpplpn;shl~g amDunt of the solution for the subsequent rinse and/or stabilization step may be 3 to 50 times the amount of the solution carried over from the pre-bath.
In the present invention, with a compound represented by the general formula(xI)~ a rapid development process for 20 seconds to 5 minutes can provide a color print surprisingly excellent in color reproducibility without stain.
The compound represented by the general formula (XI)may be used as a supersensitizing dye for an M-type spectral sensitization process as described above.
The compound represented by the general formula (XI)is advantageous in that it destroyes and puts H, D or J aggregates into a monomolecular adsorption state to intensify the M-type spectral sensitization, particularly when X and Y are not the same.
Rl X NH ~ CH=CH ~ ( XI ) Y ~ N S03M M03S
wherein X and Y each represents =CH- or =N-; Rl, R2, R3 and R4 may be the same or different and each represents a hydroxy group, halogen atom, heterocyclic amino group, heterocyclic thio group, alkoxy group, amino group, alkylamino group, aryloxy group or arylamino group; and M represents a monovalent cation, with the proviso that X and Y don't represent =CH- at the same time;
Preferably, it is not the case that Rl and R3 are the same and R2 and R4 are the same at the same time, nor that Rl and R4 are the same and R2 and R3 are thesame at the same time.
Preferably, X and Y each represents = N - at the same time. A compound represented by the general formula (I) wherein three or more sulfonic acid groups are incorporated in one molecule may be preferably used.
The incorporation of a specific fluorescent brightening agent defined by the general formula (XI) and an organic phosphonic chelating agent in the present color developing ~r ' 1339192 solution enables a remarkable elimination of fluctuation in photographic properties due to continuous processing.
A particularly remarkable effect of inhibiting stain or eliminating fluctuation in photographic properties can be observed particularly by using the compound represented by formula (XI) other than the compound of formula (XI) wherein Rl and R3 are the same and R2 and R4 are the same at the same time, or Rl and R4 are the same and R2 and R3 are the same at the same time.
Such an effect becomes remarkable particularly when the light-sensitive material comprises particulate silver halide having a silver chloride content of 80 mo~ % or more. Furthermore, such an effect becomes remarkable particularly when the color developing solution to be used is substantially free of benzyl alcohol.
Moreover, when the process following the color development (e.g. desilvering, rinse and stabilization) is short, and the replenishing amount of the solution to be used in the rinse or stabilization step is remarkably small, such an effect becomes remarkable. In accordance with the present invention, the amount of water and time which has been conventionally required to reduce mixture or residual color on a light-sensitive material is not necessarily needed.
The general formula(XI) will be further described hereinafer.
Rl, R2, R3 and R4 each represents a hydroxy group, C1 4 alkoxy group such as methoxy group, ethoxy group, and methoxyethoxy group, amino group, Cl 6 alkylamino group such as methylamino group, ethylamino group, propylamino group, dimethylamino group, cyclohexylamino group, ~-hydroxyethylamino group, di(~-hydroxyethyl)amlno group, ~-sulfoethylamino group, N-(~-sulfoethyl)-N-methylamino group, and ~-carboxyethyl group, aryloxy group such as phenoxy group, and p-sulfophenyl group, or arylamino group such as anilino group, o-, m-, and p-sulfoanilino group, o-, m- and p-chloroanilino group, o-, m- and p-toluidino group, o-, m- and p-carboxyanilino group, o-, m- and p-anisidino group, and o-, m- and p-hydroxyanilino group.
M represents a monovalent cation such as Na and K .
Specific ~Y~ of o~ounds of for~ll~ (~) which can be used in t~Le present invention will be shown hereinafter, but the present invention should not be construed as being limited thereto.
XI-l O~N~N ~NI~CH=CH~NH~ N ~N~o N~,N SO3Na SO Na N~,N
NH NH
~SO3Na CH30~ N ~ NH4~CH--C~NH ~, N ~, OCH3 N(CH2CH20H)2 - . NHCH2C,H2SO3Na CH30 ~,N~, N~CH=CH~NH~I, N ~ OCH3 SO3Na SO3Na ~
NH NH
~SO3Na C2Hs NaO3S
1339l92 CH30l~ N~N~H=CH~NHy N ~OCH3 NHcH2cH2so3Na NHCH2CH20H
XI-S
~NH~ N~N~H=C~3 SO3Na N~ SO3Na SOqNa N~ N SO3Na NHCH2CHaSO3Na NHcH2cH3 SO Na '3 ~ N~I~H=CI~NH~N~I,NH~
SO3Na N~,N SO3Na SO3Na N~N SO3Na N(C2Hs ) 2 N(CH2CH20H) 2 Z Z
Z
~, o~ ~, Z
Z ~.
G à~ z ~
V2~U~ ~
C'~ ~
H 3 Z X ~
X
1339~92 ' ~~z ~' 8 c C,~_ / ~ ~) ~ N
olO
~ Z ~ Z~ Z
,~ ~ ,~,~ C) The synthesis of a diaminostylene brightening agent which can be used in the present invention represented by formula (XI) can be accomplished by any suitable conventional method as described in Raseihin Kogyokai, "Fluorescent Brightening Agent", August 1976, page 8.
The amount of such a fluorescent brightening agent to be added to a processing solution such as color developing solution, blix solution and stabilizing solution is preferably in the range of 0.1 to 20 g/~, particularly 0.5 to 10 g/~.
The present silver halide emulsion particularly to be used in a color printing light-sensitive material is preferably a silver bromochloride emulsion substantially free of silver iodide and comprising silver chloride, silver bromide or mixed crystal thereof surrounded mainly by (100) plane as described in Japanese Patent Application Nos. 39,825/87 and 319,741/87. The present silver halide emulsion is also preferably a silver bromochloride emulsion substantially free of silver iodide and comprising silver chloride, silver bromide or mixed crystal thereof surrounded mainly by (111) plane as described in Japanese Patent Application Nos. 47,225/87 and 150,320/87.
In the present invention, if the effect of the filter or filter layer i5 simultaneously used, silver bromide, silver bromochloride or silver chloride having various compositions can be used. In order to improve the color reproducibility according to the present invention, silver bromochloride having a silver bromide content of 30 mol% or less or silver bromochloride or silver chloride emulsion having a silver iodide content of 0.4 mol% or less and a silver bromide content of 10 mol% or less is preferably used.
In order to simultaneously provide rapidness in processing in a system according to the present technique, silver chloride having a silver bromide content of 3 mol%
or less, preferably 1 mol% or less or substantially free of silver bromide is preferably used.
The incorporation of such a small amount of silver bromide not only gives an improvement in the rapidness of development but also is advantageous in that when a light-sensitive material containing such an amount of silver iodide is continuously processed with a processing solution, bromide ions in a balanced accumulated amount determined by the relationship with the replenishing amount of the processing solution exists in the developing solution in a low concentration, making it possible to set 13391~
the developing speed of the developing solution high itself.
The halogen composition of the silver halide emulsion to be used in the present invention influences color leaving by dyes and desilvering during the color development. In particular, a high silver iodide content gives a disadvantageous effect.
The present silver halide emulsion contains silver iodide in a appropriate amount of 2 mol% or less, preferably 1 mol% or less, more preferably 0.4 mol%~ most preferably none, based on the total amount of silver halide. The incorporation of silver iodide has many advantageous effects in light-sensitivity. In particular, silver iodide increases light absorption or spectral sensitizing dyes or inhibits desensitization due to a spectral sensitizing dye. However, if a system according to the present technique is subjected to a rapid development in a short period of time, a slow development speed causes a slow speed in development of the entire silver halide particles. This also gives a great disadvantages in the improvement of average color mixing degree in the present invention. The incorporation of silver iodide in an amount of 0.4 mol% or less may give an advantage in adsorption of spectral sensitizing dyes.
However, it is preferred in the present invention to use a silver halide emulsion essentially free of silver iodide.
In a system according to the present technique, if a rapid development is required, silver chloride having a silver bromide content of 3 mol% or less, preferably 1 mol% or less or substantially free of silver bromide may be preferably used.
In order to obtain a light-sensitive material which is insusceptible to fog and exhibits a stable gradation in accordance with the present technique, it is desired to use an emulsion having a higher silver bromide content, e.g., 50 mol% or more. If the silver bromide content exceeds 95 mol%~ the rapidness in development is slightly lowered. However, if a development accelerator such as 3-pyrazolidone, thioether and hydrazine is used with the emulsion, the rapidness in development can be recovered, making it possible to provide a high sensitivity light-sensitive material stable in preservability and proccessability.
-Particulate silver halide to be contained in the present photographic emulsion may have a regular crystal structure such as cube, octahedron, and tetradecahedron, an irregular crystal structure such as sphere, and plate, a crystal structure having crystal defect such as twinning plane, or a composite thereof.
133gl~2 The preparation of a silver halide photographic emulsion which can be used in the present invention can be accomplished by any suitable method as described in Research Disclosure No. 17,643 (Dec. 1978, pp. 22-23, "I.
Emulsion Preparation and Types"), Research Disclosure No.
18,716 (Nov. 1979, page 648), P. Glafkides, "Chemicet Phisque Photographique", Paul Montel, 1967, G. F.
Duffin, "Photographic Emulsion Chemistry", Focal Press, 1966, and V. L. Zelikman et al, "Making and Coating Photographic Emulsion", Focal Press, 1964.
Tabular particles having an aspect ratio of from about 2 or more, preferably about to about 10, more preferably about 5 to about 10 may be used in the present invention. Such tabular particles can be easily prepared by any suitable method as described in Gutoff, "Photographic Science and Engineering", as described in Gutoff, "Photographic Science and Engineering", Vol. 14, pp. 248-257, 1970, U.S. Patent Nos.
4,434,226, 4,414,310, 4,433,048, and 4,439,520, and British Patent No. 2,112,157.
The crystal structure of the present particulate silver halide may be uniform, or such that the halide composition varies between the inner portion and the outer portion thereof, or may be a layer. Alternatively, silver halides having different compositions may be connected to each other by an epitaxial junction or by any suitable compound other than silver halide such as silver thiocyanate, and zinc oxide.
Alternatively, a mixture of particles having various crystal structures may be used in the present invention.
The developability of particulate silver halide is determined not only ~y the halogen composition of the entire particles but also by the halogen distribution in the particles. Accordingly, the silver halide emulsion of the present invention preferably has some distribution or structure concerning the halogen composition in the particles thereof. A typical example of such a structure is a core/shell type or double structure type particle in which the internal portion thereof differs from the surface thereof in halogen composition. In such a particle, the shape of the core may or may not be the same as that of the entire particle with the shell. In particular, both the core and the entire particle with the shell may be cubic, or the core may be octahedron while the entire particle with the shell may be cubic.
Alternatively, the core may be in the form of a completely regular crystal while the entire particle with the shell may be slightly irregular. Furthermore, the particulate silver halide may not be merely double-structured but may be triple-structured or may have a higher multistructure.
Moreover, the surface of a core/shell double-structured particle may be provided with aq thin film of silver halide having a different halogen composition.
Preferable silver halide particles have mal-distributed phases comprising layer structure or discontinuous isolated structure containing a different halide distribution on a surface or internal part of particles from in other phases. Preferably silver chlorobromide particles having maldistributed phases have a cubic structure having (100) plane or tetradecahedron, and also have a structure of octahedron having (111) plane or tabular particles, especially having about 2 to 10 of aspect ratio.
An emulsion containing particulate silver halide which has been adjusted for proper development starting point as described in Japanese Patent Application Nos.
319,741/87, 323,214/87 and 150,320/87 may be particularly preferably used in the present invention. CR-compound as described in the above cited specification may be preferably sensitizing dyes.
The average size of particles to be used in the present silver halide emulsion is preferably in the range of 0.1 to 2 ~m, particularly 0.15 to 1.4 ~m as calculated in terms of diameter of sphere having the same volume.
The particle size distribution of the present particulate silver halide is preferably narrow. A
monodisperse emulsion is preferably used in the present invention. In particular, a monodisperse emulsion of particles having a regular crystal shape may be preferably used in the present invention. An emulsion of silver halide particles, preferably 90% or more, more preferably 9s% or more by weight or number of particles of which fall within i20% of the average particle size may be preferably used in the present invention. Monodisperse emulsion is preferred as is disclosed in U.S. Patents 3,574,628 and 3,655,394, and Great Britain Patent 1,413,748, etc. In the case of such a monodisperse emulsion, an emulsion comprising particulate silver halide having any suitable construction as described above may be preferably used i~ the present invention. Two or more different kinds of monodisperse emulsions of cubic or tetradecahedron particulate silver halide may be used in admixture or by coating in multilayer to provide an excellent result. If two or more kinds of monodisperse emulsions are used in admixture, the mixing ratio as calculated in terms of amount of silver is preferably 5 to 95%. The ratio of average particle size of emulsion _ 9s _ particles to be mixed is 1:1.1 to 1:8, preferably 1:1.2 to 1:6 as calculated in terms of volume. When two kinds of monodisperse emulsions are used in admixture, the mixing ratio as calculated in terms of amount of silver is preferably in the range of 0.05:0.95 to 0.95:0.05, particularly 0.1:0.9 to 0.9:0.1.
The preparation of a silver bromochloride emulsion to be used in the present invention can be accomplished by any one of acidic process, neutral process, and ammonia process. Particularly preferred among these processes is acidic process. The process for the reaction of the soluble silver salt with the soluble silver halide can be accomplished by separate mixing process, simultaneous mixing process, or combination thereof. In order to obtain monodisperse particles of the present invention, simultaneous mixing process may be preferably used. The process for the reaction of the soluble silver salt with the soluble silver halide can be also accomplished by a process in which particles are formed in excess silver ions (so-called reversal mixing process). One form of the simultaneous mixing process is a so-called controlled double jet process in which the pAg of the liquid phase in which silver halide is formed is kept constant. This process can provide a silver halide emulsion suitable for the present invention having a regular crystal structure and a narrow particle size distribution. Such particles which can be preferably used in the present invention may be preferably prepared on the basis of the simultaneous mixing process.
In the process of formation or physical ripening of particulate silver halide, cadmium salt, zinc salt, lead salt, thallium salt, iridium salt, or complex salt thereof, rhodium salt or complex thereof, or iron salt or complex salt thereof may be present.
In particular, iridium salt or complex salt thereof may be used in an amount of 10-9 to 10-4 mol/mol, preferably 10-8 to 10-5 mol/mol. As compared to an emulsion which has been prepared without using an iridium salt or complex salt thereof, such a consideration is useful particularly when a rapid developability or stability is desired for a light-sensitive material which has been subjected to high intensity or low intensity exposure out of the proper exposure intensity range.
If physical ripening is effected in the presence of any known silver halide solvent such as ammonia, potassium thiocyanate, and thioether or thione as described in U.S. Patent No. 3,271,157, and Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 12,360/76, 82,408/78, 144/319/78, 100,717/79, a monodisperse emulsion of particulate silver halide having a regular crystal structure and a narrow particle size distribution can be advantageously obtained.
13391~2 The removal of the soluble silver salts from the emulsion which has been subjected to physical ripening can be accomplished by any suitable method such as noodle rinsing process, flocculation sedimentation process, and ultrafiltration process.
The silver halide emulsion to be used in the present invention can be subjected to chemical sensitization such as selenium sensitization, reduction sensitization, noble metal sensitization, or combination thereof. In particular, sulfur sensitization process using active gelatin or sulfur-containing compound capable of reacting with silver ion such as thiosulfate, thiourea compound, mercapto compound, and rhodanine compound, reduction sensitization process using a reducing substance such as stannous salt, amine salt, hydrazine derivative, formamidinesulfinic acid, and silane compound, and noble metal sensitization process using a metal compound such as gold complex, and complex salt of the group VIII metals such as Pt, Ir, Pd, Rh, and Fe can be used singly or in combination. The present monodisperse silver bromochloride emulsion may be preferably subjected to sulfur sensitization or selenium sensitization. Such a senisitization process may be preferably effected in the presence of a hydroxylazaindene compound.
Preferred examples of a silver halide emulsion to be incorporated in the direct positive color printing light-sensitive material include an emulsion of internal latent type silver halide particles having the above described halogen composition _ 99 _ and a multilayer construction as described in Japanese Patent Application No. 25,737/87.
Preferred examples of a silver halide emulsion to be incorporated in the color reversal printing light-sensitive material include those described in European Patent No.
0217353A-2, and Japanese Patent Application (OPI)-Nos. 39,043/86, and 61,156/86.
The blue-sensitive layer in the color printing light-sensitive material may preferably comprise a sensitizing dye such that it is not strongly sensitized to a long wavelength up to about 485 nm and is given a high spectral sensitivity in a shorter wavelength band less than about 485 nm, more prPf~lhy less than about 460 nm, dependLng on the spectral absorption characterisitcs of dyes to be used in the color print original. In particular, the silver halide may be preferably subjected to a spectral sensitization such that the inherent sensitivity thereof is limited in a short wavelength band and it is strongly sensitized on the long wavelength side, e.g., 450 to 470 nm while its sensitization is cut in a longer wavelength band, e.g., 485 nm or more.
133919~
In the coupler to be used in the present invention, the spectral absorption by a dye obtained by the coupling reaction of the respective yellow, magenta and cyan coupler in a color light-sensitive material for use in photographing with a color developing agent may preferably correspond to the spectral absorption by the corresponding blue-sensitive layer, green-sensitive layer or red-sensitive layer in a color printing light-sensitive material, and there is substantially no spectral absorption in the range of wavelength of spectral sensitivity of light-sensitive layers other than the corresponding light-sensitive layer. Furthermore, the spectral absorption by a dye obtained in a color light-sensitive material for use in photographing is preferably out of the range of AEmaX i20 nm, ~Emaxbeing the maximum spectral light amount of light-sensitive layers other than the corresponding light-sensitive layer of a color printing light-sensitive, preferably out of the range of ~EmaX i30 nm. For example, when the spectral absorption of a magenta dye image obtained in a color negative film is out of the main spectral sensitivity wavelength range of light-sensitive layers other than the corresponding green-sensitive layer in a color paper, i.e., about 400 to 485 nm for blue-sensitive layer or 600 to 740 nm for red-sensitive layer, the present invention gives an 133~192 unprecedentely remarkable improvement in color reproducibility.
This is because that the disadvantageous effects by the spectral absorption by a dye in a cut wavelength range given by the present band cut filter is substantially completely eliminated.
Preferably, the spectral absorption by a yellow, magenta or cyan dye obtained from a coupler to be used in a color printing light-sensitive material is only seen in the wavelength range of spectral absorption by a blue-sensitive layer, green-sensitive layer or red-sensitive layer in a color light-sensitive material for use in photographing. Couplers which may be generally used in the present invention are described in patents cited in Research Disclosure No. 17,643, VII-C to G.
As suitable yellow couplers there can be used those described in U.S. Patent Nos. 3,933,501, 4,022,620, 4,326,024, and 4,401,752, Japanese Patent Publication No. 10,739/83, and British Patent Nos. 1,425,020, and 1,476,760.
As suitable magenta couplers there may be used 5-pyrazolone and pyrazoloazole compounds. Particularly preferred examples of such magenta couplers are described in U.S. Patent Nos.
4,310,619, 4,351,897, 3,061,432, 3,725,067, 4,500,630, and 4,540,654, European Patent No. 73,636, Research Disclosure Nos.
24,220 (June 1984) and 24,230 (June 1984), and Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 33,552/85, and 43,659/85.
As suitable cyan couplers there may be used phenolic and naphtholic couplers. Preferred examples of such coupl-ers are 1~39192 described in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,052,212, 4,146,396, 4,228,233, 4,296,200, 2,369,929, 2,801,171, 2,772,162, 2,89;,826, 3,772,002, 3,758,308, 4,334,011, 4,327,173, 3,446,622, 4,333,999, 4,451,559, and 4,427,767, West German Patent Disclosure No. 3,329,729, and European Patent Nos. 121,36SA, and 161,626A.
As colored couplers for correcting undesired absorption by color forming dye there may be used those described in Research Disclosure No. 17,643 (VII-G), U.S. Patent Nos. 4,163,670, 4,004,929, and 4,138,258, Japanese Patent Publication No.
39,413/82, and British Patent No. 1,146,368.
As suitable couplers which form a colored dye having a proper ~if~;h;l;ty there may be used those described in U.S.
Patent No. 4,366,237, British Patent No. 2,125,570, European Patent No. 96,570, and West German Patent (Disclosure) No.
3,234,533.
Typical examples of polymerized dye-forming coupler couplers are described in U.S. Patent Nos. 3,451,820, 4,080,211, and 4,367,282, and British Patent No. 2,102,173.
Couplers which release a photographically useful residual group upon coupling can be preferably used in the present invention. As DIR couplers which release a development inhibitor there can be preferably used those described in patents cited in Research Disclosure No. 17,643 (VII-F), Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 151,944/82, 154,234/82, and 184,248/85, and U.S. Patent No. 4,248,962.
As couplers which image~ise release a nucleating agent or development accelerator upon development there can be used those described in British Patent Nos. 2,097,140, and 2,131,188, and Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 157,638/84, and 170,840/
84.
Other examples of couplers which can be incorporated in the present light-sensitive material include competitive couplers as described in U.S. Patent No. 4,130,427, poly-equivalent couplers as described in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,283,472, 4,338,393, and 4-,310,618, DIR redox~compound-releasing couplers as described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 185,950/85, and couplers which release a dye which recovers its original color after being separated as described in European Patent No. 173,302A.
Useful examples of couplers which can be used in a color printing light-sensitive material which accomplishes the effects of the present invention include magenta couplers as described in European Patent 226,849 A, cyan couplers as described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 105,229/83, and color couplers as described in Japanese Patent Application No. 39,825/87. Particularly preferred examples of such couplers inlcude color couplers represented by the general formulas (VII-a), (VII-b), (VIII), (IX) and (X).
O H
R 7 2 ~J~ ~ N H C O R ~ , ~ q (VII-a) R~s/~
-- 104 ~
O H
R7~ 1 N H C O R7~
~ (VII-b) R 7 s C O N H
wherein R7l, R74, and R75 each represents an aliphatic group (the term "aliphatic group" as used herein means a straight-chain, branched or cyclic alkylj alkenyl or alkynyl group), aromatic group, heterocyclic group, aliphatic amino group, aromatic amino group or hetero-cyclic amino group; R73 represents an aliphatic group; R72 and R76 each represents a hydrogen atom, halogen atom, aliphatic group, aliphatic oxy group, or acylamino group;
and Yl and Y2 each represents a hydrogen atom or group which can be separated after coupling reaction with an oxidation product of a color developing agent (hereinafter including an atom, such as a halogen atom), with the proviso that R72 and R73 or R75 and R76 may be connected to each other to form S-, 6- or 7-membered condensated carbostyryl or oxyindole ring, R72 and R73 may be condensated to form a substituted naphthol ring, and R7l, R72, R73 or Yl, or R74, R75, R76 or Y2 may together form a dimer or higher polymer.
R ~, X
N ~ (VIII) N ~7 a Z c--~ b In general formula (VIII), R81 represents a hydrogen atom or substituent. Preferred examples of such a substituent include alkyl group such as methyl group, ethyl group, and butyl group; branched alkyl group such as isopropyl group, isobutyl group, and tertiary butyl group;
substituted alkyl group (including branched groups);
alkoxy group such as methoxy group, ethoxy group, and butoxy group; substituted alkoxy group such as ethoxy-ethoxy group, and phenoxyethoxy group, o-methoxyphenoxy-ethoxy group, o-butoxyphenoxyethoxy group, o-chloro-phenoxyethoxy group; aryloxy group such as phenoxy group, o-methoxyphenoxy group, o-butoxyphenoxy group, o-chlorophenoxy group; and ureide group. Particularly preferred among these groups are branched alkyl group and substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group. X represents a hydrogen atom or group which can be separated upon a coupling reaction with an oxidation product of an aromatic primary amine color developing agent. Examples of such a group include halogen atom such as chlorine atom and bromine atom, arylthio group such as 2-butoxy-5-t-octylphenylthio group, and 2-propoxy-5-t-hexyphenylthio group, nitrogen-containing heterocyclic group such as imidazole group, and 4-chloroimidazole group, and aryloxy group such as p-methylphenoxy group, 2,4-dimethylphenoxy group, and 2,4-dimethyl-t-phenoxy group. Particularly 133gl92 preferred among these groups are halogen atom and arylthio group. Za, Zb and Zc each represents a methine, substituted methine, or =N-NH-. One of Za-Zb bond and Zb-Zc bond is a double bond, and the other is a single bond.
If Za-Zb is a carbon-carbon double bond, it may be a part of an aromatic ring. Furthermore, R81 or X may form a dimer or higher polymer. If Za, Zb or Za is a substituted methine, the substituted methine may form a dimer or higher polymer. When Za, Zb or Zc represents a substituted methine, the substituent is preferably a substituted alkyl group, particularly a branched substituted alkyl group such as substituted isopropyl group, and substituted tertiary butyl group. As a substituent for a substituted methine group, an aryl group such as a halogen substituted phenyl group is also preferable.
RglNH Y3 - ~ (IX) N ORg2 wherein Y3 represents a hydrogen atom or coupling-off group; Rgl and Rg3 each represents a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl group; and Rg2 represents a hydrogen atom, aliphatic group or aromatic acyl or sulfonyl group.
Preferable Y3 iS a hydrogen atom or a coupling-off group containing sulfur atom as a coupling-off atom. Preferable Rgl group is a substituted phenyl group and preferable R93 group is a trichlorophenyl group.
CH3--C- COCHQ ( X ) wherein Q represents a substituted or unsubstituted N-phenylcarbamoyl group; and Y4 represents a halogen atom or the other group capable of released upon a coupling reaction with an oxidation product of a developing agent (preferable coupling-off atom contained in the coupling-off group is a nitrogen atom).
The couplers to be used in the present invention may be incorporated in a light-sensitive material by various known dispersion processes.
Examples of high boiling solvents to be used in an oil-in-water dispersion process are described in U.S.
Patent 2,322,027.
l339l92 Specific examples of procedure and effects of latex dispersion process and latex to be used in impregnation are described in U.S. Patent No. 4,199,363, and West German Patent Application (OLS) Nos. 2,541,274, and 2,541,230.
Specific examples of main couplers for the formation of dye which can be incorporated in a color light-sensitive material for use in photographing or color printing light-sensitive material will be shown hereinafter.
V~- ( 1 ) C ~ ~N H C O C H O~C 5 H "(t) C H s~iJJ C , (t) C
V~- (2) (t) C 5 H "~O--C H C N H
'C~ O
133~192 F F
(t) C, H " ~ O C H C O "~ H ~ ~F
C H\
V~-- ( 4 ) C2Hs - C ~ ~N H C O C H O~ C s H " (,',) C2H5 C5H"(t) C o V~- (5) O H
CQ ~NHCOCliK 31 C
V~- (6) OH A
[~C O N H~
(n~ H 9 C . O C O N H C H 2 C H z--S--C H ~ C O O H
O C ,2H ~5 V~- t7) ~ C H C O ~
O H NHso2cl6H33(n) N
~- (8) ~iH C O ~C Q
N N H S 0 2~3--~C12H25(n) H CQ
V~- (9) C5Hll(t) C ~ ~,N H C O--C H z O ~--CsHII(t) ..
~- 1339192 V~- (10) <N ~ 'IHCOC~0 ~CsHII(t) C5Hll(t) V~- t l ) CH3 C~
'N ~ N H
H O ~Soz~o--1HCO~H~(C H 2) 3/~
- (2) CH3- ~CQ
N
N NH
n)C6Hl3 ~ ~N
C H C H 2 S 0 2 ( C H z) z (n)CsHl7 /
: ~.
C H
~.H C
- (~/H 3 N
~' (t) C 8~H 17 ~N H
~S 02(CH2)3 O C~Hq(n) vm-- ( 4 ) CH3 ~CQ
~N ~ H OCH3CH20C2H5 CH3 NHS~02~/
vm- (S) ~
O C H 3 O~H ~(~ C8~, 7(t) ~ ~0- ~S~
=I~C H C H 2NHS02~
CH3 C8H,7(t) 1~391~2 vm-- (6) O C ~ H 1~(~
N ~ I ~/
(CH2) 2NHSO2~ O.CIIX l 7-~
NHSO
C81~1 7.~
lX- t l )C o ~N ~
t~C~sHz7CO~ ~N/~O
CQ~,~C ~
C Q
~ 1339192 ~- (2) C Q
' P~NH-C ~8H3s~N 'N/~O
Lo c~cQ
~ -.
~- (3) C Q
~N H
ClzH25 H 0~0--C H C Q N~ 'N/~O
C,H9(t) C Q ~,C Q
C Q
~- (4) C~ OC2 Hy(r~
~ N H - ~S ~<
C,3H27CONH ~N O C8HI7(t) C ~ ~ C Q
~ -.
E~-- ( 5 ) c.e O~CH2)2--OC~3 ~ ~H- S
CzH5 ~ I I ~ \===~
~(t~C5H~ ~ 0-CHCONH N'NI ~ ~~ C8H,7~t) C5H,l(t) C Q ~C O
133~192 X- (1) ~ C~.
(C~ C ~ COCHCONH~ C 2 H 5 O=~ 0 N H C O C H O ~ C sH I I(t) O CHs CHs CsH lltt~
X- ~2) (C8 3) 3C ~ COCHCONH ~
\=C C z H s C NHCOCHO ~--CsHI~(t) CzHsO CH2 ~ C 5 H"(t) -- 118 ~
133~192 X - ( 3 ) C Q
(CH,)3C COCHCONH ~ C SH..(t) i NHCO(CH2)30 ~ C 5 H ll(t) S~ 2~ - OCH 2 X - ( 4 ) C Q
(CH3)3C-COCHCONH ~ C 5 H "(t) o ~ ~ o NHCO(CH 2) SO ~ C S H "(t) CH2 ~
13391!~2 - ( 5 ) - (CH3)3C ~COCHCONH ~ C 4 H 4~
0~ \~0 C O O C H C O O C 12 H z 5 ~ CH2 X - ( 6 ) C~
(CH3)3C ~COCHCONH ~ .
NHCO ~CH2)30 ~ C 5 H " (t) 3 ~
CsH,I(t?
X- (7) CQ
( C H 3) 3 C ~ C O C H C O N H ~
NH S ~2--C~H33(rl) 2 ~ O H
X - t 8 ) - C ~
(CH3)~C- C0CHC0NH
.- I ., ~<
C Q NHC0(CHz)30 ~ C 5 H "(t) C 5 Hll(t) S0z ~ O H
C o X-- (9 ) (C H 3)3 C ~ C O C H C O N H ~
N H S ~2 - C 12H2s C O O C H
C H
Examples of known photographic additives which may be used in the present invention are described in Research Disclosure Nos. 17,643 and 18,716.
The places where such a description is found are summarized in the table below.
Additives RD 17643 RD 18716 1. Chemical sensitizer Page23 Right column on page 648 2. Sensitivity improver "
3. Spectral sensitizer, pp. 23-24 Right column on supersensitizer page 648 - right column on page 649 4. Brightening agent Page24 5. Fog inhibitor, pp. 24-25 Right column on stabilizer page 649 6. Light absorber, filter pp. 25-26 Right column on dye, ultraviolet page 649 - left absorber column on page 7. Stain inhibitor Right column on Left column to page 25 right column on page 650 8. Dye stabilizer Page25 9. Film hardener Page26 Left column on page 651 10. Binder Page 26 "
~r ~ 133~19~
AND BAND STOP FILTER USED THEREFOR
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
The present invention relates to a process for the formation of color images which comprises printing images on a color printing light-sensitive material from a color print original in a subtractive color exposure process, and then color-developing the color printing light-sensitive material. More particularly, the present invention relates to a process for the formation of color images which improves color reproducibility without deteriorating the conventional productivity, particularly without prolonged printing time.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
In recent years, as multilayer color light-sensitive materials have been used for in color photograph, copying color originals, imaging or recording digital color data, etc., it has been desired to attain further excellent picture quality such as sharpness, graininess and color reproducibility, without deteriorating the productivity or rapidity in the process for the formation of images on silver halide color light-sensitive materials.
133919~
In the system for the formation of positive-positive images by printing on a color reversal light-sensitive material or direct positive color light-sensitive material from color print originals such as transparent positive images obtained from photographing color reversal light-sensitive materials, color photo-graphs obtained from instant photographic materials or color photographic papers, and color printed matters, color reproducibility faithful to color print originals has also been desired.
In the system for the formation of so-called negative-positive images using photographing color light-sensitive materials and printing light-sensitive materials, many improvements to improve reproducibility of objects have been proposed applying advantageous conditions of color negative light-sensitive materials to photographing color light-sensitive materials. In particular, improvements have been made in three color dyes, blue-sensitive, green-sensitive and red-sensitive special sensitivity distributions, and color masking process for correcting improper spectral absorption by three color dyes. Furthermore, attempts have been made to eliminate color mixture between emulsion layers having different color development to use DIR compounds/to use a functional light-sensitive layer which has a different 133~:13~
spectral sensitivity distribution of the light-sensitive layers from that of the above described light-sensitive layers in addition to the above described light-sensitive layers, etc. The details of such approaches are described in patents cited in Research Disclosure Nos. 17,643, and 18,717, U.S. Patent Nos. 2,407,210, 2,875,057, 3,265,506, 3,408,194, 3,447,928, 3,933,501,,402,262, 4,401,752, g,326,024, 4,310,619, 4,351,897,3,061,432, 3,725,067, 2,369,929, 2,801,171, 2,772,162,2,895,826, 3,772,002, 2,772,162, 3,758,308, 4,126,396,4,334,011, 4,327,173, 3,446,622, 4,333,999, 4,451,559,4,427,767, 4,163,670, 4,004,929, 4,138,258, 3,451,820,4,080,211, 4,500,630, 4,540,654, and 4,367,282, Japanese Patent Publication Nos.
10,739/83, and 39,413/82, Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 43,659/85, and 34,541/86 (the term "OPI" as used herein means an "unexamined published application"), Research Disclosure Nos. 18,053, 24,220, and 24,230, British Patent Nos. 1,425,020, 1,i46,368, and 2,102,173, West German Patent Application Nos. 2,219,917, 2,261,362, 2,329,587, 2,433,812, and 3,234,533, and European Patent Nos. 73,636, and 96,570.
The spectral sensitivity distribution may be improved by the selection of a proper sensitizing dye or modification of crystal habit of particulate silver halide 13331~
or process for the addition of particulate silver halide.
However, such approaches are not necessarily enough.
The modification of spectral sensitivity distribution can be also accomplished by a use of a suitable photographic dye as described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 1,419/76, and West German Patent No.
1,015,683. However, such an approach is disadvantageous, because only the overlapped portion of spectral sensitivity distribution of a specific layer and that of a layer other than the specific light-sensitive layer among a plurality of light-sensitive layers of a light-sensitive material is desensitized. Furthermore, such a photographic dye lowers sensitivity itself or has a desensitizing effect. Moreover, it is difficult for such a photo-graphic dye to be fixed on a predetermined layer.
Such a photographic dye is also disadvantageous in that it tends to leave color after the formation of images. In particular, such a photographic dye often inhibit the spectral sensitization of silver halide emulsion brought by using a sensitizing dye. Improvements to fix tehse dyes in a predetermined layer also have been made. Such an approach are described in U.S. Patent Nos. 3,247,127, 2,390,707, 2,255,077, 2,493,747, 2,843,486, 4,420,555, 2,S48,564, 2,484,430, 3,148,061, and 3,756,814, and 133~19~
British Patent Nos. 506,385, 584,609, 685,475, and 850,281.
Improvements for color printing light-sensitive materials have been made to obtain faithful color reproducibility as well as excellent sharpness and graininess of images using an excellent print original obtained from an excellent photographing color light-sensitive material. Besides the improvement in photographing color light-sensitive materials, improvements have been made in color couplers and their color dyes and spectral sensitivity distribution in blue-sensitive, green sensitive and red-sensitive layers.
Furthermore, efforts have been made to inhibit color mixture between various layers.
Improvements in printing light-sensitive materials are described in Research Disclosure No. 18,716. Suitable silver halide emulsions which can be used improve in spectral sensitivity distribution are described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 5,423/73, 149,345/84, and 119,344/84, and U.S. Patent No. 3,655,394.
Suitable sensitizing dyes for this purpose and process for the use of these sensitizing dyes are described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 114,418/74, 139,323/76, 26,589/80, 28,738/83, 5,238/84, 48,756/84, 133,540/84, 196,749/85, 210,345/86, and 205,929/86, and 133!~13~
U.S. Patent No. 4,183,756. Examples of improvements in color couplers are described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 105,229/83.
However, these approaches is still insufficient, because the objective data obtained on photographing color light-sensitive materials cannot be fully transferred to prints to deteriorate faithful color reproducibility of the objective image. Such a defect becomes remarkable as the properties of color couplers for use in color printing light-sensitive materials and color images produced therefrom are improved.
This is also the case where images on a color print original obtained from a photographing reversal color light-sensitive material or dupe light-sensitive material are printed on a direct color positive light-sensitive material or reversal color light-sensitive material. However, for direct color positive light-sensitive materials or reversal -color printing light-sensitive materials, no process for decreasing the over-lapping of spectral sensitivity distribution of a light-sensitive layer with that of other light-sensitive layers by using a suitable photographic dye has been suggested.
Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 113,627/76 discloses a process using a suitable light filter to cut a copying light in a wavelength band of 500 nm in which the 133!~2 blue sensitivity and the green sensitivity of a copying paper overlap each other, when an original is copied. The object of the process is to decrease copy trials to obtain color balance of copy previously or to adjust deviation in color balance which is caused on getting color balance.
However, this approach effexcts on only copying conditions by cutting both blue and green light in a wavelength band in which the blue sensitivity and the green sensitivity of a copying paper overlapeach other. If a light filter having a wide absorption wavelength range is used, the blue sensitivity and green sensitivity of a copying paper are lowered. To compensate for this disadvantage, a stronger light for copy is required. This results in an increase in the remaining color mixture.
Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 64,037/78 and 113627/76 disclose a printer which is provided with filters such that the respective spectral sensitivities of a color paper are matched to that of blue light, green light and red light receivers in order to facilitate the adjustment of exposure time for the color paper when printing is made on a color paper from a negative film.
However, these approaches disclosed in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 113,627/76 and 64,037/78 contemplate stabilization of copying or printing process.
133919~
Accordingly, it cannot be said that these approaches can satisfactorily improve the quality of images.
Processes for printing on a color printing light-sensitive material from a color print original include additive process and subtractive process. In the light of productivity, subtractive exposure process, particularly using a white light source has been commonly put into practical use. In particular, this process provides a high processing capability per unit input, advantageous procedure for stabilization of photographic properties, efficient use of a light source, high quality level of color images on a print, etc. This process also enables a rapid or lln~ned printing process.
The subtractive process such as white light subtractive process have been widely used in the form of an autoprinter because it can provide a high productivity and rapidity. However, such a process is disadvantageous to be improved in the finish quality and its stability.
In order to eliminate these defects, many approaches have been suggested.
For example, U.S. Patent No. 2,997,389 suggests the use of a filter having a spectral absorption band in a yellow region and between 465 nm and 490 nm during the printing of 'a color transparent image on a color printing light-sensitive material in the subtractive exposure 133~192 process. The above described U.S. Patent also suggests that a filter comprising a ZnS layer and an MgF2 layer may be preferably used. U.S. Patent No. 4,050,807 suggests the combined use of a subtractive color filter and a filter adapted to remove wavelengths in which spectral sensitivity curves of a copying photographic paper cross each other during enlarging and printing of photographic images or copy printing in the subtractive process.
Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 64,037/78 suggests that an autoprinter for printing on a color paper from a color negative film may be provided with a filter adapted to cut light in a wavelength band of 460 to 540 nm and a filter adapted to cut light in a wavelength band of 570 to 640 nm to unite the spectral sensitivity of the receptor in the autoprinter with the spectral sensitivity distribution of the color papér increasing an accuracy of the exposure control in the autoprinter. However, the latter two patents have no description about the constituting elements of such suitable filters.
For known filters, approaches have been heretofore suggested to modify the spectral sensitivity of the color light-sensitive material used or provide a light for print adapted for the spectral sensitivity of the color light-sensitive material or the spectral sensitivity distribution in the receptor in the color print. However, in order to improve the color reproducibility, it is necessary to consider the spectral absorption characteristics of each original color images such as yellow image, magenta image, and cyan image, in a color negative film or color slide. In processes for the exposure of a color light-sensitive material comprising at least three light-sensi-tive layers, subtractive exposure l-process is advantageous in that it can be easily effected with a high rapidity, providing a high productivity.
However, the subtractive exposure process is also disadvantageous in that it is difficult to conform the spectral intensity distribution of the exposing light source to the spectral sensitivity distribution of three light-sensitive layers and to the spectral absorption characteristics of the corresponding color originals or materials to be copied. A filter having a spectral absorption in a wavelength band out of an absorption wavelength band of 465 to 490 nm as described in U.S.
Patent No. 2,997,389 or a filter having a spectral absorption in a wavelength band out of the wavelength in which the spectral sensitivity curves of a copying photographic paper cross each other as described in U.S.
Patent No. 4,050,807 is often useful. Accordingly, it has been desired to develop a filter having sharp spectral absorption characteristics excellent in transparency and a 133gl~
transmission wavelength band which is not limited to these wavelength bands but can be freely selected.
If such a filter is used interposed between the light source in a printer and a color light-sensitive material as described in U.S. Patent No. 2,997,389 and Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 64,037/78, the deterioration of the filter due to the high illumination and heat from the light source causes a problem. Such a filter as described in the above described two U.S.
Patents cannot stand the prolonged use for more than one month. The use of such a filter may cause a change in the finish quality of a print obtained from a color light-sensitive material. Such a filter is mechanically mounted on and removed from the printer very often and is susceptible to be scratched.
Processes for image exposure such as photographing objects to be copied and copying or printing from a color original include three processes. In the first process, the entire surface of a color light-sensitive material is imagewise exposed at the same time. This process requires lens and a shutter. An exposing machine to be used in this process may have a simple construction. In this process, the exposure can be effected only once or several times (sequential exposure process). This process can provide an excellent picture quality. Ordinary cameras and autoprinters employ this process. The second process is a slit exposure process. In this exposure process, a slit moves across the light axis between the object to be copied or color original and the color light-sensitive material to effect image exposure. The third process is a synchronous slit exposure process. In this exposure process, the object to be copied or color original and the color light-sensitive material are synchronously moved during image exposure. The exposing machines according to these processes are relatively small but are susceptible to uneven scanning or image distortion due to unevenness in the speed of synchronous movement or insufficient accuracy of synchronous movement. In the above described simultaneous exposure process, a wide radiation angle is obtained. However, the filter used in this process is included in an interference filter of the kind which varies in spectral absorption characteristics depending on the angle of incidence of the light, causing unevenness in the finish quality of color prints. Therefore, it has been desired to develop a band stop filter which is particularly improved so as to provide a less radiation angle dependency of spectral absorption.
C
~3391~2 SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
According to a first aspect of the invention there is provided a process for the formation of color images which comprises printing on a color printing light-sensitive material comprising a blue-sensitive layer, a green-sensitive layer, and a red-sensitive layer provided on a support from a color print original in a subtractive exposure process, and then subsequent color development. A band stop filter or a band stop filter layer is interposed between the light source and the particular light-sensitive layer of the color printing light-sensitive material so that the effective spectral sensitive energy distribution of at least two light-sensitive layers of the light-sensitive layers of the color printing light-sensitive material becomes independent from each other in a wavelength band of 400 to 750 nrn. The average color mixing degree in each of the light-sensitive layers becomes 0.10 or less. The blue-sensitive layer contains a yellow coupler, the green-sensitive layer contains a magenta coupler and the red-sensitive layer contains a cyan coupler provided on a support. The color printing light-sensitive material satisfies conditions A), B), and C) defined hereinafter.
'C
-133~:192 In accordance with a second aspect of the invention there is provided a process for the formation of color images which comprises printing on a color printing light-sensitive material from a color print original in a subtractive exposure process, and subsequently color-developing said color printing light-sensitive material, whereby the color printing light-sensitive material comprises at least one blue-sensitive layer, at least one green-sensitive layer and at least one red-sensitive layer provided on a support. The green-sensitive layer has an effective spectral sensitive energy distribution which is substantially formed by a J-type spectral sensitization, the red-sensitive layer has an effective spectral sensitive energy distribution which is substantially formed by an M-type or J-type spectral sensitization, the effective spectral sensitive energy distribution of the green-sensitive layer and the red-sensitive layer, and/or the spectral sensitive energy distribution of the green-sensitive layer and the blue-sensitive layer are substantially independent, and thereby the average color mixing degree at the printing in each of the light-sensitive layers is 0.12 or less. The color development process of the color printing light-sensitive material satisfies the condition that at least one of color development, blix, and rinse and/or stabilization is carried out in the presence of at least one compound represented by the general formula (XI) set out below.
133~19~
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
Figs. l(a), 2(a), 3(a) and 4(a) show the effective spectral sensitive energy distribution ~or effective spectral light amount distribution) E (~) in various light-sensitive layers in comparative examples or in the present invention;
G
133~1~2 Fig. S(a) shows a representation of a color print obtained in the present invention in CIE(L*a*b) color specification system.
Fig. l(b) is the spectral sensitivity curve (shown at GL) of a green-sensitive layer in a color printing light-sensitive material used in Example 3 of the present invention and the spectral energy distribution curve (shown at P) of a printer used in the same example;
Fig. l(c) is the spectral sensitivity (relative) curve of a color printing light-sensitive material to be used in the present invention;
Fig. 2(c) is the effective spectral sensitive light amount distribution in a comparative color printing light-sensitive material in an image formation system;
Figs. 3(c), 4(c), 5(c) and 8(c) show the effective spectral sensitive light amount distribution in a color printing light-sensitive material of the present invention in an image formation system;
Fig. 6(c) shows a representation of the effect of the present invention in a CIE color specification system;
and Fig. 7(c) shows the spectral transmittance curve of a band stop filter or sharp cut filter to be used in the present invention;
1~39132 Figs. l(d), 2(d) and 3(d) show the spectral transmittance curve of filter Samples 1, 2 and 3 used to be in the present invention, respectively.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
The color print original used in the present invention is a color light-sensitive material for use in photo-graphing such as color negative light-sensitive material, color reversal light-sensitive material, and instant photographic light-sensitive material, negative film or transparent positive film obtained from dupe color light-sensitive material, or color photograph or printed matter comprising a transparent or reflective support.
These light-sensitive materials normally have an image comprising at least three primaries, i.e., yellow coloring material (Y), magenta coloring material (M) and cyan coloring material (C) on a support.
Examples of a color printing light-sensitive material of the present invention include color photographic paper, direct positive color light-sensitive material, and reversal color light-sensitive material.
The present invention may be preferably applied to the subtractive exposure process, particularly color image formation process comprising a printing process by means of an automatic printer using a white light source.
13391~2 In the color printing light-sensitive material, it is necessary to receive image data such as color hue and gradation, independently, which each has different spectral absorption characteristics due to yellow, magenta and cyan coloring materials in a color print original. In the present invention, to this end, it is most desirable to receive data only in the vicinity of the maximum sensitivity wavelength of the yellow, magenta and cyan coloring light-sensitive layers in a color printing light-sensitive material (Abs.max, ~gs.max and Ars.max respectively).
In the color printing light-sensitive material, the blue-sensitive layer may substantially have a spectral sensitivity in a wavelength band of 400 to 485 nm, the green-sensitive layer may substantially have a spectral sensitivity in a wavelength band of 485 to 570 nm, and the red-sensitive layer may substantially have a spectral sensitivity in a wavelength band of 570 to 750 nm. The blue-sensitive layer may have a maximum sensitivity wave-length (~s max) of 400 to 470 nm, the green-sensitive layer may have a maximum sensitivity wavelength of 520 to 570 nm, and the red-sensitive layer may have a maximum sensitivity wavelength of 600 to 740 nm.
The effective spectral light amount distribution of the present color printing light-sensitive material will be explained hereinafter. Assuming that the spectral transmittance distribution of coloring materials in a color print original such as color negative film is T
(A), the spectral sensitivity distribution of a light-sensitive layer such as green-sensitive layer in a color printing light-sensitive material is S (A), and the energy distribution of the printing light is P(A), the effective spectral sensitive energy distribution E (A) in the light-sensitive layer is given by the equation (1~
E (A) = S (A)-T (A)-P (A) (1-1) Accordingly, the effective sensitive light amount of, for example, the green sensitive layer is given by the equation (1-2):
~ 570 Eg = J Sg (A)-Tm (A)-P (A) dA (1-2) The effective spectral sensitive energy distribu-tion given by the equation (1-1) is called effective spectral light amount distribution.
The present invention features that at least two of the effective spectral light amount distribution of a blue-sensitive layer (BL), a green-sensitive layer (GL) 13~31~
and a red-sensitive layer (RL) in a printing light-sensi-tive material, i.e., Eb (A), Eg (A) and Er (A), respectively, are substantially independent each other.
In the present invention, it is preferred that at least Eg (A) and Er (A) or Eg (A) and Eb (A), preferably Eb (A), Eg (A) and Er (A) each is substantially independent each other. In particular, if within a range of 10% or less, preferably 7% or less of the effective spectral light amount (Eb, Eg or Er) of a light-sensitive layer obtained by printing grey images from a color negative film obtained by photographing a grey object, are contained or not contained, the effective spectral light amounts of the other light-sensitive layers~or if within a range of only about 15% or less or preferably about 7% or less of the maximum value of the effective spectral light amount distribution (Eb (A), Eg (A) or Er (A)) of a light-sensitive layer, effective spectral light amount distributions of the other light-sensitive layers are contained, the color mixture is not substantially definitely observed, and this means that the effective spectral light amount distribution in these light-sensitive layers are substantially independent.
For example, for the green-sensitive layer (GL) in a color printing light-sensitive material, if in a wavelength band of 485 to 570 nm Er (A) and Ef (A) are limited within a range of Eg (A) x 0.15 or less or there are no Er (~) and Eb (~), or if in a wavelength band of 485 to 570 nm Er and Eb are limited within a range of Eg x 0.10 or less or there are no Er and Eb, it can be said that the effective spectral sensitive light amount distribution Eg (~) of the green-sensitive layer is substantially independent from that of the other light-sensitive layers.
In order to improve color reproducibility, it is necessary that the coloring material to be used in the color printing light-sensitive material be particularly improved and the color development doesn't cause mixture on color images due to residual color, stain, poor desilvering, etc. Preferably, it is necessary that the spectral sensitivity of a photographing color light-sensitive material be predetermined as described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 89,850/88. More preferably, it is necessary that a coloring material comprising a yellow coupler or magenta coupler be improved so as to have a block type spectral transmittance.
The silver halide emulsion to be incorporated in the present color printing light-sensitive material, particularly in GL or RL preferably doesn't have an inherent sensitivity in the wavelength band for BL and a longer wavelength band.
13391~2 The present color printing light-sensitive material is formed of such a silver halide emulsion and spectrally sensitized in such a manner that Eb (~), Eg (~) or Er (~) of each light-sensitive layer is independent.
The blue-sensitive layer (BL) is not always required to be spectally sensitized due to an inherent sensitivity of silver halide, but it may be preferably spectrally sensitized in such a manner that the maximum inherent sensitive wavelength thereof is set at 460 nm or less, preferably the wavelength band for BL or less, to provide a high rapidness in color development or inhibit mixture. Preferably, in order to provide a wavelength ~smaX of the maximum S(~) of BL given by a J-type spectral sensitization, any suitable sensitizing dye selected from those represented by the general formula (I) explained later may be used.
In order to evaluate the color reproducibility, a Macbeth chart comprising 18 ch~omatic colors and 6 achromatic colors may be commonly used. Examples of such a Macbeth chart are described in C.S.M. MaCamy, "J. Appl.
Phot. Eng.", Vol. 2, pp. 95-99, 1976.
In the present invention, such a Macbeth chart is used to define the average color mixing degree in a color printing light-sensitive material as described hereinafter. By setting the average color mixing degree thus defined at 0.13 or less, an unprecedentedly excellent color reproduction on a color printing light-sensitive material from a color print original can be attained.
In the color printing light-sensitive material, the green-sensitive layer generally tends to deteriorate the color reproducibility among the three light-sensitive layers, i.e., blue-sensitive layer, green-sensitive layer and red-sensitive layer. Therefore, the green-sensitive layer in the color printing light-sensitive material will be further described hereinafter. Assuming that the spectral transmittance distribution of a color negative material obtained by photographing color chart i is Ti(A), the spectral sensitivity distribution of the green-sensitive layer in a color printing light-sensitive material is S(A), and the energy distribution of a printing light source is P(A), the exposure of the green-sensitive layer for color chart i is given by the equation (2-1).
Ei = S(A) ~ Ti(A) ~P(A) ~dA (2-1) 485 i = 1 to 24 1339I9~
In general, printing is made in such manner that achromatic image having a middle density are printed to get achromatic image having a predetermined density on a color printing light-sensitive material. Accordingly, if the exposure amount Ei of the color charts are determined based on the exposure amount E22 of achromatic chart (i=22 an optical density is amount about 0.7) Hi defined by the following equation (2-2) can represent whether the color exposure amount ~i of chart i is larger or smaller;
comparing with a standard of achromatic iamge.
Hi = Ei/E22 (2-2) A spectral sensitivity distribution in a delta function form having a 5 nm width in the center of the main maximum sensitive wavelength of the green-sensitive layer is the most preferable spectral sensitivity distribution, and Hi at the main maximum sensitive wavelength is defined as Hi~, ~i defined on the equation (2-3) represents the magnitude of the deviation of the exposure amount of color chart i from the ideal exposure amount.
~i = Hi/Hi~ (2-3) Accordingly, the color mixing degree on an exposure for printing or at the printing (hereinafter refer to the color mixing degree) Bi of color chart i can be defined as shown by the equation (2-4).
133~92 Bi = ~i ~ 1.0 (2-4) Therefore, the average color mixing degree on an exposure for printing (hereinafter refer to the average color mixing degree) r can be defined by averaging the color mixing degree ~i of color chart i over 18 Macbeth chromatic charts as shown in the equation (2-5).
r= 18 x~ (2-5) The average color mixing degree of the blue-sensitive layer and the red-sensitive layer can be similarly defined and easily determined with the effective wavelength band set at 390 to 485 nm and 570 to 740 nm, respectively.
According to the Inventors' study, with respect to a color printing light-sensitive material, the color mixing degree of each chromatic chart has a close relathionship with the average color mixing degree. In the present invention, the degree of color mixture can be represented by the color mixing degree or average color mixing degree on an exposure for printing (at the printing) in each of the light-sensitive layers. When the average color mixing degree is 0.13 or less, preferably 13391~
0.12 or less, particularly 0.10 or less in each of the light-sensitive layers, an excellent color reproducibility can be attained. Alternatively, when the color mixing degree of a Macbeth chart Y (i = 16) of at least one light-sensitive layer of the color printing light-sensitive material is 0.44 or less, preferably 0.42 or less, particularly 0.40 or less, an excellent reproducibility can be attained. When there is no color mixture, the color mixing degree is 0Ø However, if the average color mixing degree is 0.03 or less, it can be said that there is substantially no color mixing degree.
In the present invention, the blue-sensitive layer, the green-sensitive layer and the red-sensitive layer all have 0.13 or less of average color mixing degree thus defined above.
The silver halide light-sensitive emulsion generally absorbs light to provide a latent image or becomes light-sensitive in a wavelength band of less than about 540 nm for a silver bromoiodide emulsion, less than about 500 nm for a silver bromide emulsion, or less than about 420 nm for a silver chloride emulsion as described in T. H. James, "The Theory of the Photographic Process", 4th Ed., 1977, pp. 39-44. Therefore, the halogen composition of particulate silver halide and the process 13391~2 for the formation of crystalline particulate silver halide are important in the present invention.
In the case of the blue-sensitive layer, the silver halide light-sensitive emulsion may or may not be subjected to spectral sensitization to obtain a blue-sensitive layer. The inherent spectral sensitivity distribution of the silver halide is an important factor to improve the color mixing degree. The shorter the wavelength band of the inherent spectral sensitivity distribution is, the more advantageous is the effect.
In the case of the green-sensitive or red-sensitive layer, a silver halide light-sensitive emulsion which has been spectrally sensitized may or may not be provided with a dye-containing layer such as a filter layer which is adapted to cut light in a blue-sensitive wave-length band. Such a green-sensitive layer or red-sensitive layer may be provided on a support. Therefore, it is important to decrease the color mixing degree, especially, between the blue-sensitive layer and the green-sensitive layer or between the blue-sensitive layer and the red-sensitive layer is lowered.
In the present invention, a silver halide emulsion having a low silver iodide content or average silver bromide content is preferably incoporated in the silver halide emulsion layer, particularly in the blue-sensitive layer and/or green-sensitive layer. Particularly, a silver halide emulsion layer having 2 mol% or less of layer average silver iodide content, or being free of silver iodide is preferably used. Furthermore, a silver halide emulsion layer having an average silver bromide content of 80 mol% or less is preferably used.
According to the present invention in which at least two or three of effective spectral light amount distributions Eb (~), Eg (~) and Er (~) are made substantially independent from each other color reproducibility is remarkably improved when the distribution of proper spectral sensitivity of the photographing color light-sensitive material to the object of the photographing color light-sensitive material to the object is fully improved by a suitable method as described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 34,541/86, 201,245/86, 158,779/87 and 89850/88 or a coloring material to be used in the color printing light-sensitive material, especially coupler is fully improved.
As a method to attain the objects of the present invention, a suitable filter or a filter layer can be used. A suitable filter or a filter layer can be used to restrict the main sensitive wavelength band of the blue-sensitive layer, the green-sensitive lauyer and the red-sensitive layer in the present color printing light-sensitive material to, for example, 400 to 485 nm, 485 to 570 nm, and 570 to 750 nm, respectively. However, if the spectral absorption distribution of the filter is broad or is not predetermined in a proper wavelength band, it may deteriorate color balance or color reproduction.
In the present invention, the average color mixing degree as defined above can be adjusted to 0.13 or less by providing a filter or a filter layer substantially between the light source and the light-sensitive layer in the color printing light-sensitive material when images are printed on the color printing light-sensitive material in a subtractive exposure process. Alternatively, the average color mixing degree as defined above can be adjusted to 0.13 or less by providing in combination a color printing light-sensitive material comprising a blue-sensitive layer, a green-sensitive layer and a red-sensitive layer as described above and the filter or filter layer as described above.
The filter which can be used in the present invention may be interposed between the light source for use in the subtractive exposure process and the concerned light-sensitive layer in the printing light-sensitive material. Any optical filter otherwise prepared, filter layer incorporated in a color print original or filter layer provided on the light source side in the 133~192 concerned light-sensitive layer in a color printing light-sensitive material may be preferably used so long as it gives 0.13 or less for the degree of color mixture in the color printing light-sensitive material.
In the present invention, a filter having a spectral absorption band which substantially exists in a wavelength band excluding the band of ~20 nm, preferably ~15 nm of the maximum effective spectral light amount ~EmaX of each light-sensitive layer is preferably interposed between the light source and the color printing light-sensitive material during the printing process.
The terminology "substantially exists" means half the width value or three-fourths the width value is used in the spectral transmittance curve.
A filter having an absorption band in a wavelength band, e.g., of less than 400 nm, 485 to 525 nm, or 570 to 630 nm may be preferably used.
Furthermore, a filter layer previously provided on a color negative film or a filter layer provided on the top layer of a light-sensitive layer in a color printing light-sensitive material may be preferably used in combination with such a filter. In addition, it is important that within a rangd of the main sensitivity zone of the concerned light sensitive layer,which lies in a range of ~smaX ( the maximum sensitive wavelength) +20 nm, preferably ~smax ~30 nm, more preferably ~EmaX (the maximum effective spectral light amount) ~15 nm, most particularly ~EmaX ~20 nm, the other layers substantially have no spectral sensitivity. Por example, the green-sensitive layer is not sensitive to the light within a range of the wavelength ~bsmax ~20 nm to which range the blue-sensitive layer is sensitive. To this end, the green-sensitive layer may be subjected to a spectral sensitization process which gives a sharp spectral sensitivity distribution. Secondly, the green-sensitive layer may comprise a silver halide emulsion having substantially no or low sensitivity in the above described wavelength band. This can apply to other light-sensitive layers.
As a suitable filter there may be preferably used a band cut filter which comprises a multilayer dielectric-compound thin film as described hereinafter.
The band stop filter to be used in the present invention is a solid filter which has been prepared by repeatedly applying a silicon oxide layer and an aluminum oxide layer on a transparent substrate.
As a suitable substrate there may be used a substrate capable of withstanding a heat treatment such as hot coating. Examples of such a substrate include quartz, glass, ceramics, and plastic. Preferred among these 133~132 materials are silicon oxide containing materials such as quartz and glass. The thickness of the substrate is preferably in the range of 0.2 to 2 mm. The silicon oxide or aluminum oxide layer has a thickness of 300 to 5,000 A.
The silicon oxide layer and the aluminum oxide layer are alternately provided on the substrate.
The present band stop filter having any spectral absorption characteristics in the visible band can be obtained by providing a multilayer structure of silicon oxide layer and aluminum oxide layer having different optical thicknesses (refractive index and thickness).
Such a multilayer structure can provide a stabilized finish quality excellent in fastness to light, heat and scratch.
The filter has preferably 7 or more, more preferably 21 to 101, particularly 47 or more layers. The more, particularly more than 20, the number of layers is, the higher is the maximum absorptivity of the band stop filter, and the sharper is the spectral absorption charac-teristics obtained in the specified wave length band.
Such a multilayer structure can provide a less change in the spectral absorption characteristics due to a deviation of the angle of incidence from the axial direction in the band stop filter.
1333l92 In the present filter, a protective layer having a thickness preferably greater than that of the other layers is provided as its top layer. Such a protective layer can be provided by applying preferably a layer of silicon oxide or aluminum oxide, more preferably a layer of silicon oxide, to a thickness of 500 A to 1 ~m. Such a protective layer having a greater thickness than the other layers can further improve the scratch resistance and chemically protect the multilayer film, providing a band stop filter excellent in strage ability.
Therefore, a suitable filter according to the present invention is a band stop filter which has been prepared by applying 5 or more layers, preferably 21 to 101 layers, on a substrate and providing a protective layer having a greater thickness than the other layers thereon.
The present band stop filter can be obtained by alternately depositing silicon oxidè and aluminum oxide on a substrate. The deposition of the material can be accomplished by any common method such as vacuum deposition, PVD (Physical Vapor Deposition) process such as ion plating process , or CFD (Chemical Vapor Deposition) process such as plasma deposition process.
The degree of vacuum is preferably in the range of lO-ll to 10-4 torr, particularly 10-6 to 10-4 torr with nitrogen 133919~
gas or an inert gas such as argon and helium, optionally mixed with oxygen gas.
The layer structure, thickness and constituting material of the present stop filter can be determined by observing the section of the filter under an electron microscope or by ESCA. -The process for the formation of color images on asilver halide color light-sensitive material comprises photographing an object or image exposure such as copying or printing from a color original, and then color-devel-oping the silver halide color light-sensitive material.
Particularly, the image exposure can be effected by any suitable method selected from the three processes (collective simultaneous exposure process, slit exposure process, and simultaneous slit exposure process), additive exposure process, and subtractive exposure process. The band stop filter according to the present invention can be effectively used in all thesè exposure processes, particularly in the subtractive exposure process.
As a suitable silver halide color light-sensitive material for the present invention there can be preferably used a negative/positive or positive/positive working process printing color light-sensitive material such as color photographic paper, color reversal photographic paper, color reversal film, silver die bleach process 133~192 color photographic paper, direct positive type color photographic paper, diffusion transfer type color photographic paper, heat-developable diffusion transfer type color photographic paper or film. These color light-sensitive materials can be used to directly photograph objects. Therefore, the present band stop filter can be used for an exposing machine, printer, mini-laboratory system printer and copying machine by which these color light-sensitive materials are processed. The present band stop filter can be preferably used in place of a band stop filter or band cut filter as described in Japanese Patent Application Nos. 229,856/87, 223,053/87, 239,032/87, and 260,357/87. The present band stop filter can also be used for an exposing machine or autoprinter for printing on an ordinary color photographic paper in the white light subtractive process as described in Japanese Patent Application Nos. 146,542/87, 200,508/87, 146,544/87, 191,187/87, and 255,048/87.
The present band stop filter preferably has a maximum absorption wavelength, preferably an absorption wavelength band, in a wavelength band outside the maximum wavelength il5 nm, preferably the maximum wavelength ~20 nm, in the maximum sensitiave wavelength or the effective spectral light amount distribution of the blue-sensitive layer, green-sensitive layer or red-sensitive layer in such a liqht-sensitive layer.
The present band stop filter preferably has a sharp spectral absorption. In its spectral transmittance curve, the ratio of a width of 1/4 value of spectral transmittance (Wl/4)to a width of 3/4 value of spectral transmittance (W3/4) is in the range of 0.50 or more, preferably 0.60 or more, more preferably 0.75 or more. As described above, such spectral characteristics can be attained by properly arranging layer thicknesses and a multilayer structure of repeating layers.
As such a substrate material there may be commonly used glass, silicon, sapphire, quartz, or surface-treated plastic film or plate. As suitable dielectrics there may be used dielectrics as described in Japan Society for the Promotion of Science's No. 131 Thin Film Committee, Handbook of Thin Film, Ohm-sha, 1983, Chapter 2.2 on page 817 and Table 2.6 on page 820. Examples of such dielectrics include inorganic compounds such as silicon dioxide, aluminum oxide, tin oxide, zirconium oxide, titanium, zinc sulfide, silicon, germanium, and tellurium, metal such as silver, aluminum, neodymium, titanium, and thallium, and organic dielectrics, particularly high molecular dfelectrics as described in Japan Society for the Promotion of Science's No. 131 Thin Film Committee, 13391g~
Handbook of Thin Film Ohm-sha, 1983, Chapter 2.2 on page 817, such as polystyrene, polypropylene, polyimide, FEP
(Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene Resin) teflon, and poly y-benzyl glutamate. These dielectrics may be used in combination.
A multilayer comprising 5 to 50 layers, optionally more layers, can be provided by repeatedly coating at least two dielectrics having different refractive indexes to a predetermined thickness. The design of such a multilayer is described in Japan Society for the Promotion of Science's No. 131 Thin Film Committee, Handbook of Thin Film, Chapter 4 on page 823, and Shiro Fujiwara, Optical Thin Film, 2nd ed., 1986, Kyoritsu Shuppan Co., Ltd., Chapter 6. Such a multilayer thin film can be prepared by the sputtering process, CVD film-forming process or vacuum evaporation process.
A suitable band stop filter to be used in the present invention has a narrow absorption band having a half value width on the spectral transmittance curve (Wl/2) of preferably less than 60 nm, more preferably 10 to 60 nm. Furthermore, the present band stop filter has a minimum transmittance of preferably 30% or less, more preferably 20% or less, particularly 10% or less.
Furthermore, a band stop filter preferably having a spectral transmittance of 70% or more and a lowest transmittance in spectral absorption band of preferably 20% or less, more preferably 10% or less, may be preferably has a shape coefficient Wl/4/W3/4 ( W1~4 represents 1/4 of spectral transmittance, and W3/4 represents 3/4 of spectral transmittance) of 0.5 or more.
Furthermore, a band stop filter having a spectral absorption in a wavelength band of 430 nm or less, 490 to 530 nm, or 570 to 630 nm.
The average color mixing degree in the present invention can widely vary depending on the sensitizing dye used, halogen composition, etc. However, since the average color mixing degree in each element can be adjusted to 0.13 or less in accordance with the present invention by providing a filter having a necessary spectral transmittance (calculated from the average color mixing degree), such a multilayer dielectric-deposited thin film is advantageous in that it can easily attain the present average color mixing degree.
Another example of a suitable layer is a filter layer to be incorporated in a color negative light-sensitive material. This process is intended to provide the light-sensitive layer side or back side in the color negative light-sensitive material with a spectral absorption by a masking colored coupler. For example, such a filter layer may be provided as a nondecolorizable dye-containing filter layer. This process may also be intended to correct undesired absorption by color dyes incorporated in the color negative light-sensitive material. Such a filter layer can be formed using, a colored coupler which has been prepared by optimizing the spectral absorptivity of a conventional colored coupler so as to give 0.13 or less for the color mixing degree in a color printing light-sensitive material. As such a filter layer there can be used a filter layer comprising a colored coupler as described in U.S. Patent Nos.
2,852,370, 2,860,975, 2,841,678, and 3,184,307, French Patent No. 73,826, West German Patent Application Disclosure No. 2,125,220, Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 45,732/72, 123,341/75, and 130,024/79, Japanese Patent Publication Nos. 19,889/73, and 21,565/73, and British Patent No. 755,458. Part'icularly preferred are colored couplers as described in the patent application 129,143/87.
Such a filter layer may be provided by dyeing a hydrophilic light-sensitive layer (which may serve as an antihalation layer at the same time) disposed between a support and the nearest light-sensitive layer in a color negative light-sensitive material, dyeing the back layer of the support, or dyeing the support itself.
Particularly preferred dyes which can be used in such a dyeing can be selected from the group consisting of nondecolorizable dyes having a sharp spectral absorption in a wavelength band between the maximum spectral sensitivity of BL and GL in the color negative light-sensitive material, e.g., 485 to 530 nm, such as dyes described as specific examples in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 45,237/85 (pages. 6 to 11).
Alternatively, a nondecolorizable dye having a sharp spectral absorption in a wavelength band between the maximum spectral sensitivity of GL and RL in the color negative light-sensitive material, e.g., 570 to 630 nm may be preferably used. Such a nondecolorizable dye can be selected from the group consisting of anthraquinone dye, triphenylmethane dye, cyanine dye, melocyanine dye, pyrazolonexazole dye, azo dye, phthalocyanine dye, indoaniline dye, and indigo dye. If the above described two types of filter layers are provided in combination, the printing by the subtractive exposure process can be effected as easily as in the conventional process. This process can improve the color mixing degree without deteriorating the color reproducibility, sensitivity and sharpness of the color negative light-sensitive material.
1~391~
Further example of a suitable filter layer is a filter layer incorporated in the color printing light-sensitive material. Such a filter layer may be a filter layer capable of being decolored after development, provided on the light source side in a predetermined light-sensitive layer. Suitable dyes which can be incorporated in such a filter layer can be selected from the group consisting of dyes described in Japanese Patent Publication Nos. consisting of dyes described in Japanese Patent Publication Nos. 1,419/76, and 10,187/80, Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 154,439/84, and 64,346/85, French Patent Nos. 1,108,788, 2,182,329, and 3,514,450, and West German Patent No. 2,429,228. These dyes and a suitable method as described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 65,230/75, 56,345/86, and 19,842/87 can be used to provide the desired filter layer.
Particularly, functional dyes as described in Japanese Patent Application No. 106,892/87 to the present applicant may be preferably used in the present invention.
In the present printing light-sensitive material, it is preferred that a suitable filter layer is used while the spectral sensitivity distribution in the silver halide emulsion to be incorporated in the blue-sensitive layer and/or green-sensitive layer is shifted to a shorter wavelength band by reducing the average silver iodide 1~3919~
content and average silver bromide content and the mutual color separation in the spectral sensitivity distribution in the blue-sensitive layer, green-sensitive layer and red-sensitive layer is improved by properly selecting sensitizing dyes.
Conditions A), B) and C) referred to above in connection with the first aspect of the invention are as follows:
A) Silver halide emulsion used in the blue-sensitive layer and/or green-sensitive layer is an emulsion of silver chloride, silver bromide or silver chlorobromide containing 2 mol% or less (including 0%) of an average silver iodide content;
B) Silver halide emulsion used in the blue-sensitive layer is not spectrally sensitized or spectrally sensitized using at least one sensitizing dye selected from the group consisting of the compounds represented by the following formula (I) and (II);
C) Silver halide emulsion used in the green-sensitive layer is spectrally sensitized using at least one sensitizing dye selected from the group consisting of the compounds represented by the following formula (III).
..... -- Zl............ ... -- Z2 --Rl-N C=CH-C N - R2 (I) (CH=CH)jl (CH=CH) kl-(Xl)nl wherein Zl and Z2 each represents a benzothiazole nucleus, naphthothiazole nucleus, benzoselenazole nucleus, naphthoselenazole nucleus, benzooxazole nucleus, naphthooxazole nucleus, benzoimidazole nucleus, naphthoimidazole nucleus, indolenine nucleus, benzoindolenine nucleus, indole nucleus or guinoline nucleus which may be substitued; Rl and R2 each represents an alkyl group, alkenyl group, alkynyl group or aralkyl group; either or both of Rl and R2 each has at least one sulfonic acid group, carboxyl group or hydroxyl group; il and kl each represents an integer of O or l; nl represents an integer of O or l; and Xl~ represents an acid anion, with the proviso that when nl is 0, it indicates that an intramolecular salt is formed.
..--- Z2l.... / Q2 ~
R2l-N / ~ C N / (II) (CH=CH)j2 0 ~ R22 wherein Z21 has the same meaning as Zl or represents a thiazole nucleus, selenazole nucleus, oxazole nucleus, imidazole nucleus, thiazolizine nucleus, thiazoline nucleus, benzothiazoline nucleus, naphthothiazoline nucleus, selenazolizine nucleus, selenazoline nucleus, benzoselenazoline nucleus, naphthoselenazoline nucleus, benzooxazoline nucleus, naphthooxazoline nucleus, benzimidazoline nucleus, naphothoimidazoline nucleus, pyrroline nucleus, pryridine nucleus, dihydroprydine nucleus, dihydro~uinoline nucleus, benzoimidazoline nucleus or naphthoimidazoline nucleus which may be substituted; Q2 represents a sulfur atom, oxygen atom, selenium atom or ~N-R23; R2l, R22, and R23 each has the same meaning as Rl; and i2 has the same meaning as il.
In the general formulae (I) and (II), the heterocycle formed by Zl, Z2 and Z21 may contain a substituent such as halogen atom, e.g., F. Cl and Br, 133~192 lower alkyl group, e.g., methyl group, ethyl group, trifluoromethyl group, benzyl group, phenethyl group, hydroxyl group, and alkoxy group, acetyl group e.g., phenyl group, chlorophenyl group, carboxyl group and estrified carboxyl group, carbamoyl group, and sulfamoyl group. Particularlly, a group which particularly forms a J-band, halogen atom, trifluoromethyl group, aryl group, and estrified carboxyl group may be preferably used.
As Rl, R2, R2l, R22 or R23 there can be used a group commonly used for cyanine dye, such as Cl_6 lower alkyl group, alkoxyalkyl group, acetoxyalkyl group, alkylureidoalkyl group, hydroxyalkyl group, chloroalkyl group, sulfoalkyl group, carboxyalkyl group, allyl group, benzyl group, and phenethyl group. A combination of a compound represented by the general formula (I) and a compound represented by the general formula (II) may be used.
Specific examples of compounds represented by the general formulae (I) and (II) will be shown hereinafter.
However, the present invention should not be construed as being limited to these examples.
I-- (1) c e > c H~N~C
(CHz)3 tCH2)3 S 03N a S 03 I-- (2) H 3 C O N> C H~+ ~0 H
(CHz)3 (CHz)s C 3 ~- (3) +~ C H /
( C H z) 4 ( C H 2) ~
S 03 S 03HN(CzHs)3 ~ 46 --I - ( 4 ) N > C H ~ S
( C H 2) z ( C H 2) 2 S 0 3 K ~S 0 3 I - ( ~ ) ~ > C H
( C H 2) 3 ( C H 2) 3 S 0 3 N a S 0 3 I - ( 6 ) ( C H 2) I ( C H 2) 3 133~19~
1- (7) J~ > C H ~ +
( C H z~ s ( C H 2) 3 S OsK - I
I-- (8) ,J~ ~> C H ~--< +~
H3C I I OCHs ( C H 2) 3 S O 3( C H 2) S S 0 3 N a I-- t9 ) ~3Cse> ~ S ~3 - (CH2)s tC H2)3 SOsK
-- 48 ~
13~192 I- (1 0) N> C H~ ;~3 S03K - i I-- tl 1) - -( C ~ ~) I-- (1 2) ¢~ > C H~ ' ~ C H 3 (CH 2) s CH2 I o~N>-' (CHz)J
S 03N a ~- (2) [~ N> o ~N>--(CH2)2S 03K
~- (3) ¢~( C }12) 3 S 03~ a 13391'92 ~- (4) Na 03S(C Hz)~ S>_ O
~- (5) ~ ~5 (CH2)3 C z H s S 05N a ~- (6) ~N> ~>~ S
N
( IC H 2) 3 ~
S 03N a ~- (7) [~CN> ~S' (C Hz)3 ~ C2Hs S 03N a ~- (8) (CHz)3 0 S 03N a The amount of the compound of the general formula (I) and/or (II) to be incorporated in the blue-sensitive layer is not specifically limited but is normally in the range of 10-6 to 1 x 10-2 mol, preferably S x 10-5 to 2 x 10-3 mol per 1 mol of silver halide.
Furthermore, a sensitizing dye which is strongly spectrally sensitized in a wavelength band of 485 to 570 nm, preferably about 520 nm, to 570 nm, particularly 530 nm to 570 nm may be preferably incorporated in the green-sensitive layer. A silver halide emulsion wherein inherent sensitivity of silver halide has been shifted to a short wavelength band shorter than 420 nm by using low silver iodide and silver bromide content silver halide particles may be preferably incorporated in the green-sensitive layer. In particular, a silver halide emulsion which is sensitized in a J-band may be preferably incorporated in the green-sensitive layer. Preferred examples of such a compound include those represented by the general formula (III):
Z3~ l33 Z32 Rl-N C=CH-C=CH-C N - R2 ~ D+ ( III) (CH=CH)j3 (CH=CH)k3 (X3~)n3 133~
wherein Z31 has represents benzimidazole nucleus, benzooxazole nucleus, naphthoimidazole nucleus or naphthooxazole nucleus; Z32 represents benzimidazole nucleus, naphthoimidazole nucleus benzooxazole nucleus, naphthooxazole nucleus, benzothiazole nucleus or benzoselenazole nucleus which may be substitued; R3l and R32 each has the same meaning as Rl and R2 in the general formula (I); R33 represents a hydrogen atom, lower alkyl group or aralkyl group; j3 and k3 have the same meaning as il in the general formula (I); n3 has the same meaning as nl in the general fromula (I); and X3- represents an acid anion. .
Examples of suitable substituents which can be contained in the heterocycle formed by Z31 and Z32 in the general formula (III) include those described a suitable substituents for heterocycle formed by Zlt Z2 and Z21 with reference to the general formulae (I) and (II).
Specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (II) will be shown hereinafter, but the present invention should not be construed as being limited thereto.
m~
C2Hs ,CH3 >~C H--C = C H~\+~i~'C H 3 (C H2)3 (C H2)3 S.03K S 03 m ( 2) C H--8 = c H~+ ~ c e (CH2)3 (CH2)3 S OsK S 03 m- (3) C2 H s C ~ >--C H--C H= C H~+~
CH2(CH2)2H (C H2)3 m- (4) = ~~>~C H--C----C H--<~
C2Hs (C H2)3 ~ 55 --m- (s) CH-C=CH
S03H-N(C2Hs)3 23 m- (6) C 2 Hs CH-C=CH~
(4H2)3 (~H2)3 ~ .
S03H-N(CzHs)3 ¦
m- (7) CH-C=CH-~
S03H-N ~ (CHz)3 m- (8) C2Hs - ~ ~ CH-C=CH ~ +
N N
(CHz)3S03N a - 56 ~
13391~;~
m-C2Hs C ~. >~ C H--C = C H ~ ~
(CH2)3 ( Hz)3 S 03K ~ 03 m - ( 1 o ) F >--C H--C= C H~ i ~L''F
(CHz)3S 03N a (CHz)3S 03 m- (1 1) C Q C2Hs C~H5 C
~' ~. >--CH - CH= C H~
CF3 (CH2)3S03Na (CHz)~S03 m - ( 1 2 ) C 2 H s C Q >--C H - C = C H--~ ~'~C
(CHz)3 ( Hz)s I
S 03N a - S 03 m ~ ( 1 3 ) >~C H--C H = C H--~ ~
C2Hs (CH2)~S O 3 m- (14) X~ ~C H = C H--C H--<
S OsK S 03 m - ( 1 5 ) C2Hs - C2Hs ~ ~CH--CH=CH~
H3C(CH2) 300C ( C H 2) 3 I COO~CH2~ :-CI~
~ 58 ~
The amount of the compound of the general formula (III) to be incorporated in the green-sensitive layer is not specifically limited but is normally in the range of 1 x 10-6 to 1 x 10-2 mol, preferably 5 x 10-5 to 2 x 10-3 mol per 1 mol of silver halide. Two or more sensitizing dyes of the general formula (III) may be incorporated in combination in the green-sensitive layer.
As described above, a silver halide emulsion having a low silver iodide content or low silver a bromide content may be advantageously incorporated in the green-sensitive layer to inhibit color mixture with the blue-sensitive layer.
The red-sensitive layer is spectrally sensitized with a sensitizing dye which gives a strong spectral sensitization in a wavelength band where the spectral absorption by a magenta dye is not observed, e.g., wavelength band of longer than 600 nm, preferably 630 nm, depending on the spectral absorption by a cyan dye in the color negative original. A silver halide emulsion as described above may be preferably incorporated in the red-sensitive layer to inhibit overlapping with the blue-sensitive layer.
Spectral sensitization preferably carried out so that an average color mixing degree with blue sensitive 133gl~2 layer and a color mixing degree with green sensitive layer is each less than 0.13.
The red-sensitive layer to be used in the present invention may be preferably spectrally sensitized with a sensitizing dye represented by the general formula (IV), (V), or (VI).
... Z41 .......... R143 ;~44 ....... Z42 .
R41-N (CH=CII) j4 C=CH (C = C)m4l C =CH-CH~= i~ (IV) (X4~)n4 133319~
wherein Z41 and Z42 each represents a 5- or 6-membered heterocyclic nucleus such as thiazole nucleus, benzothiazole nucleus, naphthothiazole nucleus, selenazole nucleus, benzoselenazole nucleus, naphthoselenazole nucleus, oxazole nucleus, benzooxazole nucleus, naphthooxazole nucleus, imidazole nucleus, benzimidazole nucleus, naphthoimidazole nucleus, 4-quinoline nucleus, pyrroline nucleus, pyridine nucleus, tetrazole nucleus, indolenine nucleus, benzindolenine nucleus, indole nucleus, telrazole nucleus, benzotelrazole nucleus, and naphthotelrazole nucleus; R41 and R42 each represents an alkyl group which may be substituted by a substituent such as halogen atom, cyano group, alkoxy group, substituted or unsubstituted amino group, carboxylic acid group, sulfononic acid group, and hydroxy group; alkenyl group;
alkynyl group or aralkyl group; m41 represents an integer of 1 to 3; j4 and k4 each represents an integer of O to l;
X4 represents an acid ion; and n4 represents an integer of O or 1, with the proviso than when m4l is 1, R43 represents a hydrogen atom, lower alkyl group, aralkyl group or aryl group and R44 represents a hydrogen atom, when m41 is 2 or 3, R43 represents a hydrogen atom and R44 represents a hydrogen atom, lower alkyl group or aralkyl group, and R43 may be connected to other R43's to form a hydrocarbon ring or a heterocyclic ring.
.Zsl..... , 754 Qs .................. Z52 Rsl-N (CH=C~)j5 C=CH (C ~ C C=CH-C ~ CH-CH ~ N~
n5 ll I R52 o Rs3 (Xs )n5 (V) ~here In whcrcn Z51 and Z52 each has the same meaning as Z41 or Z42;
Rsl and Z52 each has the same meaning as R41 or R42: R53 represents an alkyl group, alkenyl group, alkynyl group or aryl group such as substituted or unsubstitued phenyl group; m5 represents an integer of 0, 1 or 2; R54 represents a hydrogen atom, lower alkyl group or aryl; Q5 re~resenfs rcpr~6cnt a sulfur atom, oxygen atom, selenium atom or >N-R55 in which R55 has the same meaning as R53; J5, R5l,X5~e and n5 have the same meaning as J4, K4, x4e and n4, respectively, with the proviso that when m5 represents 2, R54 may be connceted to other R54's to form a hydrocarbon ring or a heterocyclic ring which is preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring.
13391~2 Z6l 763 R61-N (CH=CII)j6 C-C~ - C - C C=S (VI) m6 C N
Il I
wheren Z61 represents an atomic garoup required to form a heterocyclic ring (e.g. those as described with reference to Z41 and Z42, such as thiazolidine, thiazoline, benzo-thiazoline, naphthothiazoline, selenazolidine, selena-zoline, benzoselenazoline, naphthoselenazoline, benzo-oxazoline, naphthooxazoline, dihydropyridine, dihydro-quinoline, benzimidazoline, and haphthoimidazoline); Q6 has the same meansing as Q5; R61 has the same meaning as R51 or R52; R62 has the same meaning as R53; m6 has the same meaning as m5; ~ has the same meansing as R54; and j6 has the same meaning as j5, with the proviso that when m6 is 2 or 3, R63 may be connceted to other R63's to form a hydrocarbon or heterocyclic ring.
Specific examples of suitable sensitizing dyes which can be used in the present invention will be shown hereinafter.
133~1~2 J~ >--C H--C= C H~
CQ ' I I C~
(CH2)3 tCHz)3 S03Na S03-IV- (2) C H--C -- C H ~
(CH2)3 ( I H2) S 03N a S 03-IV- (3) S
~C >~ C H--C = C H ~
[~ C 2 H s ( C ~I 2) 3 ~JJ
~- (4) - ~ ~ CH-C=CH
- (CHz)4 (CH2)~
S03N a - S 03-N-- (5) C2Hs ~ ~ CH-C=CH ~ ~
C~ I I C-OOH
(CH2)3 C2Hs S Os ~- (6) CH-CH=CH ~ C 2 Hs CHzCOOH
133919~
N-- (7) ~' JS>_~ H~CH~ CH3 H3C CzHs (CH2)3 (8) C H~C H
C2Hs I~) CzHs r~- (9) ~ >~ C H~C H ~ ~
H3CO C2Hs IO CzHs ~ 66 ~
r~-- (1 O) H3C ~S \ I . S ~, CH3 CH--CH= C--CH=CH~+ ~
(CH2)3s03 CH2CH2 ~3 IV- ( 1 1 ) H3CO >--C H ~C H ~+ :1~ O C H 3 C 2 ~I S (CH2)3S03 IV - ( 1 2 ) + ~--CH--CH = C--CN = CH~ + ~3 (CH2)3SO3Na (CH2)3S03 IV- (13) C H 3 ~3 (CH2)3S03Na (CHz)3S03 - ( 1 4 ) ~~ >--CN--Cll = C--Cll = CII~
(CHz)3S 03 C2Hs IV- ( 1 5 ) C2Hs C2Hs ~T C~ >--CN--Cll= C--CH=CN~ =cc ,Ç!, (CH2)3S 03K (CH2)3S 03 ~ 68 --133919~
IV- (16) j~;>~C H~C H~Se~J
C 2 Hs (C H.) 3 S 0 3 ~t-- (1 7) ,~Se I ~S ~C H3 CH--CH= C--CH=C8~ _~~ C H3 (CHz)z ~3 (CHz)4SOs V- (1) >--C H--C H~ >-- CEI ~ ~
bJ C2H5 CH2CH=CH2 (CH2)3S 03 , Vl--(1) ~>--C H--C H--C--C H~5 >=5 .H~ CHzC00 Vl-- ( 2 ) C ~3 . C H
)~CN >~ C H ~ >=S
( C H 2) 3 S O s K C 2 H s VI--(3) H . C O >--C H--C H = C--C li ~--~ >~S
( C H2)SS 03K C2~1s 1339~92 The sensitizing dyes of the presenht invention represented by the general formulae (IV), (V) and (VI) mkay be used in an amount of 1 x 10-6 to 5 x lo-6 to 1 x 10-3 mol per 1 mol of silver halide, singly or in combination with other susper sensitizers.
In the present invention, the spectral transmittance distriubiton Ti(~) of a dye image obtained by the coupling reaction of a yellow, magenta or cyan coupler in a photographic color light-sensitaive material with a color developing agent affects the color mixing degree ~ or the layer average color mixing degree r as shown in Equation (2-1) or (2-5). a couler which provides an excellent color separation between dye images, e~
General formula (XI) referred to in the second aspect of the invention discussed previously, reads as follows:
Rl X N~ ~ CH=CE; ~ ~ ~ (XI
Y ~, N S03M M03S y wherein Rl, R2, R3 and R4 each represents ~ hydroxy group, \ halogen atom, heterocyclic amino group, ~ heterocyclic thio group, alkoxy group, amino group, alkylamino group, aryloxy group or arylamino group; X and Y each represents =N- or =CH-; and M represents a monovalent cation, with the proviso that X and Y don't represent =CH- at the same time, Preferably the pH value of the bleaching or blix solution is in the range of 3.5 to 6.0 and the replenishing amount of the rinsing solution and/or stabilizing solution is 3 to 50 times the amount of said solution carried over from the pre-bath~
_ ,, Unlike the blue-sensitive layer and the green-sensitive layer, the red-sensitive layer (RL) can be more easily provided depending on T( ~) of the coloring material in the color print original on a wavelength band longer than the wavelength band for the green-sensitive layer. Therefore, in order to make Er(~) independent from the other effective spectral sensitive energy distributions, any suitable sensitizing dye selected from those represent~d by the general formulas (IV), (V) and (VI) may be used to provide a maximum S( ~) given by a J-type or M-type spectral sensitization. Sensitizing dyes represented by the general formula (IV) may be used to give a J-type spectral sensitivity. Sensitizing dyes represented by the general formulas (V) and (VI) may be used to give an M-type spectral sensitivity.
The spectral sensitization in the present color printing light-sensitive material essentially features a J-type spectral sensitization or M-type spectral sensitization.
In the present invention, the effective spectral sensitive light volume distribution in the green-sensitive layer (Eg(~ )) is given substantially by a J-type spectral sensitization, and the effective spectral sensitive distribution in the red-sensitive layer (Er(~)) is given substantially by an M-type spectral sensitization or J-type spectral sensitization.
A J-type spectral sensitization is a sensitization by spectral absorption obtained by adsorption by J aggregates on a silver halide adsorbing substrate of a sensitizing dye. An M-type spectral sensitization is a sensitization by spectral absorption obtained by molecular adsorption by a sensitizing dye.
Examples of these types of spectral sensitizations are described in T. H. James, "The Theory of the Photographic Process", 4th ed., 1977, pp. 218-222.
For examplke, if Eg(~) is attributed to a J-type spectral sensitization, it means that Eg(~ doesn't exhibit the maximum value of Eg(~) corresponding to an M-type spectral esnsitization.
If Eg(~) is substantially attributed to a J-type spectral sensitization, it means that in the wavelength band for the green-sensitive layer the maximum value of Eg(A) corresponding to an M-type spectral sensitization does not exhibit a value over the value of about one-second, preferably one-third the maximum value of Eg(~ corresponding to a J-type spectral esnsitization.
, .
133gl92 In accordance with the relationship between the effective spectral sensitive light volume distribution E(~) and the spectral sensitivity distribution S(A, in a color printing light-sensitive material determined by the equation Ul), when S( ~) is attributed to a J-type spectral sensitization, E(~) corresponding to the wavelength is normally attributed to a J-type spectral sensitization. Those skilled in the art can determine whether E (A ) is attibuted to a J-type spectral sensitization or M-t~pe spectral sensitization from the structure of a sensitization dye used, the spectral absorption characteristics of the solution of the sensitizing dye, and the spectral absorption characteristics of the sensitizing dye adsorbed by silver halide. In general, the compound represented by the general formula (XI)has a strong effect of supersensitization for the M-type spectral sensitization of the present invention and thus tends to convert an H-type or J-type adsorption into an M-type adsorption. Those skilled in the art can unde.sL~ if-a spectral sensitization hPl~ngq to M~type or noe from the spectral absol ~ on characteristics of the sensitizing dye with respect to a silver halide adsorbing substrate which has been adjusted for a proper halogen composition by the use of, for example, Compound XI-(9) among compounds represented by the general formula (XI).
1339i~2 The present invention is advantageous in that S(~), which is a factor of E(~), is attributed to an M-type spectral sensitization, J-type spectral sensiitzation, or a spectral sensitization of a single structure such as inherent sensitivity of silver halide. Therefore, the gradation of images has a less fluctuation due to conditions of the object and printing conditions, and the gradation reproduction has a wide latitude. This is extremely advantageous to the present invention. On the other hand, the use of a J-type spectral sensitization leaves to be desired in that it is difficult for aggregates of a sensitizing dye to be removed during the color development, causing color leaving and stain. Furthermore, the use of a J-type spectral sensitization is disadvantageous in that it tends to retard the progress of color development, particularly the progress of blix of reduced silver. Therefore, such a defect can be eliminated by an improvement in the development process.
A coloring material in which T(~) of the coloring material in a photographing color light-sensitive material is reflected by E(~), particularly a magenta coloring material and a yellow coloring material is important in the present invention. Parti-cularly, a coupler represented by the general formula (VIII) may by advantageously used in the present invention. Such a coupler is advantageous in that it facilitates the use of a masking coloring material for the longer wavelength side in a yellow coloring material or filter coloring material which is adapted to improve E( ~ of GL in a color printing light-sensitive material. The use of such a coupler or a benzoylacetanilide type yellow co~pler can provide a thin light-sensitive layer or improve image sharpness.
In a green sensitive layer (GL), the sensitizing dye may be selected from those represented by formula (III) to provide a maximum S(A) given by J-type spectral sensitization in order to make Eg(A) independent from Eb(A) or Er(A). Especially, it is preferred to carry out spectral sensitization so as to decrease a contribution by M-type spectral sensitization. For the purpose, a use of CR-compounds disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Nos.
311131/86 and 47225/87 is preferred.
' 1339192 The color printing light-sensitive material according to the present invention may be printed from a color print original, particularly from a color genative film or color slide, in the above described white color exposure process.
A sharp band stop filter having a spectral absorption band in a wavelength band other than the range of ~ ~ax + 20 nm, ~\smax being a wavelength of the m~x;mllm S (~ of a light-sensitive layer of a color printing light-sensitive material, may be preferably used in this exposure process. As a suitable sharp band stop filter there may be preferably used a band stop filter.
In the present invention, at least one of the color development bleach, fixing (or blix) and rinse and/or stabi-lization is effecteed in the presence of at least one of compounds represented by the general formula (XI). Preferably, in the color development, at least one of the color develop-ing solution, blix solution, bleaching solution, fixing solution, stabilizing bath, and rinsing bath may contain, as a fluorescent brightening agent or residual color remover, a compound represented by the general formula (XI) where X
and Y preferably each represents -N=. Alternatively, the compound represented by the general formula (XI) may be incorporated in the light-sensitive material to be processed.
In the present invention, the pH value of the bleaching solution or blix solution is in the range of 3.5 to 6Ø The rpplpn;shl~g amDunt of the solution for the subsequent rinse and/or stabilization step may be 3 to 50 times the amount of the solution carried over from the pre-bath.
In the present invention, with a compound represented by the general formula(xI)~ a rapid development process for 20 seconds to 5 minutes can provide a color print surprisingly excellent in color reproducibility without stain.
The compound represented by the general formula (XI)may be used as a supersensitizing dye for an M-type spectral sensitization process as described above.
The compound represented by the general formula (XI)is advantageous in that it destroyes and puts H, D or J aggregates into a monomolecular adsorption state to intensify the M-type spectral sensitization, particularly when X and Y are not the same.
Rl X NH ~ CH=CH ~ ( XI ) Y ~ N S03M M03S
wherein X and Y each represents =CH- or =N-; Rl, R2, R3 and R4 may be the same or different and each represents a hydroxy group, halogen atom, heterocyclic amino group, heterocyclic thio group, alkoxy group, amino group, alkylamino group, aryloxy group or arylamino group; and M represents a monovalent cation, with the proviso that X and Y don't represent =CH- at the same time;
Preferably, it is not the case that Rl and R3 are the same and R2 and R4 are the same at the same time, nor that Rl and R4 are the same and R2 and R3 are thesame at the same time.
Preferably, X and Y each represents = N - at the same time. A compound represented by the general formula (I) wherein three or more sulfonic acid groups are incorporated in one molecule may be preferably used.
The incorporation of a specific fluorescent brightening agent defined by the general formula (XI) and an organic phosphonic chelating agent in the present color developing ~r ' 1339192 solution enables a remarkable elimination of fluctuation in photographic properties due to continuous processing.
A particularly remarkable effect of inhibiting stain or eliminating fluctuation in photographic properties can be observed particularly by using the compound represented by formula (XI) other than the compound of formula (XI) wherein Rl and R3 are the same and R2 and R4 are the same at the same time, or Rl and R4 are the same and R2 and R3 are the same at the same time.
Such an effect becomes remarkable particularly when the light-sensitive material comprises particulate silver halide having a silver chloride content of 80 mo~ % or more. Furthermore, such an effect becomes remarkable particularly when the color developing solution to be used is substantially free of benzyl alcohol.
Moreover, when the process following the color development (e.g. desilvering, rinse and stabilization) is short, and the replenishing amount of the solution to be used in the rinse or stabilization step is remarkably small, such an effect becomes remarkable. In accordance with the present invention, the amount of water and time which has been conventionally required to reduce mixture or residual color on a light-sensitive material is not necessarily needed.
The general formula(XI) will be further described hereinafer.
Rl, R2, R3 and R4 each represents a hydroxy group, C1 4 alkoxy group such as methoxy group, ethoxy group, and methoxyethoxy group, amino group, Cl 6 alkylamino group such as methylamino group, ethylamino group, propylamino group, dimethylamino group, cyclohexylamino group, ~-hydroxyethylamino group, di(~-hydroxyethyl)amlno group, ~-sulfoethylamino group, N-(~-sulfoethyl)-N-methylamino group, and ~-carboxyethyl group, aryloxy group such as phenoxy group, and p-sulfophenyl group, or arylamino group such as anilino group, o-, m-, and p-sulfoanilino group, o-, m- and p-chloroanilino group, o-, m- and p-toluidino group, o-, m- and p-carboxyanilino group, o-, m- and p-anisidino group, and o-, m- and p-hydroxyanilino group.
M represents a monovalent cation such as Na and K .
Specific ~Y~ of o~ounds of for~ll~ (~) which can be used in t~Le present invention will be shown hereinafter, but the present invention should not be construed as being limited thereto.
XI-l O~N~N ~NI~CH=CH~NH~ N ~N~o N~,N SO3Na SO Na N~,N
NH NH
~SO3Na CH30~ N ~ NH4~CH--C~NH ~, N ~, OCH3 N(CH2CH20H)2 - . NHCH2C,H2SO3Na CH30 ~,N~, N~CH=CH~NH~I, N ~ OCH3 SO3Na SO3Na ~
NH NH
~SO3Na C2Hs NaO3S
1339l92 CH30l~ N~N~H=CH~NHy N ~OCH3 NHcH2cH2so3Na NHCH2CH20H
XI-S
~NH~ N~N~H=C~3 SO3Na N~ SO3Na SOqNa N~ N SO3Na NHCH2CHaSO3Na NHcH2cH3 SO Na '3 ~ N~I~H=CI~NH~N~I,NH~
SO3Na N~,N SO3Na SO3Na N~N SO3Na N(C2Hs ) 2 N(CH2CH20H) 2 Z Z
Z
~, o~ ~, Z
Z ~.
G à~ z ~
V2~U~ ~
C'~ ~
H 3 Z X ~
X
1339~92 ' ~~z ~' 8 c C,~_ / ~ ~) ~ N
olO
~ Z ~ Z~ Z
,~ ~ ,~,~ C) The synthesis of a diaminostylene brightening agent which can be used in the present invention represented by formula (XI) can be accomplished by any suitable conventional method as described in Raseihin Kogyokai, "Fluorescent Brightening Agent", August 1976, page 8.
The amount of such a fluorescent brightening agent to be added to a processing solution such as color developing solution, blix solution and stabilizing solution is preferably in the range of 0.1 to 20 g/~, particularly 0.5 to 10 g/~.
The present silver halide emulsion particularly to be used in a color printing light-sensitive material is preferably a silver bromochloride emulsion substantially free of silver iodide and comprising silver chloride, silver bromide or mixed crystal thereof surrounded mainly by (100) plane as described in Japanese Patent Application Nos. 39,825/87 and 319,741/87. The present silver halide emulsion is also preferably a silver bromochloride emulsion substantially free of silver iodide and comprising silver chloride, silver bromide or mixed crystal thereof surrounded mainly by (111) plane as described in Japanese Patent Application Nos. 47,225/87 and 150,320/87.
In the present invention, if the effect of the filter or filter layer i5 simultaneously used, silver bromide, silver bromochloride or silver chloride having various compositions can be used. In order to improve the color reproducibility according to the present invention, silver bromochloride having a silver bromide content of 30 mol% or less or silver bromochloride or silver chloride emulsion having a silver iodide content of 0.4 mol% or less and a silver bromide content of 10 mol% or less is preferably used.
In order to simultaneously provide rapidness in processing in a system according to the present technique, silver chloride having a silver bromide content of 3 mol%
or less, preferably 1 mol% or less or substantially free of silver bromide is preferably used.
The incorporation of such a small amount of silver bromide not only gives an improvement in the rapidness of development but also is advantageous in that when a light-sensitive material containing such an amount of silver iodide is continuously processed with a processing solution, bromide ions in a balanced accumulated amount determined by the relationship with the replenishing amount of the processing solution exists in the developing solution in a low concentration, making it possible to set 13391~
the developing speed of the developing solution high itself.
The halogen composition of the silver halide emulsion to be used in the present invention influences color leaving by dyes and desilvering during the color development. In particular, a high silver iodide content gives a disadvantageous effect.
The present silver halide emulsion contains silver iodide in a appropriate amount of 2 mol% or less, preferably 1 mol% or less, more preferably 0.4 mol%~ most preferably none, based on the total amount of silver halide. The incorporation of silver iodide has many advantageous effects in light-sensitivity. In particular, silver iodide increases light absorption or spectral sensitizing dyes or inhibits desensitization due to a spectral sensitizing dye. However, if a system according to the present technique is subjected to a rapid development in a short period of time, a slow development speed causes a slow speed in development of the entire silver halide particles. This also gives a great disadvantages in the improvement of average color mixing degree in the present invention. The incorporation of silver iodide in an amount of 0.4 mol% or less may give an advantage in adsorption of spectral sensitizing dyes.
However, it is preferred in the present invention to use a silver halide emulsion essentially free of silver iodide.
In a system according to the present technique, if a rapid development is required, silver chloride having a silver bromide content of 3 mol% or less, preferably 1 mol% or less or substantially free of silver bromide may be preferably used.
In order to obtain a light-sensitive material which is insusceptible to fog and exhibits a stable gradation in accordance with the present technique, it is desired to use an emulsion having a higher silver bromide content, e.g., 50 mol% or more. If the silver bromide content exceeds 95 mol%~ the rapidness in development is slightly lowered. However, if a development accelerator such as 3-pyrazolidone, thioether and hydrazine is used with the emulsion, the rapidness in development can be recovered, making it possible to provide a high sensitivity light-sensitive material stable in preservability and proccessability.
-Particulate silver halide to be contained in the present photographic emulsion may have a regular crystal structure such as cube, octahedron, and tetradecahedron, an irregular crystal structure such as sphere, and plate, a crystal structure having crystal defect such as twinning plane, or a composite thereof.
133gl~2 The preparation of a silver halide photographic emulsion which can be used in the present invention can be accomplished by any suitable method as described in Research Disclosure No. 17,643 (Dec. 1978, pp. 22-23, "I.
Emulsion Preparation and Types"), Research Disclosure No.
18,716 (Nov. 1979, page 648), P. Glafkides, "Chemicet Phisque Photographique", Paul Montel, 1967, G. F.
Duffin, "Photographic Emulsion Chemistry", Focal Press, 1966, and V. L. Zelikman et al, "Making and Coating Photographic Emulsion", Focal Press, 1964.
Tabular particles having an aspect ratio of from about 2 or more, preferably about to about 10, more preferably about 5 to about 10 may be used in the present invention. Such tabular particles can be easily prepared by any suitable method as described in Gutoff, "Photographic Science and Engineering", as described in Gutoff, "Photographic Science and Engineering", Vol. 14, pp. 248-257, 1970, U.S. Patent Nos.
4,434,226, 4,414,310, 4,433,048, and 4,439,520, and British Patent No. 2,112,157.
The crystal structure of the present particulate silver halide may be uniform, or such that the halide composition varies between the inner portion and the outer portion thereof, or may be a layer. Alternatively, silver halides having different compositions may be connected to each other by an epitaxial junction or by any suitable compound other than silver halide such as silver thiocyanate, and zinc oxide.
Alternatively, a mixture of particles having various crystal structures may be used in the present invention.
The developability of particulate silver halide is determined not only ~y the halogen composition of the entire particles but also by the halogen distribution in the particles. Accordingly, the silver halide emulsion of the present invention preferably has some distribution or structure concerning the halogen composition in the particles thereof. A typical example of such a structure is a core/shell type or double structure type particle in which the internal portion thereof differs from the surface thereof in halogen composition. In such a particle, the shape of the core may or may not be the same as that of the entire particle with the shell. In particular, both the core and the entire particle with the shell may be cubic, or the core may be octahedron while the entire particle with the shell may be cubic.
Alternatively, the core may be in the form of a completely regular crystal while the entire particle with the shell may be slightly irregular. Furthermore, the particulate silver halide may not be merely double-structured but may be triple-structured or may have a higher multistructure.
Moreover, the surface of a core/shell double-structured particle may be provided with aq thin film of silver halide having a different halogen composition.
Preferable silver halide particles have mal-distributed phases comprising layer structure or discontinuous isolated structure containing a different halide distribution on a surface or internal part of particles from in other phases. Preferably silver chlorobromide particles having maldistributed phases have a cubic structure having (100) plane or tetradecahedron, and also have a structure of octahedron having (111) plane or tabular particles, especially having about 2 to 10 of aspect ratio.
An emulsion containing particulate silver halide which has been adjusted for proper development starting point as described in Japanese Patent Application Nos.
319,741/87, 323,214/87 and 150,320/87 may be particularly preferably used in the present invention. CR-compound as described in the above cited specification may be preferably sensitizing dyes.
The average size of particles to be used in the present silver halide emulsion is preferably in the range of 0.1 to 2 ~m, particularly 0.15 to 1.4 ~m as calculated in terms of diameter of sphere having the same volume.
The particle size distribution of the present particulate silver halide is preferably narrow. A
monodisperse emulsion is preferably used in the present invention. In particular, a monodisperse emulsion of particles having a regular crystal shape may be preferably used in the present invention. An emulsion of silver halide particles, preferably 90% or more, more preferably 9s% or more by weight or number of particles of which fall within i20% of the average particle size may be preferably used in the present invention. Monodisperse emulsion is preferred as is disclosed in U.S. Patents 3,574,628 and 3,655,394, and Great Britain Patent 1,413,748, etc. In the case of such a monodisperse emulsion, an emulsion comprising particulate silver halide having any suitable construction as described above may be preferably used i~ the present invention. Two or more different kinds of monodisperse emulsions of cubic or tetradecahedron particulate silver halide may be used in admixture or by coating in multilayer to provide an excellent result. If two or more kinds of monodisperse emulsions are used in admixture, the mixing ratio as calculated in terms of amount of silver is preferably 5 to 95%. The ratio of average particle size of emulsion _ 9s _ particles to be mixed is 1:1.1 to 1:8, preferably 1:1.2 to 1:6 as calculated in terms of volume. When two kinds of monodisperse emulsions are used in admixture, the mixing ratio as calculated in terms of amount of silver is preferably in the range of 0.05:0.95 to 0.95:0.05, particularly 0.1:0.9 to 0.9:0.1.
The preparation of a silver bromochloride emulsion to be used in the present invention can be accomplished by any one of acidic process, neutral process, and ammonia process. Particularly preferred among these processes is acidic process. The process for the reaction of the soluble silver salt with the soluble silver halide can be accomplished by separate mixing process, simultaneous mixing process, or combination thereof. In order to obtain monodisperse particles of the present invention, simultaneous mixing process may be preferably used. The process for the reaction of the soluble silver salt with the soluble silver halide can be also accomplished by a process in which particles are formed in excess silver ions (so-called reversal mixing process). One form of the simultaneous mixing process is a so-called controlled double jet process in which the pAg of the liquid phase in which silver halide is formed is kept constant. This process can provide a silver halide emulsion suitable for the present invention having a regular crystal structure and a narrow particle size distribution. Such particles which can be preferably used in the present invention may be preferably prepared on the basis of the simultaneous mixing process.
In the process of formation or physical ripening of particulate silver halide, cadmium salt, zinc salt, lead salt, thallium salt, iridium salt, or complex salt thereof, rhodium salt or complex thereof, or iron salt or complex salt thereof may be present.
In particular, iridium salt or complex salt thereof may be used in an amount of 10-9 to 10-4 mol/mol, preferably 10-8 to 10-5 mol/mol. As compared to an emulsion which has been prepared without using an iridium salt or complex salt thereof, such a consideration is useful particularly when a rapid developability or stability is desired for a light-sensitive material which has been subjected to high intensity or low intensity exposure out of the proper exposure intensity range.
If physical ripening is effected in the presence of any known silver halide solvent such as ammonia, potassium thiocyanate, and thioether or thione as described in U.S. Patent No. 3,271,157, and Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 12,360/76, 82,408/78, 144/319/78, 100,717/79, a monodisperse emulsion of particulate silver halide having a regular crystal structure and a narrow particle size distribution can be advantageously obtained.
13391~2 The removal of the soluble silver salts from the emulsion which has been subjected to physical ripening can be accomplished by any suitable method such as noodle rinsing process, flocculation sedimentation process, and ultrafiltration process.
The silver halide emulsion to be used in the present invention can be subjected to chemical sensitization such as selenium sensitization, reduction sensitization, noble metal sensitization, or combination thereof. In particular, sulfur sensitization process using active gelatin or sulfur-containing compound capable of reacting with silver ion such as thiosulfate, thiourea compound, mercapto compound, and rhodanine compound, reduction sensitization process using a reducing substance such as stannous salt, amine salt, hydrazine derivative, formamidinesulfinic acid, and silane compound, and noble metal sensitization process using a metal compound such as gold complex, and complex salt of the group VIII metals such as Pt, Ir, Pd, Rh, and Fe can be used singly or in combination. The present monodisperse silver bromochloride emulsion may be preferably subjected to sulfur sensitization or selenium sensitization. Such a senisitization process may be preferably effected in the presence of a hydroxylazaindene compound.
Preferred examples of a silver halide emulsion to be incorporated in the direct positive color printing light-sensitive material include an emulsion of internal latent type silver halide particles having the above described halogen composition _ 99 _ and a multilayer construction as described in Japanese Patent Application No. 25,737/87.
Preferred examples of a silver halide emulsion to be incorporated in the color reversal printing light-sensitive material include those described in European Patent No.
0217353A-2, and Japanese Patent Application (OPI)-Nos. 39,043/86, and 61,156/86.
The blue-sensitive layer in the color printing light-sensitive material may preferably comprise a sensitizing dye such that it is not strongly sensitized to a long wavelength up to about 485 nm and is given a high spectral sensitivity in a shorter wavelength band less than about 485 nm, more prPf~lhy less than about 460 nm, dependLng on the spectral absorption characterisitcs of dyes to be used in the color print original. In particular, the silver halide may be preferably subjected to a spectral sensitization such that the inherent sensitivity thereof is limited in a short wavelength band and it is strongly sensitized on the long wavelength side, e.g., 450 to 470 nm while its sensitization is cut in a longer wavelength band, e.g., 485 nm or more.
133919~
In the coupler to be used in the present invention, the spectral absorption by a dye obtained by the coupling reaction of the respective yellow, magenta and cyan coupler in a color light-sensitive material for use in photographing with a color developing agent may preferably correspond to the spectral absorption by the corresponding blue-sensitive layer, green-sensitive layer or red-sensitive layer in a color printing light-sensitive material, and there is substantially no spectral absorption in the range of wavelength of spectral sensitivity of light-sensitive layers other than the corresponding light-sensitive layer. Furthermore, the spectral absorption by a dye obtained in a color light-sensitive material for use in photographing is preferably out of the range of AEmaX i20 nm, ~Emaxbeing the maximum spectral light amount of light-sensitive layers other than the corresponding light-sensitive layer of a color printing light-sensitive, preferably out of the range of ~EmaX i30 nm. For example, when the spectral absorption of a magenta dye image obtained in a color negative film is out of the main spectral sensitivity wavelength range of light-sensitive layers other than the corresponding green-sensitive layer in a color paper, i.e., about 400 to 485 nm for blue-sensitive layer or 600 to 740 nm for red-sensitive layer, the present invention gives an 133~192 unprecedentely remarkable improvement in color reproducibility.
This is because that the disadvantageous effects by the spectral absorption by a dye in a cut wavelength range given by the present band cut filter is substantially completely eliminated.
Preferably, the spectral absorption by a yellow, magenta or cyan dye obtained from a coupler to be used in a color printing light-sensitive material is only seen in the wavelength range of spectral absorption by a blue-sensitive layer, green-sensitive layer or red-sensitive layer in a color light-sensitive material for use in photographing. Couplers which may be generally used in the present invention are described in patents cited in Research Disclosure No. 17,643, VII-C to G.
As suitable yellow couplers there can be used those described in U.S. Patent Nos. 3,933,501, 4,022,620, 4,326,024, and 4,401,752, Japanese Patent Publication No. 10,739/83, and British Patent Nos. 1,425,020, and 1,476,760.
As suitable magenta couplers there may be used 5-pyrazolone and pyrazoloazole compounds. Particularly preferred examples of such magenta couplers are described in U.S. Patent Nos.
4,310,619, 4,351,897, 3,061,432, 3,725,067, 4,500,630, and 4,540,654, European Patent No. 73,636, Research Disclosure Nos.
24,220 (June 1984) and 24,230 (June 1984), and Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 33,552/85, and 43,659/85.
As suitable cyan couplers there may be used phenolic and naphtholic couplers. Preferred examples of such coupl-ers are 1~39192 described in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,052,212, 4,146,396, 4,228,233, 4,296,200, 2,369,929, 2,801,171, 2,772,162, 2,89;,826, 3,772,002, 3,758,308, 4,334,011, 4,327,173, 3,446,622, 4,333,999, 4,451,559, and 4,427,767, West German Patent Disclosure No. 3,329,729, and European Patent Nos. 121,36SA, and 161,626A.
As colored couplers for correcting undesired absorption by color forming dye there may be used those described in Research Disclosure No. 17,643 (VII-G), U.S. Patent Nos. 4,163,670, 4,004,929, and 4,138,258, Japanese Patent Publication No.
39,413/82, and British Patent No. 1,146,368.
As suitable couplers which form a colored dye having a proper ~if~;h;l;ty there may be used those described in U.S.
Patent No. 4,366,237, British Patent No. 2,125,570, European Patent No. 96,570, and West German Patent (Disclosure) No.
3,234,533.
Typical examples of polymerized dye-forming coupler couplers are described in U.S. Patent Nos. 3,451,820, 4,080,211, and 4,367,282, and British Patent No. 2,102,173.
Couplers which release a photographically useful residual group upon coupling can be preferably used in the present invention. As DIR couplers which release a development inhibitor there can be preferably used those described in patents cited in Research Disclosure No. 17,643 (VII-F), Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 151,944/82, 154,234/82, and 184,248/85, and U.S. Patent No. 4,248,962.
As couplers which image~ise release a nucleating agent or development accelerator upon development there can be used those described in British Patent Nos. 2,097,140, and 2,131,188, and Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 157,638/84, and 170,840/
84.
Other examples of couplers which can be incorporated in the present light-sensitive material include competitive couplers as described in U.S. Patent No. 4,130,427, poly-equivalent couplers as described in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,283,472, 4,338,393, and 4-,310,618, DIR redox~compound-releasing couplers as described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 185,950/85, and couplers which release a dye which recovers its original color after being separated as described in European Patent No. 173,302A.
Useful examples of couplers which can be used in a color printing light-sensitive material which accomplishes the effects of the present invention include magenta couplers as described in European Patent 226,849 A, cyan couplers as described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 105,229/83, and color couplers as described in Japanese Patent Application No. 39,825/87. Particularly preferred examples of such couplers inlcude color couplers represented by the general formulas (VII-a), (VII-b), (VIII), (IX) and (X).
O H
R 7 2 ~J~ ~ N H C O R ~ , ~ q (VII-a) R~s/~
-- 104 ~
O H
R7~ 1 N H C O R7~
~ (VII-b) R 7 s C O N H
wherein R7l, R74, and R75 each represents an aliphatic group (the term "aliphatic group" as used herein means a straight-chain, branched or cyclic alkylj alkenyl or alkynyl group), aromatic group, heterocyclic group, aliphatic amino group, aromatic amino group or hetero-cyclic amino group; R73 represents an aliphatic group; R72 and R76 each represents a hydrogen atom, halogen atom, aliphatic group, aliphatic oxy group, or acylamino group;
and Yl and Y2 each represents a hydrogen atom or group which can be separated after coupling reaction with an oxidation product of a color developing agent (hereinafter including an atom, such as a halogen atom), with the proviso that R72 and R73 or R75 and R76 may be connected to each other to form S-, 6- or 7-membered condensated carbostyryl or oxyindole ring, R72 and R73 may be condensated to form a substituted naphthol ring, and R7l, R72, R73 or Yl, or R74, R75, R76 or Y2 may together form a dimer or higher polymer.
R ~, X
N ~ (VIII) N ~7 a Z c--~ b In general formula (VIII), R81 represents a hydrogen atom or substituent. Preferred examples of such a substituent include alkyl group such as methyl group, ethyl group, and butyl group; branched alkyl group such as isopropyl group, isobutyl group, and tertiary butyl group;
substituted alkyl group (including branched groups);
alkoxy group such as methoxy group, ethoxy group, and butoxy group; substituted alkoxy group such as ethoxy-ethoxy group, and phenoxyethoxy group, o-methoxyphenoxy-ethoxy group, o-butoxyphenoxyethoxy group, o-chloro-phenoxyethoxy group; aryloxy group such as phenoxy group, o-methoxyphenoxy group, o-butoxyphenoxy group, o-chlorophenoxy group; and ureide group. Particularly preferred among these groups are branched alkyl group and substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group. X represents a hydrogen atom or group which can be separated upon a coupling reaction with an oxidation product of an aromatic primary amine color developing agent. Examples of such a group include halogen atom such as chlorine atom and bromine atom, arylthio group such as 2-butoxy-5-t-octylphenylthio group, and 2-propoxy-5-t-hexyphenylthio group, nitrogen-containing heterocyclic group such as imidazole group, and 4-chloroimidazole group, and aryloxy group such as p-methylphenoxy group, 2,4-dimethylphenoxy group, and 2,4-dimethyl-t-phenoxy group. Particularly 133gl92 preferred among these groups are halogen atom and arylthio group. Za, Zb and Zc each represents a methine, substituted methine, or =N-NH-. One of Za-Zb bond and Zb-Zc bond is a double bond, and the other is a single bond.
If Za-Zb is a carbon-carbon double bond, it may be a part of an aromatic ring. Furthermore, R81 or X may form a dimer or higher polymer. If Za, Zb or Za is a substituted methine, the substituted methine may form a dimer or higher polymer. When Za, Zb or Zc represents a substituted methine, the substituent is preferably a substituted alkyl group, particularly a branched substituted alkyl group such as substituted isopropyl group, and substituted tertiary butyl group. As a substituent for a substituted methine group, an aryl group such as a halogen substituted phenyl group is also preferable.
RglNH Y3 - ~ (IX) N ORg2 wherein Y3 represents a hydrogen atom or coupling-off group; Rgl and Rg3 each represents a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl group; and Rg2 represents a hydrogen atom, aliphatic group or aromatic acyl or sulfonyl group.
Preferable Y3 iS a hydrogen atom or a coupling-off group containing sulfur atom as a coupling-off atom. Preferable Rgl group is a substituted phenyl group and preferable R93 group is a trichlorophenyl group.
CH3--C- COCHQ ( X ) wherein Q represents a substituted or unsubstituted N-phenylcarbamoyl group; and Y4 represents a halogen atom or the other group capable of released upon a coupling reaction with an oxidation product of a developing agent (preferable coupling-off atom contained in the coupling-off group is a nitrogen atom).
The couplers to be used in the present invention may be incorporated in a light-sensitive material by various known dispersion processes.
Examples of high boiling solvents to be used in an oil-in-water dispersion process are described in U.S.
Patent 2,322,027.
l339l92 Specific examples of procedure and effects of latex dispersion process and latex to be used in impregnation are described in U.S. Patent No. 4,199,363, and West German Patent Application (OLS) Nos. 2,541,274, and 2,541,230.
Specific examples of main couplers for the formation of dye which can be incorporated in a color light-sensitive material for use in photographing or color printing light-sensitive material will be shown hereinafter.
V~- ( 1 ) C ~ ~N H C O C H O~C 5 H "(t) C H s~iJJ C , (t) C
V~- (2) (t) C 5 H "~O--C H C N H
'C~ O
133~192 F F
(t) C, H " ~ O C H C O "~ H ~ ~F
C H\
V~-- ( 4 ) C2Hs - C ~ ~N H C O C H O~ C s H " (,',) C2H5 C5H"(t) C o V~- (5) O H
CQ ~NHCOCliK 31 C
V~- (6) OH A
[~C O N H~
(n~ H 9 C . O C O N H C H 2 C H z--S--C H ~ C O O H
O C ,2H ~5 V~- t7) ~ C H C O ~
O H NHso2cl6H33(n) N
~- (8) ~iH C O ~C Q
N N H S 0 2~3--~C12H25(n) H CQ
V~- (9) C5Hll(t) C ~ ~,N H C O--C H z O ~--CsHII(t) ..
~- 1339192 V~- (10) <N ~ 'IHCOC~0 ~CsHII(t) C5Hll(t) V~- t l ) CH3 C~
'N ~ N H
H O ~Soz~o--1HCO~H~(C H 2) 3/~
- (2) CH3- ~CQ
N
N NH
n)C6Hl3 ~ ~N
C H C H 2 S 0 2 ( C H z) z (n)CsHl7 /
: ~.
C H
~.H C
- (~/H 3 N
~' (t) C 8~H 17 ~N H
~S 02(CH2)3 O C~Hq(n) vm-- ( 4 ) CH3 ~CQ
~N ~ H OCH3CH20C2H5 CH3 NHS~02~/
vm- (S) ~
O C H 3 O~H ~(~ C8~, 7(t) ~ ~0- ~S~
=I~C H C H 2NHS02~
CH3 C8H,7(t) 1~391~2 vm-- (6) O C ~ H 1~(~
N ~ I ~/
(CH2) 2NHSO2~ O.CIIX l 7-~
NHSO
C81~1 7.~
lX- t l )C o ~N ~
t~C~sHz7CO~ ~N/~O
CQ~,~C ~
C Q
~ 1339192 ~- (2) C Q
' P~NH-C ~8H3s~N 'N/~O
Lo c~cQ
~ -.
~- (3) C Q
~N H
ClzH25 H 0~0--C H C Q N~ 'N/~O
C,H9(t) C Q ~,C Q
C Q
~- (4) C~ OC2 Hy(r~
~ N H - ~S ~<
C,3H27CONH ~N O C8HI7(t) C ~ ~ C Q
~ -.
E~-- ( 5 ) c.e O~CH2)2--OC~3 ~ ~H- S
CzH5 ~ I I ~ \===~
~(t~C5H~ ~ 0-CHCONH N'NI ~ ~~ C8H,7~t) C5H,l(t) C Q ~C O
133~192 X- (1) ~ C~.
(C~ C ~ COCHCONH~ C 2 H 5 O=~ 0 N H C O C H O ~ C sH I I(t) O CHs CHs CsH lltt~
X- ~2) (C8 3) 3C ~ COCHCONH ~
\=C C z H s C NHCOCHO ~--CsHI~(t) CzHsO CH2 ~ C 5 H"(t) -- 118 ~
133~192 X - ( 3 ) C Q
(CH,)3C COCHCONH ~ C SH..(t) i NHCO(CH2)30 ~ C 5 H ll(t) S~ 2~ - OCH 2 X - ( 4 ) C Q
(CH3)3C-COCHCONH ~ C 5 H "(t) o ~ ~ o NHCO(CH 2) SO ~ C S H "(t) CH2 ~
13391!~2 - ( 5 ) - (CH3)3C ~COCHCONH ~ C 4 H 4~
0~ \~0 C O O C H C O O C 12 H z 5 ~ CH2 X - ( 6 ) C~
(CH3)3C ~COCHCONH ~ .
NHCO ~CH2)30 ~ C 5 H " (t) 3 ~
CsH,I(t?
X- (7) CQ
( C H 3) 3 C ~ C O C H C O N H ~
NH S ~2--C~H33(rl) 2 ~ O H
X - t 8 ) - C ~
(CH3)~C- C0CHC0NH
.- I ., ~<
C Q NHC0(CHz)30 ~ C 5 H "(t) C 5 Hll(t) S0z ~ O H
C o X-- (9 ) (C H 3)3 C ~ C O C H C O N H ~
N H S ~2 - C 12H2s C O O C H
C H
Examples of known photographic additives which may be used in the present invention are described in Research Disclosure Nos. 17,643 and 18,716.
The places where such a description is found are summarized in the table below.
Additives RD 17643 RD 18716 1. Chemical sensitizer Page23 Right column on page 648 2. Sensitivity improver "
3. Spectral sensitizer, pp. 23-24 Right column on supersensitizer page 648 - right column on page 649 4. Brightening agent Page24 5. Fog inhibitor, pp. 24-25 Right column on stabilizer page 649 6. Light absorber, filter pp. 25-26 Right column on dye, ultraviolet page 649 - left absorber column on page 7. Stain inhibitor Right column on Left column to page 25 right column on page 650 8. Dye stabilizer Page25 9. Film hardener Page26 Left column on page 651 10. Binder Page 26 "
~r ~ 133~19~
11. Plasticizer, lubricant Page 27 Right column on page 650 12. Coating aid, surface pp. 26 - 27 "
active agent 13. Antistatic agent Page 27 "
Examples of suitable supports which can be used in the present invention are described on page 28 of Research Disclosure No. 17,643 and from the right column on page 647 to the left column on page 648 in Research Disclosure No. 18,716.
The printed color printing light-sensitive material according to the present invention may be preferably subjected to color development, blix, rinse and/or stabilization. Typical examples of processing steps will be described hereinafter, but the present invention should not be construed as being limited thereto. The term "blix" as used herein means a so-called blix in which bleaching and fixing are simultaneously proceeded or a process in which bleaching and fixing are separately .proceeded 1. Color development - blix -¦rinse¦
2. Color development - blix -¦rinse¦-stabilization 3. Color development - bleaching - blix -¦rinse¦-4. Color development - bleaching - blix -Irinsel-Stabilization 5. Color development - rinse - blix -¦rinse¦-6. Color development - fixing - blix -Irinse¦-stabilization 7. Black-and-white development -rinse - color development - blix -¦rinse¦
8. Black-and-white development rinse - color development - rinse - blix -¦rinse¦
The above describedIrinsel step may be replaced by the stabilizing step. The supply amount of the processing solution is 3 to 50 times the amount of the processing solution carried over from the pre-bath.
In recent years, as the time for processing of a color printing light-sensitive material has been shortened, and the time for continuous processing has been prolonged, the color printing light-sensitive material according to the present invention may be susceptible to dye leaving, poor desilvering, and stain.
The color developing solution to be used in the present invention may comprise any suitable known aromatic primary amine color developing agent. A preferred example of such an aromatic primary amine color developing agent is a p-phenylenediamine derivative. Typical examples of such a p-phenylenediamine derivative will be shown hereinafter, but the present invention should not be construed as being limited thereto.
D-l: N,N-diethyl-p-phenylenediamine D-2: 2-Amino-5-diethylaminotoluene D-3: 2-Amino-5-(N-ethyl-N-laurylamino)toluene D-4: 4-[N-ethyl-N-(B-hydroxyethyl)amino]aniline D-5: 2-Methyl-4-[N-ethyl-N-[B-hydroxy-ethyl)amino]aniline D-6: 4-Amino-3-methyl-N-ethyl-N-[B-(methanesul--fonamide)ethyl]aniline D-7: N-(2-amino-5-diethylaminophenylethyl)meth-anesulfonamide D-8: N,N-dimethyl-p-phenylenediamine D-9: 4-Amino-3-methyl-N-ethyl-N-methoxyethyl-aniline D-10: 4-Amino-3-methyl-N-ethyl-N-B-ethoxyethyl-aniline D-ll: 4-Amino-3-methyl-N-ethyl-N-B-butoxyethyl-aniline Particularly preferred amon~ these p-phenylenedi-amine derivatives is 4-amino-3-methyl-N-ethyl-N-[B-(methanesulfonamide)ethyl]-aniline (exemplary compound D-6).
These p-phenylenediamine derivatives may be salts such as sulfates, hydrochloride, sulfites, and p-toluenesulfonates. The amount of such an aromatic primary amine developing agent to be used is preferably in the range of about 0.1 to about 20 g, particularly about 0.5 to about 10 g per 1 e of developing solution.
The present color developing solution may optionally comprise any suitable development accelerator.
However, the present color developing solution preferably doesn't contain benzyl alcohol in the light of pollution, facility in solution preparation, and fog inhibition. In particular, the present color developing solution may contain benzyl alcohol in an amount of S ml or less, preferably 2 ml or less per 1 e thereof. Preferably, the present color developing solution is free of benzyl alcohol.
The present color developing solution may optionally comprise any other preservatives such as sulfite, e.g., sodium sulfite, potassium sulfite, sodium bisulfite, potassium bisulfite, sodium metabisulfite, and potassium methasulfite, and carbonyl-sulfite addition product. The added amount of such a preservative is in the range of 0 to 20 g/e, preferably 0 to 5 s/e. If the preservability of the color developing solution thus prepared can be fully attained, the added amount of such a preservative is preferably less.
~ 1339192 If the color developing solution contains a small amount of sulfite ion, the color developing capability thereof can be improved without increasing the used amount of silver halide or color couplers. On the other hand, it is known that the reduction in the sulfite ion content increases color stain and deteriorates color reproducibility. However, the present color image formation process using compounds represented by formula (XI) enables a processing which causes less color stain and provides an excellent color developing capability.
Sulfite ion may serve as a solvent for a silver halide emulsion having a high chlorine content (high silver chloride content emulsion), causing a remarkable reduction in the concentration of sulfite ion. If the sulfite ion concentration in the color developing solution varies due to the above described effect, the photographic properties, particularly printer conditions in the case of a printing light-sensitive materiàl, show a continuous change.
In the present invention, the substantial absence of sulfite ion may be preferably compensated by the incorporation of an organic preservative as described hereinafter.
In other words, the incorporation of such an organic preservative can stabilize the color developing '~ 1339192 solution and improve color mixture inhibition without deteriorating the color developing capability.
An organic preservative can be used in the present invention is an organic compound which reduces the speed of deterioration of an aromatic primary amine color developing agent when incorporated in a solution for the processing of a color photographic light-sensitive material. In other words, such an organic compound serves to inhibit oxidation of a color developing agent by air.
Particularly useful examples of such an organic preservative include hydroxylamines, hydroxams, hydrazines, hydrazides, phenols, ~-hydroxyketones, ~-aminoketones, saccharides, monoamines, diamines, polyamines, quaternary ammonium salts, nitroxy radicals, alcohols, oximes, diamide compounds, and condensed ring amines.
As compounds for directly preserving the above described color developing agent there may be preferably used various hydroxylamines, hydroxamic acids as described in Japanese Patent Application No. 186,559/86, hydrazines and hydrazides as described in Japanese Patent Application No. 186,559/86, hydrazines and hydrazides as described in Japanese Patent Application No. 170,756/86, phenols as described in Japanese Patent Application Nos. 188,742/86, and 203,253/86, ~-hydroxyketones and ~-aminoketones as described in Japanese Patent Application No. 188,741/86, and various saccharides as described in Japanese Patent Application No. 180,616/86. Examples of Compounds which can be used in combination with these compounds include monoamines as described in Japanese Patent Application Nos. 147,823/86, 166,674/86, 165,621/86, 164,515/86, 170,789/86, and 168,159/86, diamines as described in Japanese Patent Application Nos. 173,595/86, 164,515/86, and 186,560/86, polyamines as described in Japanese Patent Application Nos. 165,621/86, 169,789/86, and 188,619/86, nitroxy radicals as described in Japanese Patent Application No. 197,760/86, alcohols as described in Japanese Patent Application Nos. 186,561/86, and 197,419/86, oxims as described in Japanese Patent Application No. 198,987/86, and tertiary amines as described in Japanese Patent Application No. 265,149/86.
The present color developing solution may also contain an agent for restoring or capturing oxidation product of color developing agent as described in Japanese Patent Application No. 259,799/86. Other examples of preservatives which may be optionally incorporated in the present color developing solution include various metals as described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos.
44,148/82, and 53,749/82, salicylic acids as described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 180,588/84, - 133919~
alkanolamines as described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI No. 3,532/79 and Japanese Patent Publication 57,586/85, polyethyleneimines as described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 94,349/81, and aromatic polyhydroxy compounds as described in U.S. Patent No.
3,746,544. Particularly preferred among these compounds are aromatic polyhydroxy compounds.
The color developing solution to be used in the present invention preferably has a pH value of 9 to 12, particularly 9 to 11Ø The present color developing solution may contain compounds which constitute known developing solutions.
In order to maintain the above specified pH value, various buffering agents may be preferably used. As such buffering agents there may be used carbonates, phosphates, borates, tetraborates, hydroxybenzoates, glycine salts, N,N-dimethylglycine salts, leucine salts, norleucine salts, guanine salts, 3,4-dihydroxyphenyl-alanine salts, alanine salts, aminobutyrates, 2-amino-2-methyl-1,3-propanediolates, valine salts, proline salts, trishydroxyaminomethane salts, or lysine salts. Partic-ularly, carbonates, phosphates, tetraborates, and hydroxybenzoates are excellent in solubility and buffering action at a high pH range of 9.0 or more. When these salts are added to a color developing solution, they don't 13391g2 exert any bad inf luence upon photographic properties, e . g ., fog inhibition. These salts are inexpensive . In the light of such advantages, these salts may be particularly preferably used.
The amount of such a buffering agent to be incorporated in the color developing solution is preferably in the range of 0.1 mol/ or more, particularly 0 .1 to 0 . 4 mol/
In the present invention, an organic phosphoric compound as described in Japanese Patent Application No.
37, 350/87 may be preferably used . The added amount of such an organic phosphonic compound is in the range of 0.1 to 40 g, preferably 0 . 2 to 10 g per 1 of color developing solution .
The present color developing solution may also contain various chelating agents other than organic phosphonic chelating agents.
Specif ic examples of chelating agents which can be used in combination with other additives include nitrilotriacetic acid, diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid, ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid, trancyclohexanediaminetetra-acetic acid, 1,2-diaminopropanetetraacetic acid, 1, 2-diaminopropanetetraacetic acid, glycoletherdiaminetetra-acetic acid, ethylenediamineorthohydroxyphenylacetic acid, and N,N'-bis(2-hydroxybenzyl)ethylenediamine-N,N'-diacetic acid. However, the present invention should not be construed as being limited to these chelating agents.
These chelating agents may optionally be used in combination.
The present color developing solution may optionally comprise any suitable development accelerator.
However, the present color developing solution may preferably be substantially free of benzyl alcohol in the light of pollution, facility in solution preparation, fog inhibition, and stain inhibition.
Other examples of development accelerators which can be optionally incorporated in the present color developing solution include thioether compounds as de-scribed in Japanese Patent Publication Nos. 16,088/62, 5,987/72, 7,826/63, 12,380/69, and 9,019/70, p-phenylene-diamine compounds as described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 49,829/77, and 15,554/75, quater-nary ammonium salts as described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 49,829/77, and 15,554/75, quater-nary ammonium salts as described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 137,726/75, 156,826/81, and 43,429/77, and Japanese Patent Publication No. 30,074/69, amine compounds as described in U.S. Patent Nos.
2,494,903, 3,128,182, 4,230,796, 3,253,919, 2,482,546, 2,596,926, and 3,582,346, and Japanese Patent Publication No. 11,431/66, polyalkylene oxides as described in Japanese Patent Publication Nos. 16,088/62, 25,201/67, 11,431/66, and 23,883/67, and U.S. Patent 3,128,183, and 3,532,501, 1-phenyl-3-pyrazolidones, and imidazoles.
In the present invention, any suitable fog inhibitor may be optionally used. As such a fog inhibitor there may be used a halide of an alkaline metal such as sodium chloride, potassium bromide, and potassium iodide, or an organic fog inhibitor. Typical examples of such an organic fog inhibitor include nitrogen-containing hetero-cyclic compounds such as benzotriazole, 6-nitrobenz-imidazole, 5-nitroisoindazole, 5-methylbenzotriazole, 5-nitrobenzotriazole, 5-chloro-benzotriazole, 2-thiazolyl-benzimidazole, 2-thiazolylmethyl-benzimidazole, indazole, hydroxyazaindolidine, and adenine.
The present color developing solution may optionally contain various active agents such as alkyl-sulfonic acid, arylphosphonic acid, aliphatic carboxylic acid, and aromatic carboxylic acid.
The temperature at which the present color developing solution is used is in the range of 20 to 50~C, preferably 30 to 40~C. The processinhg time is in the range of 20 seconds to 5 minutes, preferably 30 seconds to 2 minutes. The replenishing amount of the present color developing solution i5 preferably less and is in the range of 20 to 600 ml, preferably 50 to 300 ml, particularly 100 to 200 ml per 1 m2 of light-sensitive material. The shorter the development time is, the more remarkable is the effect of the present invention.
When the reversal processing is effected, the color development is normally conducted after a black-and-white development. The black-and-white developing solution may comprise known black-and-white developing agents such as dihydroxybenzene, e.g., hydroquinone, 3-pyrazolidone, e.g., l-phenyl-3-pyrazolidone, and aminophenol, e.g., N-methyl-p-aminophenol, singly or in combination.
These color developing solution and black-and-white developing solution normally have a pH value of 9 to 12. The replenishing amount of these developing solutions depends on the type of the color photographic light-sensitive material to be processed but is normally in the range of 3 e per 1 m2 of the light-sensitive material. If the replenishing liquid of the developing solution has a reduced concentration of bromide ion, the replenishing amount thereof can be 500 ml or less. If the replenishing amount of the developing solution is reduced, the area of the processing tank in contact with air is preferably reduced to prevent the solution from being evaporated or ; 1339192 oxidized by air. A means of restricting the accumulation of bromide ion in the developing solution may be used to reduce the supply amount of the developing solution.
The photographic emulsion layer which has been subjected to color development is normally then subjected to bleaching. The bleaching solution, blix solution and fixing solution to be used in the present invention will be further described hereinafter.
It is normally said that a bleaching solution or blix solution is unstable at a pH of 6 to 8. In the present invention, it has been found that the bleaching bath is more stable and more excellent in bleaching capability at a pH range of 3.5 to 5 than at a pH value of 7. However, it was also found that a cyan dye is converted to a leuco-compound in this pH range. The Inventors have found that this problem can be remarkably eliminated by drastically saving the amount of water to be supplied to the subsequent bath (e.g. rinse and stabilization). This approach also improves the bleaching capability. This approach further effectively eliminates stain which easily occurs after a processing with a two-equivalent coupler.
As a bleaching agent for the present bleaching solution or blix solution there can be used any suitable bleaching agent.
Particularly preferred examples of suitable bleaching agents include organic complex salts of iron (III) with organic acids such as aminopolycarboxylic acid, e.g., ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid, and diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid, aminopolyphosphonic acid, phosphonocarboxylic acid, tartaric acid, and malic acid, persulfate, and hydroperoxide.
Particularly preferred among these compounds are organic complex salts of iron (III) in the light of rapidness of the development and pollution prevention. Examples of useful aminopolycarboxylic acid, aminopolyphosphonic acid, organic phosphonic acid, and salts thereof which can be used to form such organic complex salts of iron (III) include ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid, diethylenetraminepentaacetic acid, 1,3-diaminopropanetetra-acetic acid, propylenediaminetetraacetic acid, nitrilotriacetic acid, cyclohexanediaminetetraacetic acid, methyliminodiacetic acid, iminodiacetic acid, and glycoletherdiaminetetraacetic acid.
These compounds may be sodium salts, potassium salts, lithium salts or ammonium salts. Particularly preferred among these compounds are complex salts or iron (III) with ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid, diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid, cyclohexanediamine.etraacetic acid, 1,3-diaminopropane-tetraacetic acid, and methyliminodiacetic acid.
These ferric iron complex salts may be used in the form of a complex salt or may be formed of a ferric salt such as ferric sulfate, ferric chloride, ferric nitrate, ferric ammonium sulfate, and ferric phosphate, and a chelating agent such as aminopolycarboxylic acid, aminopolyphosphonic acid, and phosphonocarboxylic acid in a solution. Such a chelating agent may be used in excess of the stoichiometric amount for the formation of the ferric ion complex salt. Particularly preferred among these iron complexes are aminopolycarboxylic acid-iron complexes. The amount of such an aminooolycarboxylic acid-iron complex to be added is in the range of 0.01 to 1.0 mo~/~, preferably 0.05 to 0.50 mo~/~.
The present bleaching solution, blix solution and/or pre-bath thereof may comprise various compounds as bleaching agents.
Examples of suitable compounds excellent in bleaching capability include compounds containing a mercapto group or disulfide bond as described in U.S. Patent No. 3j893,858, West German Patent No. 1,290,812, Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No.
95,630/78, and Research Disclosure No. 17,129 (July 1978), thiourea compounds as described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 8,506/70, Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 20,832/77, and 32,735/78, and U.S. Patent No. 3,706,561, and compounds of halogen such as iodine, and bromine.
The present bleaching solution or biix solution may also contain a re-halogenating agent such as bromide, e.g., potassium bromide, sodium bromide, and ammonium bromide, chloride, e.g., potassium chloride, sodium chloride, and ammonium chloride, and iodide, e.g., ammonium iodide. The present bleaching solution or blix solution may optionally contain one or more corrosion inhibitors having a pH buffering capability such as inorganic acid, e.g., boric acid, borax, phosphinic acid, and phosphonic acid, organic acid, e.g., acetic acid, and tartaric acid, alkaline - 133~192 metal or ammonium salt thereof, e.g., sodium metaborate, sodium acetate, sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, sodium phosphate, and sodium citrate, ammonium nitrate, znd guanidine.
The fixing agent to be used in the present blix solution or fixing solution may be a known fixing agent, i.e., a water-soluble silver halide solvent such as thiosulfate, e.g., sodium thiosulfate, and ammonium thiosulfate, thiocyanate, e.g., sodium thiocyanate, and ammonium thiocyanate, thioether compound, e.g., ethylenebisthioglycolic acid, and 3,6-dithia-1,8-octanediol, and thiourea. These fixing agents may be used singly or in combination. Alternatively, a special blix solution made of a combination of a fixing agent as described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 155,354/80 and a large amount of a hal-ide such as potassium iodide may be used in the present invention.
In the present invention, a thiosulfate, particularly ammonium thiosulfate may be preferably used. The amount of such a fixing agent to be incorporated in the fixing or blix solution is preferably in the range of 0.3 to 2 mo~, particularly 0.5 to 1.0 mol/~. The present fixing solution or blix solution may have a pH value of 3 to 10, preferably S to 9.
The present blix solution may contain a fluorescent brighten-ing agent represented by the general formula (XI) in an amount of 0.1 to 10 g/~. The present blix solution may further contain various antifoam agents, surface active agents or organic solvents such as polyvinyl pyrrolidone, and methanol.
~ 1339192 The present fixing solution or blix solution may contain as a preservative a sulfite ion-releasing compound such as sulfite, e.g., sodium sulfite, potassium sulfite, and ammonium sulfite, bisulfite, e.g., ammonium bisulfite, sodium bisulfite, and potassium bisulfite, and metabisulfite, e.g., potassium metabisulfite, sodium r.etabisulfite, and ammonium metabisulfite.
Such a compound may be preferably used in an amount of 0.02 to ~.50 mo2/~, particularly 0.04 to 0.40 mo~/~ as calculated in terms of sulfite ion.
As such a preservative there may be commonly used a sulfite.
Other examples of suitable preservatives which may be used in the present invention include ascorbic acid, carbonyl-bisulfite addition product, and carbonyl compound.
The present fixing solution or blix solution may further contain a buffering agent, a chelating agent, an antifoam agent, and an antifungal agent as necessary.
In the present invention, the shorter the desilvering step is, the more remarkable is the effect of the present invention.
In particular, the desilvering time is preferably 2 minutes or less, particularly 1 minute or less.
The rinsing solution or stabilizing bath may contain a fluorescent brightening agent represented by the general formula (XI) in an amount of 0.1 to 10 g/Q.
~ 1339192 The rinsing solution may further contain a surface active agent as a hydro-extracting agent or a chelating agent such as EDTA as a water softener.
The rinse step may be followed by the stabilizing step. Alternatively, the present light-sensitive material may be processed with aq stabilizing solution at first hand after being subjected to the fixing or blix step.
Such a stabilizing solution may contain a compound which serves to stabilize images. Examples of such a compound include aldehyde compound such as formalin, buffering agent for adjusing the film pH to a value suitable for the stabilization of dyes, and ammonium compound. The stabilizing solution also may contain the above described various sterilizers or antifungal agents to inhibit proliferation of bacterial or render processed light-sensitive material fungi-resistant.
The stabilizing solution may further contain a surface active agent and a film hardener.
The amount of water to be used in the stabilizing step can drastically saved by employing the countercurrent process as in the rinse step by using 1 or less, preferably 0.5 or less. The supply of the rinsing solution or stabilizing solution may be continuous or intermittent. In the latter case, the supply of the solution may be effected as necessary depending on the amount of the light-sensitive material to be processed or at predetermined time intervals.
The pH value of the solution to be used in the present rinse or stabilization step is in the range of 4 to 10, preferably 5 to 8. The temperature of the solution to be used in the present rinse or stabilization step can be widely selected depending on the application, charac-teristics, etc. of the light-sensitive material to be processed but is normally in the range of 15 to 45~C, preferably 20 to 40~C. The pr~cessing time can be freely selected. However, the shorter the processing time is, the more remarkable is the effect of the present invention. In the present invention, the processing time is preferably 30 seconds to 2 minutes, particularly 30 seconds to 1 minute and 30 seconds. The supply amount of the processing solution is preferably small in the light of running cost, reduction in discharge and handleability.
The less the supply amount of the processing solutions is, the more remarkable is the effect of the present invention .
The solution used in the rinse and/or stabiliza-tion step can be further used in the pre-baths. For example, the overflow of the rinsing water obtained by saving by the countercurrent process may be introduced into the pre-bath, e.g., blix bath whichis supplied with a - 133919~
concentrated solution to reduce the amount of waste liquid.
The overflow liquid produced with the supply of the above described rinsing solution and/or stabilizing solution can be re-used in the other steps such as desilvering step.
The present silver halide color light-sensitive material may comprise a color developing agent for the purpose of simplifying and expediting the processing. To this end, such a color developing agent can be incorporated in the light-sensitive material in the form of various precursors thereof. Examples of such precursors of color developing agent include indoaniline compounds as described in U.S. Patent 3,342,597, Schiff base compounds as described in U.S. Patent 3,342,599, and Research Disclosure Nos. 14,850 and 15,159, aldol compounds as described in Research Disclosure No. 13,913, metal complexes as described in U.S. Patent 3,719,492, and urethane compounds as described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 135,628/78,.
The present silver halide color light-sensitive material may optionally comprise various l-phenyl-3-pyrazolidones for the purpose of accelerating color devel-opment. Typical examples of such compounds are described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 64,339/81, 144,547/82, and 115,438/83.
The various processing solutions to be used in the present invention is used at a temperature of 10 to 50~C.
The standard temperature range is normally between 33~C
and 38~C. Eowever, a higher temperature can be used to accelerate and shorten the processing. On the con-trary, a lower temperature can be used to improve the picture quality or the stability of the processing solu-tion. For the purpose of saving the amount of silver to be incorporated in the light-sensitive material, a proces-sing using cobalt intensification or hydrogen peroxide intensification as described in West German Patent No.
2,226,770, and U.S. Patent 3,674,499 may be effected.
In the present invention, the sum of the time required for the blix step and the rinse or stabilization step is preferably 3 minutes or less.
The process of the present invention can be applied to any processing with a color developing solu-tion. For example, the process of the present invention can be applied to the processing of color paper, color reversal paper, color direct positive light-sensitive material, color positive film, color negative film, color reversal film, or the like. Particularly, the process of the present invention is useful in the processing of color paper or color reversal paper which is susceptible to stain.
As the silver halide emulsion to be incorporated in the direct positive color printing light-sensitive material or color reversal printing light-sensitive material which is suitable for band stop filter of the present invention there may be preferably used a silver halide emulsion having the above described halogen composition comprising internal latent image type particulate silver halide having a multistructure as described in Japanese Patent Application No. 25,737/87.
As the silver halide emulsion to be incorporated in the color reversal printing light-sensitive material there may be preferably used an emulsion as described in European Patent No. 0217353A-2, and Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 39,043/86, and 61,156/86.
For an outer color reversal film, a soluble coupler is used instead of a hydrophobic coupler. Such a soluble coupler is incorporated in the color developing solution rather than the light-sensitive material.
The details of an internal latent image type emulsion and particulate silver halide which can be used in the present direct positive light-sensitive system such as autopositive color film and autopositive color paper are described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No.
81,337/88, left bottom on page 4 to right bottom on page 5.
Such an internal latent image type emulsion may be of the conversion type or the core/shell type, preferably of the core/shell type.
The details of the color couplers which can be used in the direct positive system are described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 81,337/88, left top on page 6 to left top on page 8. The details of various compounds which can be incorporated in the present light-sensitive material (e.g., color fog inhibitor, discolora-tion inhibitor, and dye) are described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 81,337/88, right top to right bottom on page 8.
In the present invention, if a direct positive color light-sensitive material is used, the direct positive color light-sensitive material which has been subjected to imagewise exposure is preferably then subjected to color development with a surface developing solution containing an aromatic primary amine color developing agent and preferably having a pH value of 12 or le~s subsequently after or simultaneously with a fogging process with light or a nucleating agent, and then to blix to provide a direct positive color image. More preferably, the developing solution has a pH value of 10.0 to 11Ø
The fogging process to be used in the present invention can be accomplished by a so-called "light fogging process" in which the second exposure is provided over the entire surface of the light-sensitive layer or a so-called "chemical fogging process"
in which the development is effected in the presence of a nucleating agent. The development may be effected in the presence of a nucleating agent and a fogging light. Alternatively, a light-sensitive material containing a nucleating agent may be subjected to fog exposure.
The details of the light fogging process are described in the above cited Japanese Patent Applicatlon (OPI) No. 81,337/88, left bottom on page 9 to left bottom on page 10. The details of nucleating agents which can be used in the present invention are described in the above described Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 81,337/88, rig~t top on page 10 to left top on page 14.
Particularly, the compounds represented by the general formulas [N-l] and [N-2] described in the same patent may be preferably used.
The details of nucleating accelerators which can be used in the present invention are described in the same Japanese Patent Application (OPI), left top to right bottom on page 15. Specific examples of such nucleating accelerators which can be preferably used in the present invention include compounds (A-l) to (A-13) - shown in the same Japanese Patent Application (OPI), page 15.
Furthermore, examples of color diffusion transfer light-sensitive materials and color image formation processes which can be used in the present invention are described in U.S. Patent No. 3,415,644 for those using a dye-developing agent, in T. H.
~ James, "The Theory of Photographic- Process", 4th ed., 1977, Chapter 12 for those using a diffusive dye-releasing coupler, and ~in "Photographic Science and Engineering", Vol. 20, No. 4, pp .
155-164, July and August 1976 for those using a diffusive dye-releasing redox compound.
On the other hand, the details of heat-developable color light-sensitive material and color formation process which can use the present invention are described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 58,543/83.
133~192 The pres_nt invention will be further described in the following examples, but the present invention should not be construed as being limited thereto.
Preparation of color light-sensitive material for use in photographing A multilayer color light-sensitive material specimen 101 was prepared by coating various layers of the undermentioned compositions on an undercoated cellulose triacetate film support.
Composition of light-sensitive layer The value of the coated amount of-each component is represented in g/m'. The coated amount of silver halide is represented in terms of amount of silver. The coated amount of sensitizihg dye is represented by molar amount thereof per 1 mo~
of silver halide contained in the same layer.
1st layer: antihalation layer Black colloidal layer 0.2 Gelatin 1.4 UV-l 0.02 UV-3 0,04 Solv-l 0.05 2nd layer: intermediate layer Finely divided particles of silver bromide (average particle diameter: 0.07 ~m) 0.08 133319~
Gelatin 1.1 ExC-l 0.02 ExM-l 0.06 W -1 0.03 UV-2 0.06 UV-3 0.07 Cpd-l 0.1 ExF-l 0.004 Solv-l . 0.1 Solv-2 - o.og 3rd layer: low sensitivity red-sensitive emulsion layer Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AgI content: 6.3 mo~ %;
internal high AgI type; c/s ratio: 1/1; diameter in terms of sphere: 0.8 ~m; coeffificent of fluctuation in diameter in terms of sphere: 25 %; tabular particles; diameter/thickness ratio: 2) 1.5 Gelatin 1.7 ExC-2 0-3 ExC-3 0.02 ExS-l 7.1 x 10 5 ExS-2 1.9 x 10 5 ExS-3 2.4 x 10 4 ExS-4 4.2 x 10 5 Solv-2 0.03 13391~2 4th layer: middle sensitivity red-sensitive emulsion layer Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AgI content: 4.8 mol ~; internal high AgI type; c/s ratio: 1/4; diameter in terms of sphere:
0.9 ~m; coefficient of fluctuation in diameter in terms of sphere: 50 %; tabular particles; diameter/thickness ratio:
1.5) 1.4 Gelatin 2.1 ExC-2 0.4 ExC-3 0.002 ExS-l 5.2 x 10 5 ExS-2 1.4 x 10 5 ExS-3 1.8 x 10 4 ExS-4 3.1 x 10 5 Solv-2 0.5 5th layer: high sensitivity red-sensitive emulsion layer Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AgI content: 10.2 mol %;
internal high AgI type; c/s ratio: 1~2; diameter in terms of sphere: 1.2 ~m; coefficient of fluctuation in diameter in terms of sphere: 35 %; tabular particles; diameter/thickness ratio: 3.5) 2.1 Gelatin 2.0 ExC-l 0.06 ExC-4 0 04 ExC-5 0.2 ExS-l 6.5 x 10 5 133~192 ExS-2 1.7 x 10 5 ExS-3 2.2 x 10 4 ExS-4 3. 8 x 10 5 Solv-l 0.1 Solv-2 0.3 6th layer: intermediate layer Gelatin 1.1 7th layer: low sensitivity green-sensitive emulsion layer Silver bromoiodide. emulsion (AgI content: 6.3 mo~ %;
internal high AgI type; c/s ratio: 1/1; diameter in terms of sphere: 0.8 ~m; coefficient of fluctuation in diameter in terms of sphere: 25 %; tabular particles; diameter/thickness ratio: 2) 0.6 Gelatin 0.8 ExM-2 0-3 ExM-l 0.03 ExY-l 0-04 ExS-5 3.1 x 10 ExS-6 1.0 x 10 ExS-7 3. 8 x 10 4 H-l 0.04 H-2 0.01 Solv-2 0.2 8th layer: middle sensitivity green-sensitive emulsion layer Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AgI content: 4.8 mo~ %;
internal high AgI type; c/s ratio: 1/4; diameter in terms OL
sphere: 0.9 ~m; coefficient of fluctuation in diameter in terms of sphere: 50 %; tabular particles; diameter/thickness ratio: 1.5) 1.1 Gelatin 1.4 ExM-4 0.2 ExM-5 0.05 ExM-l ~ 0.01 ExM-3 0.01 ExY-l 0.02 ExS-5 2.0 x 10 5 . ExS-6 7.0 x 10 5 ExS-7 2.6 x 10 4 H-l 0.07 H-2 0.02 Solv-l 0.06 Solv-2 0.4 9th layer: high sensitivity green-sensitive emulsion layer Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AgI content: 10.2 mo~ %;
internal high AgI type; c/s ratio: 1/2; diameter in terms of sphere: 1.2 ~m; coefficient of fluctuation in diameter in terms of sphere: 38 %; tabular particles; diameter/thickness ratio: 4) 2.1 Gelatin 2.2 ExC-2 0.02 133919~
ExM-5 0.1 ExM-l 0.05 ExS-5 3.5 x 10 5 ExS-6 8.0 x 10 5 ExS-7 3.0 x 10 Solv-l 0.08 Solv-2 0.7 10th layer: yellow filter layer Yellow colloidal silver 0.08 Gelatin - 1.0 Cpd-l 0.1 11th layer: low sensitivity blue-sensitive emulsion layer Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AgI content: 9.0 mo~ %;
internal high AgI type; c/s ratio: 1/2; diameter in terms of sphere: 0.75 ~m; coefficient of fluctuation in diameter in terms of sphere: 21 %; octahedron particles; diameter/thickness ratio: 1) 0.3 Gelatin 1.3 ExY-2 0-7 ExY-l 0-03 H-l 0.03 H-2 0.01 Solv-2 0 3 12th layer: middle sensitivity blue-sensitive emulsion layer Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AgI content: 10.2 mo~ %;
internal high AgI type; c/s ratio: 1/2; diameter in terms of 1333l~2 sphere; 1.0 ~m; coefficient of fluctuation in diameter in terms of sphere: 30 %; tabular particles; diameter/thickness ratio: 3.5) 0.4 Gelatin 0.7 ExY-2 0.1 ExS-8 2.2 x 10 4 H-l 0.01 Solv-2 0.05 13th layer: high sensitivity blue-sensitive emulsion layer Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AgI content: 9.8 mo~ ~;
internal high AgI type; c/s ratio: 1/2; diameter in terms of sphere: 1.8 ~m; coefficient of fluctuation in diameter in terms of sphere: 55 %; tabular particles; diameter/thickenss ratio: 4.5) 0.8 Gelatin 0.7 ExY-2 0.2 ExS-8 2.3 x 10 4 Solv-2 0.07 14th layer: 1st protective layer Gelatin 0.9 UV-4 0.1 UV-5 0.2 H-l 0.02 l33als2 Solv-3 0.03 Cpd-2 0 7 15th layer: 2nd protective layer Emulsion of finely divided particles of silver bromide (average particle diameter: 0.07 ~m) 0.1 Gelatin 0.7 H-l 0.2 ExS.- 1 C H = C - C H=<
tC H2)3S 03N a E x S ~ 2 C,ll, ~S~3 (CH2)3SO3H ~ N(C2Hs)3 E x S--3 C~ S ~ C 2 H ~ ~ S ~C e tC H2)3S 03-tCHz)sSOsH ~ N~
133919~
ExS, 4 C Q~ ~>eC H--C H;= N~
C Q N
E x S - 5 C H = C--C H~ ~(C H
(C H2)zS 03- (C H2)~S 03K
E x S--6 C H = C H - C H~ ~( (C H2)~S 03-(CH2)~S03H ~ N(C2H5)3 E x S ~ 7 >--C H = C - C H~< ~
(C H2)2S 03- (C H2)~S 03H ~ N(C2Hs)3 E x S - 8 C e~ C H ~\+~
(CH2)~SO3- (CHz)~SO3H ~ N (CzHs)3 E x C ~ 1 O H
O C H 2 C H 2 0 ~N = N ~
N a 03S~--S 03N a ~ 159 --l33~l32 E x C. - 2 Q~ .
- ~CONH(CHz)30CI2H25 ( i S O ) C 4 H ~ O C O N H
E x C - 3 O ( n ) C, ~ H
~ C 0 E x C - 4 OH A
C O N H ~
(n) C ,zH 25 ExC, 5 CbH ~3 ~N H C O N H ~C N
~t) C 5 H I I ~ O C H C O'N H ~J
\=<\ ~
(t) CSHI, ~
C(CH3)2CH2C(CH3)3 ExM- 1 C 2 ~I S
( t) C 5 H , ~ ~ O C H C O N H
(t)C5H" N ~; OC115 C Q~C Q
~Q
133~192 E xM--2 ~CH2--CH ) n ( CH2- CH ) Q t CHz--CH ) ~, ~ . I I
C O N H ~ ~ C O O C H 3 C O O C 4 H 9 --N/~O
~_C ~
~ n / m + m ' = 1 C ~ m / m ' = 1-Molecular Weight about 40,000 ExM- 3 =<N = N ~INHCO ( t) C 5 H y ~OCHCONH N/ S
(n)CIsH3l C~~co C Q
133~192 E xM 4 O C~Hs N S C ~ H
C
E xM--5 C z H 5 (t) CsHIl~O C H CONH
~ ~.
(t)CsH~
C O N H //
N N/~O
CQ ~ CQ
-- 163 ~
E x Y , 1 C32H2sOOCCllOOC_~ NHCO,HCONN ~ COOIilCCOCIzHzs ~ ~COO~
E x Y ~ 2 CO O C~zH2s C H30~C O C H C O N H
O~N~O
H~ ~ H
O CsHs -- 164 ~
UV . 1 OH (t) C4H9 \ N ~
~t) C4H9 O H
N ~
(t) C~Hq U~J- 3 ~,C 4 H 9 (t) C~H9 UV -.4 ( C Hz C ) c ( C Hz C ' y ~/ C O O C HzC HzO C O C O O C H
H3C~ ~C H = C~
\=/ ~C N
x / y = 7 / 3 ~wt.) C2H5 \~C O O C8H,.
~ N--C H = C H - C H = C~
C Hz = C H S 02C H2C O N H--C Hz CH2 =CHSO2CH2CONH--CH2 E x F--1 CQ~CH--CH=CH~C~
C2HsOSO3~
CzHs CzH~
Cp d--1 Cp d--2 0~ 0 (t) C I sHs ,~ HN ~--CH~
OH o S o 1 v - 1 : Di-n-~utylphthalate S 0 1 v - 2 : Tricresylphosphate S o l v - 3 : Trihexylphosphate CH2 =CHSO2 CHz CONH--CHz C H2 = C H S 02 C H2 C O N H - C H2 - 167 ~
Preparation of Specimen 102 Specimen 102 was prepared in the same manner as in Specimen 101 except in that 0.2 g of Compound C of the undermentioned general formula was added to the 10th layer in stead of the yellow colloidal silver, ExM-4 and ExM-S were replaced by the above described ecemplary compound (VIII)-2 and ExY-2 was replaced by the above described exemplary compound (X)-(7).
Compound C
> C= CH ~ < CHzCOOC4Hs(n) CH3SO2NH ~ , CH2COOC~.Hq(n) \d I CHJ
(Yellow dye described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 205,934/86) Color development of color light-sensitive material for use in photographing Processing Step Processing time Processing temperature .
Color development3 min. 15 sec. 38 ~C
Bleaching1 min. 00 sec. "
Blix 3 min. 15 sec. "
Rinse (1) 40 sec. 35 ~C
Rinse (2)1 min. 00 sec. "
Stabilization 40 sec. 38 ~C
Drying 1 min. 15 sec. 55 ~C
The composition of various processing solutions used in the above processing steps were as follows:
Color developing solution (unit: g) Diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid 1.0 l-Hydroxyethylidene-l,l-diphosphonic acid 3.0 Sodium sulfate 4.0 Potassium carbonate - 30.0 Potassium bromide 1.4 Potassium iodide 1.5 mg Hydroxylamine sulfate 2.4 Water to make 1.0 pH 10.05 Bleaching solution (unit: g) Ferric ammonium ethylenediaminetetraacetate (dihydrate) 120.0 Disodium ethylenediamine tetraacetate 10.0 Ammonium bromide 100.0 Ammonium nitrate 10.0 Bleach accelerator 0.005 moQ
133~192 >N--C H 2--C Hz--S ~ ~ 2 H C
Aqueous ammonia (27 %) 15.0 m~
Water to make 1.0 pH 6.3 Blix solution (unit: g) Ferric ammonium ethylenediamine tetraacetate (dihydrate) . 50.0 Disodium ethylenediamine tetraacetate 5.0 Sodium sulfite 12.0 Aqueous solution of ammonium thiosulfate (70 %) 240.0 mQ
Aqueous ammonia (27 %) 6.0 m~
Water to make 1.0 Q
pH 7.2 Rinsing solution Tap water was passed through a mixed bed type column filled with a s ~ongly acidic H type exhange resin (Rome & Herse Corp's Amberlite IR-l~OB) and an OH type anionic exchange resin (Amberlite IR-400) so that the calcium and magnesium concentration was adjusted to 3 mg/~ or less. Sodium dichlorinated isocyanurate and sodium sulfate were added to the water thus treated in amounts of 20 mg/~ and 150 mg/~, respectively.
~ ~ 5 ~ ~ k' The pH value of the rinsing solution thus prepared was in the range of 6.5 to 7.5.
Stabilizing solution (unit: g) Formalin (37 %) 2.0 mQ
Polyoxyethylene-p-monononylphenylether (average polymerization degree: 10) 0.3 Disodium ethylenediaminetetraacetate 0.05 Water to make 1.0 Q
pH 5.0 - 8.0 The color light-sensitive material specimen 101 thus prepared was then exposed to light from a standard light source for use in photographing (about 5,500 ~K) through a Macbeth chart. The specimen thus exposed was then subjected to the above described color development to obtain a color negative film. The spectral transmittance curve T (~) for the various coloring materials contained in the color negative film were then obtained. Furthermore, the specimen 101 was exposed to light through a Macbeth chart No. 22 (achromatic chart; optical density: about 0.7). The image on the film was then printed on a color printing paper (Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.'s Super HR) by means of a printer. The printing paper was then subjected to processing with Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.'s standard developing solution CP-20 to obtain a grey color print. -On the other hand, the spectral sensitivity distribution S (~) (modifed so as to give the same energy) of the color printing paper was obtained.
~he energy distribution of a l t g~t source for printing p(~ as determined.
The effective spectral sensitive energy distribution E (~ ) for the each ligh'-sensitive layers were obtained by the following equations:
Eb(~) = Sb(~ Ty(A ) P(~) ~--- (3) Eg( ~) = Sg(~) Tm(~) p(/~) ,,,, (4 Er( ~) = Sr( ~) Tc(~) The results are shown in Figure l-(a)~ The characteristics concerning the mutual independence of the various light-sensitive layers are shown in Ta~le l. The results show that only Er(~) is independent.
Table l Specimen used Specimen lOl and Super HR Paper E~) Eb(~ ig, l-(a) Eb(~) Eg(/~) " Eg(~ ) Er ( )~ ) Er ( /~ ) Eg~ ~)/Eb~) at 400-485 mm 0.20 Ema(X )/E'a~ ) at 400-485 mm max max Eb(~)/Eg(~) at 485-570 mm 0.20 Er~ ~)/Eg~ ~) at 485-570 mm 0.01 >
Ebm~)/Er~ ~) at 570-750 mm 0.01 >
Eg~ )/Er~ l) at 570-750 mm O.Ol >
Eg/Eb at 400-485 mm 0.2 Er/Eb at 400-485 mm 0.01 >
133~192 Eb/Eg at 485-570 mm 0.11 Er/Eb at 485-570 mm 0.01 >
Eb/Er at 570-750 mm 0.01 >
Eg/Er at 570-750 mm 0.01 >
The image on the negative film was then printed on a color printing paper (Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.'s Super HR) with a multi-layer dielectric c~und deposited film, having a spectral transparent curve as is shown in Fig. 3-(a), interposed between a light source and the negative film. The color printing paper thus printed was then sub-jected tothe above described processing with CP-20 to obtain a grey color print.
The results of Eb(~), Eg(~), and Er(~ ) are shown in Figure 2-(a). The results show that Er(A) and Eg(~).are independent.
Preparatlon of multilayer color printing light-sensitive Material A multilayer color printing paper specimen 201 was prepared by coating various layers of the undermentioned compositions on a paper support laminated with polyethylene on the both sides thereof.
Preparation of coating solution for 1st layer 19.1 g of a yellow coupler (ExY) and 4.4 g of a dye stabilizer (Cpd-l) weré dissolved in 27.2 cc of ethyl acetate and 7.7 cc of a solvent (Solv-l). The solution thus obtained was then ~mulsion-dispersed in 185 cc of a 10 % aqueous solution of ~elatin containing 8 cc of 10 % sodium dodecylbenzenesulfonate.
On the other hand, a blue-sensitive sensitizing dye was added to a silver bromochloride emulsion (containing 80.0 mo~ % of silver bromide and 70 g/kg of Ag) in an amount of 5.0 x 10 4 mo~ per 1 mo~ of silver to prepare an emulsion. The emulsion dispersion and the emulsion thus obtained were mixed to prepare a 1st layer coating solutio~ having the undermentioned composition. Coating solutions for the 2nd layer to the 7th layer were then prepared in the same manner as described above. As a gelatin hardener for the various layers there was used sodium l-oxy-3,5-dichloro-s-triazine.
As spectral sensitizing dyes for the various layers there were used the following compounds:
Blue-sensitive emulsion layer C ~N+ ~ =~N /¢~\c o (CHz)~ (CH2)~SO3H ~ N (C2H5)3 (5.0 x 10 4 mo~ per 1 mo~ of silver halide) Green-sensitive emulsion layer c e~~~ C 2 ~I s =<~~
(CHz)3 (CH2)2 SO3- SO3H ~ N(C2Hs)3 (4.0 x 10 4-mo~ per 1 moQ of silver halide) and C H
So3 S 03H ~''!C7H~)~
(7.0 x 10 5 mo~ per 1 mol of silver halide) Red-sensitive emulsion layer [~ /~ C H ~--C H =< ~¢~
C2Hs I- C2Y.s (0.9 x 10 4 mo~ per 1 mol of silver halide) A compound of the undermentioned general formula was incorporated in the red-sensitive emulsion layer in an amount of' 133~192 2.6 x 10 mo~ per 1 mol of silver halide.
~ ~ S O,H
- ~ , z'.
1-(5-Methylureidephenyl)-5-mercaptotetrazole was incorporated in the blue-sensitive emulsion layer, the green-sensitive emulsion layer and the red-sensitive emulsion layer in amounts of 4.0 x 10 6 mol, 3.3 x 10 5 mol and 1.0 x 10 5 mo~ per 1 mol of silver halide, respectively.
4-Hydroxy-6-methyl-1,3,3a,7-tetrazaindene was incorporated in the blue-sensitive emulsion layer and the green-sensitive emulsion layer in amounts of 1.2 x 10 2 mol and 1.1 x 10 2 mol per 1 mol of silver halide, respectively.
For the purpose of inhibiting irradiation, the undermentioned dyes were incorporated in the emulsion layer.
(D ~
HO OH
~OCH2CH2NC l~ ~ CH- CH= CH ~ ~ CNCH2CH20H
- - ~ O HO N -~Hz CH2 [ ~ SO,Na [ ~ SOlNa and (~ - 2) HO -lll OH
80CH2CHzNC // ~ -CH=CH-CH= ~ IINCH CH
'H
. z CHz [~SO3Na ~SO3Na Layer construction The composition of the various layers will be described hereinafter. The value of the coated amount of each component is represented in g/m2. The coated amount of silver halide emulsion is rèpresented in terms of amount of silver.
- 177 ~
1~39192 Polyethylene laminated paper (Polyethylene at the first layer side contains white pigment tTiO2) and blue dye (ultramarine)).
Support 1st layer (Blue-sensitive layer) Silver halide emulsion (Br: 80%) 0.26 Gelatin 1.83 Yellow coupler (ExY) 0.33 Dye stabilizer (Cpd-l) 0.19 Solvent (Solv-l) 0.35 2nd layer (Color mixinq inhihiting l~y~r) .- Gelatin 0.99.
Color mixing inhibitor (Cpd-2) 0.08 3rd layer (Green-sensitive layer) Silver halide emulsion (Br: 80 %) 0.16 Gelatin - 1.79 Magenta coupler (ExM) 0.32 Dye stabilizer (Cpd-3) 0.20 Dye stabilizer (Cpd-4) 0.01 Solvent (Solv-2) 0.65 Dye stabilizer (Cpd-8) 0.06 " (Cpd-9) 0.06 Dye (D-l) 0.10 -133~192 4th layer (ultraviolet absorbing layer) Gelatin 1.58 Ultraviolet absorber (UV-l) 0.62 Color mixing inhibitor (Cpd-5) 0-05 Solvent (Solv-3) 0.24 5th layer (red-sensitive layer) Silver halide emulsion (Br: 70 %) 0.23 Gelatin 1.34 Cyan coupler (ExC) 0.34 Dye stabilizer (Cpd-6) 0.17 Polymer (Cpd-7) 0.40 Solvent (Solv-4) 0.23 Dye (D-2) 0.12 6th layer (ultraviolet absorbing layer) Gelatin 0.53 Ultraviolet absorber (UV-l) 0.21 Solvent (Solv-3) 0.08 7th layer (protective layer) Gelatin 1.33 Acryl-modified copolymer of polyvinyl alcohol (modification degree: 17%) 0.17 Liquid paraffin 0-03 133~192 Dy.e stabilizer (Cpd-l) C.H9(t) \ / ~CH3 H O ~C H z C C O O ~ C O O H = C H z C~H~(t) ~2 \ CH3 /2 Color mixing inhibitor (Çpd-2) O H
~C 8 H , 7 (sec) (sec) C~H ,.
O H
Dye stabilizer (Cpd-3) C3H,O ~><
C 3 H 7 0--~ ~ O C 3 H , X~o C3H, 133gl92 Yellow coupler (ExY) C~
CH3 ~ \
CH3- C~CO ~ CH-CONH ~ Cs~ll(t) ~ ~ NHCOINO ~ CsH~(t) ~J OCz~5 Magenta coupler (ExM) CH3 ~
N NH , OCHzCHzOC2Hs NHSO/~ ~
CsH, 7 ( t) Cyan coupler (ExC) O H Cs Hlltt) C ~ ~ N H C O C H O ~ C 5 H " (t) C2H s ~ C z Hs C ~
133gl92 Dye stabilizer (Cpd-~) _~ S 0 3 N a C~s~31 ~) ''' ~
Color mixing inhibitor (Cpd-5) O H
C8H,7(t) O H
Dye stabilizer (Cpd-6) .5:8:9 mixture (by weight) of C Q N O H
\N~.C~Hy(t) C H2C H2C O O CBH,7 C Q N O H
\ N ~ C4Hy(t) C4Hy(t) 133~192 N ~ ~ ( ) C4~9~t) Polymer (Cpd-7) ( C H2 C H ) n C O N H C4H9(t) Average molecular weight 80,000 Ultraviolet absorber (UV-l) 2 : 9 : 8 mixture (by weight) of .
C ~ \ ~ C4H9(t) C H2C HzC O O C8H17 ~N / ~1 C4H9(t) - 183 ~
; 133919~
N OH
[~ \ ~ C ~ H 9 (sec) C~H9(tj Solvent (Solv-l) ~C 00 C.,H9 C O O C ~ H 9 Solvent (Solv-2) 2 : 1 mixture (by volume) of CzHs O = P ~O C H ~ C H C ~ H, / ~C H 3 )3 Solvent (Solv-3) O = P--O--CqHIq(iso~
~ \ 13 Solvent (Solv-4 ) ~ ~ ) (Cpd-8 ) (n) H9C~--C H C H20~0 CzHs 0 N~
~ ., ~ , .
~~0 C~2Hzs (Cpd-9 ) S 02N a ~O(CNz)~NN~ NN(CNz)~
O O
The color printing light-sensitive material thus obtained was then subjected to the following color development.
Processing step Temperature Time Color development 35 ~C 45 sec.
Blix 30-36 ~C 45 sec.
Stabiliza~ion-l 30-37 ~C 20 sec.
Stabilization 2 30-37 ~C 20 sec.
Stabilization 3 30-37 ~C 20 sec.
Stabilization 4 30-37 ~C 30 sec.
Drying 70-85 ~C - 60 sec.
(The stabilizing step was effected in a countercurrent process in which water flows from the tank 4 to the tank 1 through the tank 3 and the tank 2.) The composition of the various processing solutions were as follows: ~
Color developing solution Water 800 m~
Ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid 2.0 g Triethanol amine 8.0 g Ammonium sodium chloride 1.4 g Disodium ethylenediaminetetraacetate 3 g Potassium carbonate 25 g N-ethyl-N-(~-methanesulfoamidoethyl)-3-methyl-4-aminoaniline sulfate 5.0 g 133~l92 N,N-diethylhydroxylamine 4.2 g 5,6-Dihydroxybenzene-1,2,4-trisulfonic acid 0.3 g Fluorescent brightening agent (4,4'-diaminostylbene series) 2.0 g Water to make 1,000 m~
pH at 25 ~C 10.10 Blix solution ~ater 400 m~
Ammonium thiosulfate (70 ~) 100 mQ
Sodium sulfite 18 g Ferric ethylenediaminetetraacetate55 g Glacial acetic acid 8 g Water to make 1,000 m~
pH at 25 ~C 6.5 Stabilizing solution Formalin (37 %) 0.1 g Formalin-sulfite addition product 0.7 g 5-Chloro-2-methyl-isothiazoline-3-one 0.02 g 2-Methyl-4-isothiazoline-3-one 0.01 g Copper sulfate 0.005 g Water to make 1,000 m ~
pH at 25 ~C. 4.0 - 187 ~
Specimen 202 was prepared in the same manner as in Specimen 201 except in that the silver halide emulsion (Br: 80 moQ ~) to be incorporated in the 1st layer was replaced by the silver halide emulsion A (Br: 0.5 moQ %) shown below and the silver halide emulsion B (Br: 1.0 mpQ %) shown below was incorporated in the 3rd layer.
Preparation of Emulsion (A) Formation of host particulate silver chloride Solution 1 H20 - 1,000 cc NaCQ g Gelatin 32 g Solution 2 Sulfuric acid (1 N) 24 cc Solution 3 Compound A of the general formula (1%);
Compound A
N \ 3 cc N
C H~
Solution 4 NaCQ 1.7 g H2O to make 200 g Solution 5 AgNO3 5 g H2O to make 200 cc Solution 6 NaCQ 41.3 g K2IrC~6 (0.001 %) 0.5 cc H2O to make 600 cc Solution 7 AgNO3 120 g H2O to make 600 cc Solution 1 was heated to a temperature of 76 ~C. Solution 2 and Solution 3 were then added to Solution 1.
Solution 4 and Solutio~ 5 were then added to the miY~ture at the same time in 10 minutes.
After 10 minutes passed, Solution 6 and Solution 7 were then added to the mixture at the same time in 35 minutes. After 5 minutes passed, the temperature of the mixture was lowered. The solution was then desalted. Water and gelatin were added to the solution to adjust the pH value thereof to 6.3. As a result, a monodisperse emulsion of cubic par-~iculate silver chloride having an average particle size of 1.1 ~m and a particle size fluctuation coefficient of 0.10 (value obtained by dividing standar deviation by average particle size: s/d).
The emulsion thus obtained was then halved. 12.6 cc of a 0.6 ~ solution of a blue spectral sensitizing dye (general formula CR-l shown below) as CR compound was added to one of the two halves of the emulsion. An emulsion of ultrafine particulate AgBr having a particle size of 0.05 ~m was added to the emulsion in a proportion of 0.5-moQ % based on the host AgC~
emulsion. The emulsion was then subjected to mixing and ripening at a temperature of 5~ ~C for 10 minutes. The emulsion was then subjected to optimum chemical sensitization with sodium thiosulfate. A stabilizer of the undermentioned general formula B was added to the emulsion in an amount of 10 4 mo~/mo~ Ag to prepare Emulsion (A).
Compound CR-l C Q/~~ \N/~\C
( C H 2) 3 ( C H 2) 3 S 03N a S 03- ~
Stabilizer B
N--N
N~ ~
S ~
133gl92 Preparation of Silver halide Emulsion (B) Solution 8 H2O 1,000 m~
NaCQ 3- g Gelatin 32 g Solution 9 Sulfuric acid (1 N) 24 mQ
Solution 10 Compound A (Emulsion A) (1 %) 3 mQ
Solution 11 NaCQ . 11.00 g H2O to make 200 mQ
Solution 12 AgNO3 32.00 g H2O to make 200 mQ
Solution 13 NaCQ 44.00 g K2IrCQ6 (0.001 %) 2.3 mQ
H2O to make 560 mQ
Solution 14 AgNO3 128 g H2O to make 560 mQ
Solution 8 was heated to a tempera~ure of 52 ~C. Solution 9 and Solution 10 were then added to Solution 8 thus heated.
Solu~ion 11 and Solution 12 were then added to the mixture at the same time in 14 minutes. After 10 minutes passed, Solution 13 and Solution 14 were then added to the mixture at the same time in 15 minutes. After 5 minutes passed, the temperature of the emulsion was lowered. The emulsion was then desalted.
Water and dispersed gelatin were then added to the emulsion to adjust the pH value thereof to 6.2 to obtain a monodisperse emulsion of cubic particulate silver chloride having an average particle size of 0.48 ~m and a particle size fluctuation coefficient (value obtained by dividing standard deviation by average particle size: s/d) of 0.10. A compound of the undermentioned general formula CR-2 was then added to the emulsion in an amount of 4.0 x 10 4 mo~ per 1 mo~ of silver halide. An emulsion of ultrafine particulate silver bromide having a particle size of 0.05 ~m was then added to the emulsion in an amount of 1 mo~ % as calculated in terms of amount of silver bromide based on the silver silver chloride emulsion. The emulsion was then ripened at a temperature of 58 ~C for io minutes.
Compound CR-2 C H - C = C H
C H2C HzC H C H3 (C H2)3S 03N
The emulsion was then subjected to optimum chemical sensitization with sodium thiosulfate at a temperature of 58 ~C.
The emulsion was further subjected to spectral sensiti~ation with Compound CR-2 added in an amount of 4 x 10 4 mo~ per 1 moQ of silver halide. As a stabilizer Compound B as used in Emulsion A
was added to the emulsion in an amount of 5 x 10 4 moQ per 1 mo~
of silver halide.
A Macbeth chart was then photographed on Specimen 102 in the same manner as in Example l to prepare a color negative film.
The images on the color negative film were then prin~ed on the color printing light-sensitive material specimens 201 and 202 by means of a printer, and then subjected to the above described color development to obtain color prints.
Eb(~ ), Eg (~) and Er (~ of these color prints were determined in the same manner as in Example 1. The results show that Specimen 201 gives the-similar characteristics as shown in Fig. l-(a). Eb(~), Eg(~) and Er(~) obtained from Specimen 202 are shown in Fig. 3-(a).
The images on the color negative film were then printed on Specimen 201 with a filter having a half value width of 30 mm (about 480 to 510 nm) in the similar waveform as shown in Fig. l-(d) clamped by infrared absorbing filters and interposed between the light source and the negative film, and then subjected to the similar development. The results of Eb(A) and Eg( ~ are 133~192 shown in Fig. 4-(a). The results show that Er(~), Eg(~) and Eb(~) are all independent.
The characteristics concerning the effective spectral sensitivity distribution in the various layers shown in Figs.
3-(a) and 4-(a) are shown in Table 2.
Table 2 E ( ~) Fig. 3-(a) Eb(/~) Fig. 4-(a) Eb(~ ) Eg(~ ) Eg(~) max max r(l) Er(~ ) E~(~)/Eb(~) at 400-485nm 0.2 0.09 ax max r(~)/Eb( 1) at 400- 0.01 > 0.01 >
485 nm max max Eb(~ )/E (~) at 485-570nm 0.14 0.06 max ~ax Er(~ )/Eg(~_) at 485- 0.01 > 0.01 >
570 nm max max Eb(~)/Er(,~) at 570-750nm 0.01 > 0.01 >
max max Eg(!~ )/Er(/~) at 570- 0.01 > 0.01 >
750 nm Eg/Eb at 400-485 nm 0 03 Er/Eb at 400-485 nm 0.01 > 0.01 >
Eb/Eg at 400-485 nm 0.02 0.01 >
Er/Eg at 485-570 nm 0.01 > 0.01 >
Eb/Er at 570-750 nm 0.01 > 0.01 >
E~/Er at 570-750 nm 0.01 > 0.01 >
133!~192 An object comprising natural green leaves and yellow chrysanthem flowers was then photographed on the color negative light--sensitive material specimen 102 with natural light. The specimen was subjected to the above described development to obtain a color negative film.
The images on the color negative film were then printed on Specimens 201 and 202 (Specimens I and II in Table 3).
On the other hand, the images on the color negative film were printed on Specimen 202 with a multilayer dielectric-deposited film applied in the same manner as described above (Specimen III).
The specimen was then subjected to the above described development to obtain a color print. The results are shown in Table 3.
The results show that improvements can be seen particularly in saturation and brightness of yellow of the chrysanthem flowers and green of the plant as viewed against the light.
Table 3 Object Yellow chrysanthem Green leaves Representatation Specimen used flower in Fig.
Specimen I Saturation Brightness Saturation Brightness Specimen 202 + Q ~ ~ X
Specimen 201 Specimen II Point II
Specimen 202 + O O O ; ~
Specimen 202 Specimen III
Point III
Specimen 202 + O ~ (~
Specimen 202 +
Filter X ... Poor, ~ ... Slightly poor, O ...Good, ~ .. Extremely good Fig. 5-(a) shows the representation of the color prints obtained from Specimens II and III and CIE
(L * a * b) color specification system (as described in Nihon Shikisai Gakkai, "Shikisai Kagaku Handbook, 5th ed., 1985, pp. 140-141) (represented at points II and III, respectively).
Improvements can be seen in saturation and brightness of green and yellow. In particular, color stain of magenta dye is remarkably decreased, and the fidelity in color reproduction is improved.
Furthermore, the use of a filter having a spectral absorption in a wavelength band of 380 to 400 nm gives some improvement in brightness.
Examples of the measurement of the value of color stain degree ~-i and average color mixing degree r of the various Macbeth charts of the present invention will be described hereinafter.
Macbeth charts were photographed with Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.'s photographing color light-sensitive material SUPER HR 100 under a photographing standard light source (about 5,500 ~K). The light-sensitive material was then subjected to development with Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.'s standard developing solution CN-16 (Fuji color negative pr~cess and ~hpn;c~lc) to obtain a color negative film.
The images on the color negative film were then printed on Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.'s color photographic paper SUPER HR Paper by means of a printer (see P curve in Fig. l-(b)). The color photographic paper thus printed was then subjected to development with Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.'s standard developing solution CP-20 (Fuji color negative process and chemicals) to obtain a color print.
The spectral sensitivity of GL in the color photo-graphic paper used in the present example was determined by a conventional method. (See GL curve in Fig. l-(b)) The color stain degree ~1 of color,of Macbeth chart i was determined. The results are shown~in Table 4.
The results show that when i is 16 (Y), the highest color stain degree is obtained, and the next highest color stain degree is obtained at i = 11 (YG) and i = 12 (OY).
Accordingly, the color mixing degree of the print thus, obtained at i = 16 Y is 0.47. The average color mixing degree r of GL was determined by means of the equation (2-5) to obtain 0.14.
A multilayer dielectric-deposted filter was prepared.
The spectral transmittance F (~) curve of the filter thus obtained is shown in Fig. l-(d). For the color chart i, the exposure is given by the following equation:
,570 E i = S (A) ~ T i (A) ~ P (A) ~ F (1) d A
' 485 The value of color stain degree ~_iF obtained with the filter interposed between the light source and GL in the printing light-sensitive material during the printing is shown in Table 4. When i is 16 (Y), the color mixing degre~
degree ~_iF is 0.23 and the average color mixing degree r of GL is 0.07. Thus, it was found that the multilayer dielectric-deposited filter halves the color of GL in a color printing material.
Furthermore, printing was conducted with a filter F~ (spectral transmittance F~ (~); see Fig. 2-(d)) in the same manner as described above. If the same light-sensitive material and color development process as described are used, the value of the average color stain F~
degree r of GL is in the range of 0.02 to 0.03.
In yeneral, the color mixing degree of a color printing light-sensitive material shows the greatest value in GL. Therefore, it can be said that the above described value is the color mixing degree of the color printing light-sensitive material.
i color H i H i ~ i ~ i ~ i F
1 1.75 1.78 1.020.02 0.02 2 0.82 0.87 1.070.07 0.03 3~ 0.98 0.93 0.94-0.06 -0.03 4 - 1.03 1.16 1.120.12 0.06 0.97 0.92 0.95-0.05 -0.02 6 B G 0.50 0.53 1.060.06 - 0.02 7 O 0.96 1.l9 1.230.23 0.12 8 1.48 1.29 0.87-0.13 -0.06 9 M. R 1.66 1.64 0.99--0.01 0 0 P 2.10 1.86 0.89-0.11 -0.05 11 YG 0.43 0.59 1.370.37 0.18 2 O. Y. 0.55 0.74 1.350.35 0.17 13 B 2.0~ 1.69 0.83- 0.17 - 0.08 14 G 0. 60 0. 73 1.200.20 0.10 -R 2.26 2.30 1.020.02 0.02 16 Y 0.~0 O.S9 1.d~70.~7 0.23 17 M 1. 56 1.43 0.92- 0.08 - 0.03 18 C 0.85 0.80 0.95-0.0S -0.03 22 Grey 1.0 1.0 1.0 0 0 Preparation of multilayer color printing light-sensitive material A multilayer color photographic paper was prepared by coating various làyers of the undermentioned composi-tion on a paper support laminated with polyethylene on both sides thereof. The coating solution used were pre-pàred according to the procedure in Example 2, to prepare Specimen 401.
Preparation of Specimens 402 to 403 Specimen 402 was prepared in the same manner as in Specimen 301 except in that the compound of the general formula D-3 was further incorporated in the 4th layer.
Specimen 403 was prepared in the same manner as in Specimen 402 except in that Compound (D-3) to be incor-porated in the 4th layer was replaced Compound (S-l) and a functional dye (F-l) as is shown in Table 5. Compounds (S-l) and (F-l) were dispersed in the layer together with an ultraviolet absorber. Compound (D-3) was in-corporated in the layer in the form of an aqueous solution.
133~192 .Compound incorporated Compound incorporated Specimenin the 3rd layer in the 4th layer 401 (D-l) 1.4 x 10 moQ/m 402 (D-3) 1.4 x 10 moQ/m 403 " (S-l) 0.20 g/m2 (F-l) 1 x 10 moQ/m (S- 1 ) 0~ .
SO,Na ~ ; I 11 ' .
(n)H3lCIs~
~~
(F--1 ) H3C
(CH3) J-C~ -CH2--OC-- CH ~CH ~CHzSO3Na 0\N~0 ll N~;0 \cH2cHzso3Na OzN~
~CR3 S02N~ S03Na Cl ~H33 (D - 3) ~N ~ ~ CH~C~ 3 O \N~i ~max about 520 nm ~1 S~3~
The color printing light-sensitive material thus obtained was subjected to the following color development.
Processing step Temperature Time Color development 35 ~C 45 sec.
Blix 30-36 ~C 45 sec.
Stabilization 1 30-37 ~C 20 sec.
Stabilization 2 30-37 ~C 20 sec.
Stabilization 3 30-37 ~C 20 sec.
Stabilization 4 - 30-37 ~C 30 sec.
Drying 70-85 ~C 60 sec.
(The stabilizing step was effected in a countercurrent process in which water flows from the tank 4 to the tank 1 through the tank 3 and the tank 2.) The composition of the various processing solutions used were as follows:
Color developing solution Water 800 m Ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid 2.0 g Triethanol amine 8.0 g Ammonium sodium chloride 1.4 g Disodium ethylenediaminetetraacetate 3 g Potassium carbonate 2S g N-ethyl-N-(~-methanesulfonamidoethyl)-3-methyl-4-aminoaniline sulfate 5.0 g N,N-diethylhydroxylamine 4.2 g 5,6-Dihydroxybenzene-1,2,4-trisulfonic acid 0.3 g Fluorescent brightening agent (4,4'-diaminostylbene series) 2.0 g Water to make 1,000 m~
pH at 25 ~C 10.10 Blix solution Water 400 m~
Ammonium thiosulfate (70 %) lO0 mQ
Sodium sulfate 18 g Ferric ethylenediaminetetraacetate (III) 55 g Glacia~ acetic acid 8 g Water to make l,000 m~
pH at 25 ~C 5.5 Stabilizing solution Formalin (37 ~) 0.1 g Formalin-sulfite addition product 0.7 g 5-Chloro-2-methyl-isothiazoline-3-one 0.02 g 2-Methyl-4-isothiazoline-3-one 0.01 g Copper sulfate 0.005 g Water to make 1,000 m~
pH at 25 ~C 4.0 Specimens 401 to 403 thus obtained were than processed in the same manner as in Example 3 with the color negative film shown in Example 3 as a color print original to obtain a color mixing degree ~-i = 15 and an average color mixing degree r (Y, i = 16). The results are shown in Table 6.
The results show that Specimens 402 and 403 exhibit an excellent color reproducibility.
SpecimenName of color ~i r 401 (Comparative)16 Y 0.47 0.14 402 16 Y 0.46 0.12 403 16 Y 0.40 0.11 404 16 Y 0.38 0.10 EX~PLE 5 Specimen 404 was prepared in the same manner as in Specimen 403 except in that the silver halide emulsion (Br: 80 moQ%) to be incorporated in the 1st layer was replaced by the silver halide emulsion A (Br: 0.5 moQ%) used in Example 2 and the silver halide emulsion B
(Br: 1.0 moQ%) used in Example 2 was incorporated in the 3rd layer.
In the same manner as in Specimen 403 in Example 4, the color mixing degree ~i = 16 and the average color mixing degree r of Specimen 104 were determined. The results are shown in Table 6. The results show that distinction between orange yellow and lemon yellow and the reproduc-tion of sharp green are improved.
Preparation of photographing color light-sensitive material A multilayer color light-sensitive material specimen 601 was prepared by coating various layers of Example 1 or an undercoated cellulose triacetate film support in the same manner as in Example 1.
Preparation of Specimen 602 Specimen 602 was prepared in the same manner as in Specimen 601 except in that the yellow colloidal silver to be incorporated in the 10th layer was replaced by Compound C shown below as a comparative compound in an amount of 0.2 g.
Compound C
~ C= CH ~ /CHzCOOC4Hs(n).
CH3SO2~H ~ C ~ ~ \ CH2COOC4H9(n) (Yellow dye as described in Japanese Patent Appli-cation (OPI) No. 205,934/86) Color development of photographing color light-sensitive material was carried out according to the same procedure as in Example 1.
Color negative films were prepared in the same manner as in Example 3 except in that the color light-sensitive material for use in photographing was replaced by Specimens 601 and 602. These color negative films were then used as print originals.
The images on these print originals were then printed on Specimen 404 of Example 5 as a printing light-sensitive material with the multilayer dielectric-deposited filter of Example 3 mounted in Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.'s automatic color printer Type FAP-3500 to obtain color prints. The results are shown in Table 7.
Specimen i Name of color ~i r 601 16 Y 0.25 0.09 602 16 Y 0.22 0.07 When a color negative light-sensitive material comprising a filter layer was used in combination with the above described filter, the average color mixing degree was further lowered, attaining an excellent color reproducibility.
A photographing multilayer color light-sensitive material specimen 701 was prepared by coating various layers of the undermentioned compositions on an under-coated cellulose triacetate film support.
Preparation of color light-sensitive material for use in photographing Composition of light-sensitive layer The value of the coated amount of each component is represented in g/m . The coated amount of silver halide is represented in terms of amount of sil~er. The coated amount of sensitizing dye is represented by molar amount 133~92 thereof per 1 moQ of silver halide contained in the same layer.
Specimen 701 1st layer (antihalation layer) Black colloidal silver 0.18 Gelatin . 0.40 2nd layer (intermediate layer) 2,5~ t-pentadecyl hydroquinone 0.18 EX-l 0-07 EX-3 0.02 U-l 0.06 U-2 0.0~
U-3 0.10 HBS-l 0.10 HBS-2 a .02 Gelatin 1.04 3rd layer (lst red-sensitive emulsion layer) Monodisperse emulsion of silver bromoiodide (AgI content:
6 mo~ %; average particle diameter: 0.6 ~m; coefficient of fluctuation in particle diameter: 0.15) 0.55 Sensitizing dye I 6.9 x 10 5 Sensitizing dye II 1.8 x lO
Sensitizing dye III 3.1 x lO
133~192 Sensitizing dye IV 4.0 x 10 5 EX-2 0,350 HBS-l 0.005 EX-10 0.020 Gelatin 1.20 4th layer (2nd red-sensitive emulsion layer) Emulsion of tabular particulate silver bromoiodide (AgI
content: 10 mo~ ~; average particle diameter: 0.7 ~m; average aspect ratio: 5.5; average thickness: 0.2 ~m) 1.0 Sensltizing dye I 5.1 x 10 5 Sensitizing dye II 1.4 x 10 5 Sensitizing dye III 2.3 x 10 Sensitizing dye IV 3.0 x 10 5 EX-10 0.015 Gelatin 1.30 5th layer (3rd red-sensitive emulsion layer) Silver bromoiodid~ emulsion (AgI content: 16 mo~ %; average particle diameter: 1.1 ~m) 1.60 Sensitizing dye IX 5.4 x 10 5 Sensitizing dye II 1.4 x 10 Sensitizing dye III 2.4 x 10 4 Sensitizing dye IV 3.1 x 10 EX-3 0.240 EX-4 0.120 HBS-l 0.22 HBS-2 0.10 Gelatin 1.63 6th layer (intermediate layer) HBS-l 0.020 EX-12 0.004 Gelatin 0.80 7th layer (lst green-sensitive emulsion layer) Emulsion of tabular particulate silver bromoiodide (AgI
content: 6 moQ %; average particle diameter: 0.6 ~m; average aspect ratio: 6.0; average thickness: 0.15) 0.40 Sensitizing dye V 3.0 x 10 5 Sensitizing dye VI 1.0 x 10 Sensitizing dye VII 3.8 x 10 4 EX-6 0.260 EX-l - 0.021 EX-7 0.030 EX-8 0.025 ~ 211 -1~391~
HBS-l 0.100 HBS-4 0.010 Gelatin 0.75 8th layer (2nd green-sensitive emulsion layer) Monodisperse emulsion of silver bromoiodide (AgI content: 9 mo~ %; average particle diameter: 0.7 ~m; coefficient of fluctuation in particle diameter: 0.18) 0.80 Sensitizing dye V 2.1 x 10 5 Sensitizing dye VI 7.0 x 10 5 Sensitizing dye VII 2.5 x 10 4 EX-6 0.180 EX-8 0.010 EX-l 0.008 EX-7 0.012 HBS-l 0.160 HBS-4 0.008 Gelatin 1.10 9th layer (3rd green-sensitive emulsion layer) Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AgI content:12 mo~ %; average particle diameter:l.0 l~m) 0.77 Sensitizing dye V 3.5 x 10 5 Sensitizing dye VI 8.0 x 10 5 Sensitizing dye VII 3.0 x 10 4 EX-6 0.065 EX-ll 0.030 EX-l - 0.025 HBS-l 0.25 HBS-2 0.10 Gelatin 1.74 10th layer (yellow filter layer) Yellow colloidal silver 0.05 EX-5 0.08 Gelatin o.g5 11th layer (lst blue-sensitive emulsion layer) Emulsion of tabular particulate silver bromoiodide (AgI
content: 6 mo~ %; average particle diameter: 0.6 ~m; average aspect ratio: 5.7; average thickness: 0.15 l~m) 0.24 Sensitizing dye VIII 3.5 x 10 EX-9 0.85 EX-8 0.12 HBS-l 0.28 Gelatin '- 1.28 12th layer (2nd blue-sensitive emulsion layer) Monodisperse emulsion of silver bromoiodide (AgI content: 10 mo~ ~; average particle diameter: 0.8 ~m; coefficient of fluctuation in particle diameter: 0.16) 0.45 Sensitizing dye VIII 2.1 x 10 4 133gl92 13th layer (3rd blue-sensitive emulsion layer) Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AgI content: 14 mo~ %; average particle diameter: 1.3 ~m) 0.77 Sensitizing dye VIII 2.2 x 10 EX-9 0.20 HBS-l 0.07 Gelatin 0.69 14th layer (lst protective layer) Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AgI content: 1 mo~ %; average particle diameter: 0.07 ~m) 0.5 U-4 0.11 U-5 0.17 HBS-l 0 90 Gelatin 1.00 15th layer (2nd protective layer) Particulate polymethyl acrylate (particle diameter: about 1.5 ~m) 0.54.
S-l 0.15 Gelatin 0.72 Besides the above described components, a gelatin hardener H-l and a surface active agent were incorporated in each layer.
- 214 ~
cè~N ' -~4Hg(t) C 4Hg(t) OH
I~N,N~
C4Hg (t) OH C4Hg (sec) /N~
C4Hg (t) I
CH 2 -Cl CH2 -Cl ,, , ; O
( CH2 ) 2 ' CX3~Cx C~ COO
CN
0.7 '0.3 N-CH=CH-CH=C~
~,C3Hl, ~JC.~2CO~.-H Q N=N~ocn3 t C 5 ~ CO~
N~ N,bo c~ce ce OH
~CONH(CH2 ) 30C 1 2H2 5(I ) (i)C 4H 90CONH
OH
~ ~ CONHC 1 2H2 5 ( ), IGH2CHZO~N N~
SO3Na . SO3Na,, _ ~.17 --OH t ~CONH ( CH2 ) 3 OC 1 2H2 5 (i)C 4 H g OCONH O C H 2 CH 2 SCH 2 COOH
OH NHCOC l 5 H 3 ~NHCO ~
NHCOC 1 sH3, (i) OH
C'~3 C~'2-C ,N CH2-Cn CH2-CX
~ N ~i ~ COOC4Hg, ~
CONH ~ 2s~ , ~ N o ce~ce Average molecular weight 30,000 .~ . .
ce ~ . ~50 NH ~ ~NHCOC ( CH 3 ) 3 ~2H5 / N ~
~-OCHCONH~' ce~o~fce (n)Cl 5H3 1 ~
ce Cl H3 CH3 (n)Cl 2H2 50COCHOCO~_~ COOCHCOOCl 2H2 5(n) ~NHCOC~CONH~
ce ce N~ 3}
133~192 X -- Q
CCOC 1 2-~-2 CH3 O ~ COCHCONH~
o~N~=O Ce C H )-- \
OH
,~MHCOC3F7 (n) (t)C5Hl 1 ~OCH2CONH
(tJc5Hl I HO~
HOJ~NHCOC3H7 (n) N~
N~S
l339l92 (tJCsHl l~OCHCO.
(t)C5Hl 1 CONH~
N'N~O
ce~? ce ce~' N ~-C~I-CH ,l~ce O ' . O
N-CH3 HNJ!~NH
~ \ I
E~N NH CH2--CH2 -- ;~22 --H B S - 1: Tric ecyl ph~sphzte H B S - 2: Dibutyl phthalz~e H B S - 3: Bis(2-ethyle,~yl)phthalate C2H~
(t) CsHl l~OCHCO~H~H
~ (t)C5 CH 2 zCH-SO 2 -CH 2 CONH--CH2 CH 2 ZC~-SO 2 ~CH2 -CONH-CH 2 sensitizing dye ¢~S~ CH C CH=< ~
(CH2 ) 4SO3~ (CH2 ) 3SO3Na CH=~,-CH=
(Gh2)3SO3~
(CH2 )3SO3Na m ce J~E,~CH=C-CH~ ~ce (CH2)3SO36 , I
(CH2 ) 3SO3Na ' A~
- C~ =CH-CH=N~
C 2Hs . ~
-- 2~4 --133~192 C2Hs f~ ~-CH-C-CH=< ~CH3 N~CH3 (CH2 ) 2S~3~ l (CH2 )4S03K
~CH--CH-CH=<
C2H5 (CH2 ) 4S03 C2Hs J~C~CEleC-CH=< ~"Ce (C~2 ) 2S~3~ (CH2 ) 3SC3K
13~9192 ,~
.~ CH--~N~''Ce ( CH2 ) 4S03(~ (CH2 ) 4S03X
S C2Hs o ~3 (CH2 ) 3So36 (CH2 ) 4SO3Na Specimens 702 and 703 were prepared in the same manner as in Specimen 701 except in that EX-6 was replaced by VII-(2) and X-(7) was used as shown in Table 8.
(EX-2, EX-4 and EX-7 are couplers according to the present invention.) Specimen 702 Specimen 703 7th layer VIII-(2) 0.25 "
8th layer VIII-(2) 0.20 "
9th layer VIII-(2) 0.08 "
11th layer - EX-9 0.40 X-(7) 0.50 12th layer - EX-9 0.10 X-(7) 0.10 An object comprising a Macbeth grey color chart (No. 22) and a fresh flower (e.g. chrysanthemum or palm leaf) was photographed on these light-sensitive material specimens by means of a light source having a color temperature of about 5,400 ~K.
These specimens were then subjected to the follow-ing color development to obtain color negative films (print originals).
Color development of color light-sensitive material for use in photographing is carried out according to the same procedure as in Example 1.
- 2~7 -Preparation of multilayer color printing light-sensitive material A multilayer color photographic paper specimen 801 was prepared by coating various layers of the undermentioned compositions on a paper support laminated with polyethy-lene on both sides thereof.
Preparation of 1st layer coating solution 19.1 g of a yellow coupler (ExY) and 4.4 g of a dye stabilizer (Cpd-l) were dissolved in 27.2 cc of ethyl acetate and 7.7 cc of a solvent (Solv-l). The solution thus obtained was then emulsion-dispersed in 18.5 cc of a 10% aqueous solution of gelatin containing 8 cc of 10%
sodium dodecylbenzenesulfonate. On the other hand, a blue-sensitive sensitizing dye of the undermentioned general formula was added to a silver bromochloride emulsion (cont~in;ng 80.0 moQ% of silver bromide and 70 g/kg of Ag) in an amount of 5.0 x 10 moQ per 1 moQ
of silver. The emulsion dispersion and the emulsion thus obtained were mixed to prepare the 1st layer coating solution having the undermentioned composition. The coat-ing solutions for the 2nd layer to the 7th layer were similarly prepared. As a gelatin hardener for each layer there was used sodium l-oxy-3,5-dichloro-s-triazine.
As sensitizing dyes for the various layers there were used the following compounds:
Blue-sensitive emulsion layer Compound I-(l) (5.0 x 10 moQ per 1 moQ of silver halide) Green-sensitive emulsion layer Compound III-(9) (4.0 x 10 moQ per 1 moQ of silver halide);
and Compound III-(8) (7.0 x 10 moQ per 1 moQ of silver halide) Red-sensitive emulsion layer Compound IV-(8) (0.9 x 10 4 moQ per 1 moQ of silver halide) Compound I-(9) was incorporated in the red-sensitive emulsion layer in an amount of 2.6 x 10 3 moQ per 1 moQ
of silver halide.
1-(5-Methylureidephenyl)-5-mercaptotetrazole was incorporated in the blue-sensitive emulsion layer, the green-sensitive emulsion layer and the red-sensitive emulsion layer in amounts of 4.0 x 10-6 moQ, 3.0 x 10-5 moQ and 1.0 x 10 moQ per 1 moQ of silver halide, respectively.
4-Hydroxy-6-methyl-1,3,3a,7-tetrazaindene was incorporated in the blue-sensitive emulsion layer and the green-sensitive emulsion layer in amounts of 1.2 x 10 2 moQ and 1.1 x 10 2 moQ per 1 moQ of silver halide, respectively.
- 2~9 -For the purpose of inhibiting irradiation, the dyes used in Example 2 were incorporated in the emulsion layer.
Layer construction The composition of the various layers is the same as in Example 2.
Specimen 802 was prepared in the same manner as in Specimen 801 except in that the silver halide emulsion (Br: 80 moQ%) to be incorporated in the 1st layer was replaced by the silver halide emulsion A (Br: 0.5 moQ%) used in Example 2 shown below and the undermentioned silver halide emulsion B used in Example 2 (Br: 1.0 moQ%) was incorporated in the 3rd layer.
ExY, ExM or ExC as used in Example 8 is a suitable color coupler which can be used in the present invention.
Specimens 801 and 802 were then exposed to light by means of a spectral photographing machine which had been corrected so as to give the same spectral energy intensity of the light source. These specimens were then subjected to the same color development as in Example 2, except for adjusting pH value of blix being 5.5.
The results thus obtained are shown in Figure l-(c).
Curve 1 was obtained from Specimen 801, and Curve 2 was obtained from Specimen 802. J indicates the maximum spectral sensitivity showing the characteristics of a J
type spectral sensitization and an M type sensitization.
- ~30 -The images on the color negative films obtained from Specimens 701 and 702 in Example 7 were then printed on Specimen 801 and Specimen 802 by means of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.'s Autoprinter Type FAP-35000. These specimens were then subjected to the following color development B.
Color development B
Processing Supply Tank step Temp. Time amount* Volume Color development38~C1 min. 40 sec. 290 mQ 17 Q
Blix 33~C40 sec. 100 mQ 9 Q
Rinse 1 30-34~C15 sec. - 4 Q
Rinse 2 " " - 4 Q
Rinse 3 " " Shown in 4 Q
Table 9 Drying 70-80~C50 sec.
* Value per 1 m2 of light-sensitive material (The rinse was effected in a countercurrent process in which water flows from the tank 3 to the tank 1 through the tank 2.) ** The amount of solution carried over from the pre-bath was 30 mQ/m2.) The composition of the processing solutions used in the various steps were as follows:
1339~3~
Color developing solution Tank Supply solution liquid Water 800 mQ 800 mQ
Diethylenetriaminepenta-acetic acid 1.0 g 1.0 g Nitrotriacetic l-hydroxy-ethylidene-l,l-diphosphonic acid 2.0 g 2.0 g Potassium bromide 0.5 g Potassium Carbonate 30 g 30 g N-ethyl-N-(~-methanesulfon-amideethyl)-3-methyl-4-amino-aniline sulfate 5.5 g 7.5 g N,N-diethylhydroxylamine 3.6 g 5.5 g Fluorescent brightening agent1.5 g 2.0 g Triethylenediamine(1,4-diaza-bicyclo[2,2,2Joctane 5.0 g 5.0 g Water to make 1,000 mQ 1,000 mQ
pH at 25~C 10.20 10.060 Blix solution Tank Supply solution liquid Water 400 mQ 400 mQ
Ammonium thiosulfate (70%) 200 mQ 300 mQ
Sodium sulfite 20 g 40 g Ferric ammonium ethylenediamine-tetraacetate 60 g 120 g Disodium ethylenediaminetetra-acetate 5 g 10 g Tank Supply solution liquid Water to make 1,000 mQ 1,000 mQ
pH at 25~C
Aqueous ammonia and water were used to give a pH
as shown in Tables 9-1 and 9-2.
Rinsing solution Water which had been passed through an ion exchange resin (calcium and magnesium content: 3 ppm or less each) was used.
The specimens thus developed were then observed for the degree of stain on the resulting images and background. The results are shown in Table 9-1.
_ ~33 -1339192 r a) r a ~
5~ o ~ ~ 3 o ~ , ~ ~
r r o ~ r ~ a _ . 1 u r ~ ~ ~ r;~ s s~ r e V~ O ~ o o ~ o ~ _ o a P~ u ~ r VJ ~ 4 O
r O x O u 3 ~ 3 r ~ s~ O O ~) O ~ ~ O O .r O e ~ e ~ o h :~
r-~~ e ~ o h h f~ U O
h h _ -- _ _ _ _ _ _ z v~
V~
U~ o - ~ o o o o o o o o r~ ui ~ J
a~
r. ~ ~ , J * .,1 .
V, r ~ ~ J r~ U
c ~r~ u~
v~,~ O oooo oo~ --a c~ z zzzz zz~
~ r4 ~ r--Q~ r--C r~ S
C 4 ~ ~r rJ C -- _ _ -- -- -- -- -- rJ ~ --C Ir~ oooo ~oo 1~'., c o r. r I rn~ r~ I
r~ -- _ _ ~ r ~ .-u a) ;~ r.. ~l ~ ~ ~ l v r, V~ a~ o--qv~ u, c l o r.
r~ . s, h * . .~1 r,--rn ~ ~ I X ~
J; ~ ri Vl ~ ~) ~ r3 _I O O O O O O tl) O V~
;4 ~ ~ R Z Z Z Z Z Z ~ Z ~ V
r, o ~ c~ v e ~ _, r~ o C
l~ ~1 ~ tl rrJ
Po r.
~., r. r r, v~ .
a) c~ , o u v, . ~-~1 r v J o ~ v~ rn v~ v~ v~
~1) ~1 .5 ~ r-- rt a.~
O ~ ~ ~ Z Z Z ~ ~_ ~C
v~ _ *
o z _I ~I rr~ ~ Ul ~D ' r~ oo Specimens prepared in the same manner as in Spe-cimens 4, 6, 7 and 8 except in that the fluorescent brightening agent XI-(2) was replaced by XI-(l), XI-(2), XI-(4), XI-(5) or I-(6) were subjected to the same color development. As a result, the similar effect of stain removal was observed.
The processing No. 9 was then effected in the same manner as in the processing No. 3 except in that the fluorescent brightening agent XI-(2) was replaced by Compound A of the following general formula:
Compound A
NaO 3S (CH2 ) 3NH ~~ ~
The processing Nos. 10 and 11 were effected with Compound XI-(10) or a 1 : 1 mixture of Compound XI-(10) and Compound XI-(2). The results are shown in Table 2-2.
.,, o U~
~ o .,, ~ C~
~ ~, r r O
o o ~
U~
_I ~ ~ o ~
--~ o _ _ _ U~
~ ~ o o o rn u. ~ r' U~
u~ ~r O ~
O
J
~, : L ~ '.
O O O
r~ C t~l ~ Z Z Z
C~ , ,1 p U
r~
~, _ C O O o o - ~ I In u~ In C r~ ~ O--,~ x--, - ~1 ~-,1 a ~ o o o i~ ~ Q Q Z Z Z
4~ J tJ~ _ O - ~ p r _l _l ~ C ~
~ r~
- 1 -- ~ C I ~ -- --, _ _ (- _ - O O O
a a,_ ~ _, _, ~, : ~ P~ o ~ _ _ _ U o ~I Q ~ ~ H H H
O ~ O
If a continuous processing (1 m or more) is effected without supplying a blix solution or rinsing solution, an increase in stain is generally observed.
However, even in such a condition, the processing Nos.
3, 10 and llgive a relatively small increase in stain.
The most excellent results were obtained.
The effective spectral sensitive energy distribu-tion Eb(~), Eg(~) or Er(A) obtained when a grey object was photographed on the color printing light-sensitive materials used in the previous example in combination with the color negative films used in the previous example as shown in Table 10 is shown in Figs. 2-(c), 3-(c), 4-(c) and 5-(c). Fig. 2-(c) shows that in the combination of Specimen 701 and Specimen 701 Er(~) is independent but Eg(~) and Eb(~) are independent. Figs.
3-(c) and 4-(c) show that Er(~) and Eg(~) are independent but Eb(~) is not independent. Fig. 5-(c) shows that Er(~), Eg(~) and Eb(~) are all independent.
- 237 ~
U U U U
C
c ... ... ... ...
w U~ U~ U~ U~
~D
o ~,1 ~ o o o o v ~d ~ D ~D ID ID
a o ~ U~
~D o o D VJ t' D ~D
~ ~ Vl-~ ., _ O C ~
J _ ~D D a O O VJ ~
C~ g U. U~
zl 1339l92 The images on the color negative films obtained from the photographing color light-sensitive material specimens 701 and 702 of Example 7 were printed on the color printing lisht-sensitive material specimens 801 and 802 in the same manner as in Example 9. These spe-cimens were then subjected to the color development process B No. 3 to obtain color prints. These specimens were observed by the naked eye for the photographic properties. The results are shown in Table 11. On the other hand, the representation of green leaf of natural cycad and yellow chrysanthemum flower in CIE (L* a* b*) color specification system (as described in Nihon Shikisai Gakkai, "Shikisai Kagak~ Handbook" (5th ed., 1985, pp.
140-141)) gave the results shown in Figure 6-(c). The results show that saturation and lightness are improved for yellow, particularly for green, and color fidelity is remarkably improved.
..
~ O O O
.~
3 ~
-- O
a s~
~ ~ O O ~ ~
cn V' s~
- X ~ ~, .; ~ O O O
.,, : :
_I ~ ~
~- ~ o ~ ~.,, a C!1 J
O 0 ~3 U~
O ~r O (~
~ ~n o o o o O rl ~ ~
O ~ B
o o o o ~ I~ I' 1' 1 o , ~ ~ F E~
CJ C~ U C) U. U~ U U~
On the other hand, these specimens were exposed to light through a sharp cutoff filter I as shown in Fig. 7-(c) (wavelength band longer than 440 nm is cut) or a sharp band stop filter II as shown in Fig. l-(d) (wavelength band of 490-530 nm is cut; ~1/4/W3/4: 0.67) and then developed in the same manner as described above to obtain color prints. The results are shown in Table 12 and Fig. 6-(c).
Color Color printing Filter negative light-sensitive used Point in film used material used I II Fig. 6 Specimen 701 Specimen 801 None None " " None Used " " Used Used Specimen 702 Specimen 801 None None "" None Used "Specimen 802 None None " " None Used " " Used Used ~ (almost corresponds to ~ ) Thus, the use of the sharp band cut-off filter II
gives an improvement in the saturation, lightness and hue fidelity of yellow, green and violet color systems.
In particular, the incorporation of a pyrazoloazole coupler represented by the general formula (VIII) in a photographing color light-sensitive material and a color printing light-sensitive material exhibited further improvement in saturation and fidelity of red color system.
E (~) of the color printing light-sensitive materials obtained when the filters I and II were used in Table 12 (No. 8) is shown in Fig. 8-(c). Fig. 8-(c) shows that Er (~), Eg (~) and Eb (~) are all independent.
Specimen 703 obtained in Example 7 was used to replace Specimen 102 in Examples 10 and 11. As a result, an improvement in color reproducibility was observed similarly.
E ~ ~LE 13 A polished white glass plate having a thickness of 3 mm was cleaned with soapy water. After being dried, the glass plate was then ultrasonically cleaned in a liquid fleon in an ultrasonic cleaner for 1 minute and 30 seconds. The glass plate thus treated was later used as a substrate for deposited film interference filter. The glass plate was then mounted on a substrate holder in an electron beam heating type evaporator.
One of two evaporation sources was provided with 20 g of pelletized silicon oxide and the other was provided with 20 g of aluminum oxide. The evaporator was pre-evacuated for 10 minutes by a rotary pump, and then evacuated by an oil diffusion pump for 20 minutes so that the pressure therein reached 2 x 10 5 torr.
Then, silicon oxide and aluminum oxide were alternately evaporated. The substrate was kept at a temperature of about 350~C by a halogen lamp in the tank during evapora-tion. Silicon oxide was heated by an electron beam of 5 KV and 30 mA for 6 minutes, and aluminum oxide was heated by an electron beam of 5 KV and 250 mA for 8 minutes. The thickness of the film thus deposited was controlled while being observed by an optical monitor.
In such a manner, Filter Specimens 1 and 2 having thick-nesses as shown in Table 13 were prepared. These inter-ference filters thus ~repared were then measured for properties by Hitachi's Type 307 Spectrophotometer.
The spectral transmittance curves thus determined are shown in Figs. l-(d) and 2-(d).
_ rn -- -- _ I I
~
~4 ~I' O
~ ~ ~ -erO O O
.5 ~D _ ~J-- C S~
3 ~ 3 n _ ~ / /D -I
a ~ ~ D
't r E~ ~ ~ ~ ~
O ~ ~ I
O ~Z
~ /D
C
o O
E~/D ~ ~n , ~-, n S /D O o o I C
n /D ~1 'CR ~ D ~~1 o~ ~7 ,_1 ~- ~ O
G ~I Z --I
/D
C ~
O ~_ CJ ~-1 1 ~
o r~o a~ o D ~ O u~O ~D o ,~-, n o ~ o~ o u~
u~~ S ~n ~ ~ ~ -,~ I /D O O o o O O
C
5 ~D
a ., ~, ~4 L
~Q
On the other hand, a filter having a structure shown in Fig. 5 in U.S. Patent No. 2,997,389 was prepared in the vacuum evaporation process to obtain Filter Specimen A.
Filter Specimens A and 1 were then scratched on the surface thereof with the tip of an aluminum diecast of the same material as the insertion holder for band stop filter under substantially the same pressure. Furthermore, these filter specimens were rubbed on the surface thereof with a dust-covered cloth. As a result, Specimen A had scratches on the surface thereof while Specimen 1 had no scratches on the surface thereof. Thus, it is obvious that Specimen 1 is excellent in scratch resistance as compared to Specimen A.
When Filter Specimen A was allowed to stand in the atmosphere at an elevated temperature of 100 to 200~C
while being irradiated with light, ZnS on the surface thereof was oxidized, lowering the transmittance thereof.
This discolored the filter.
When Filter Specimens 1 and 2 were allowed to stand at a temperature of 150~C for 1 hour, there were observed no practical changes in spectral characteristics. There were observed no practical problems in scratch resistance, light resistance and heat resistance.
13391~2 A Macbeth's color chart, a man, and a natural flower were photographed as objects on a 135-size color negative light-sensitive material (Fuji Color SUPER HR 100) under a 5,500~K light source. The color negative light-sensitive material was subjected to CN-16 standard color develop-ment to obtain a color negative film. The images on the color negative film were then printed on Fuji Color Super HR Paper by means of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.'s Auto-printer Type 3500 with a band stop filter according to the present invention interposed between the light source in the autoprinter and the negative filter. For comparison, printing was effected in the same manner as described above except in that no band stop filter was interposed between the light source and the color negative film.
These color papers were then subjected to CP-2 standard color development to obtain color prints.
The color prints obtained with Band Stop Filter Specimen 1 or 2 showed remarkable improvements in fidelity in color reproduction and saturation, particularly of green or yellow system as compared to the color prints obtained without such a filter.
Specimen 3 was prepared in the same manner as in Specimen 1 of Example 13 except in that the film thick-ness and the number of layers were changed (See Table 13).
The spectral transmittance curve of Specimen 3 is shown in Fig. 3-(d).
The same objects as used in Example 13 were photo-graphed on Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.'s Fujichrome lOOD
(135-size). The light-sensitive material was then subjected to CR-56P standard color reversal development to obtain a transparent positive film.
The images on the transparent positive film were then printed on Fuji Color Print by means of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.'s Autoprinter Type 8C 6910 II with Filter Specimen 3 interposed between the light source and the film original and disposed close to the light source.
The light-sensitive material was then subjected to RP-303 -st~ rd color reversal development to obtain a color print. For comparison, printing was effected in the same manner as described above except in that Filter Specimen 3 was not used. Thus, a comparative color print was obtained.
The color print obtained with Band Stop Filter Specimen 3 according to the present invention showed an excellent color reproducibility, and remarkable improve-ment in the saturation of a red system as compared to the color print obtained without such a filter.
A color print was obtained in the same manner as described above except in that Filter Specimen 1 was used in combination with Specimen 3. The color print thus prepared showed remarkable improvements in the fidelity in color reproduction of a green system and the saturation of a red system.
While the invention has been described in detail and with reference to specific embodiments thereof, it will be apparent to one skilled in the art that various changes and modifications can be made therein without departing from the spirit and scope thereof.
active agent 13. Antistatic agent Page 27 "
Examples of suitable supports which can be used in the present invention are described on page 28 of Research Disclosure No. 17,643 and from the right column on page 647 to the left column on page 648 in Research Disclosure No. 18,716.
The printed color printing light-sensitive material according to the present invention may be preferably subjected to color development, blix, rinse and/or stabilization. Typical examples of processing steps will be described hereinafter, but the present invention should not be construed as being limited thereto. The term "blix" as used herein means a so-called blix in which bleaching and fixing are simultaneously proceeded or a process in which bleaching and fixing are separately .proceeded 1. Color development - blix -¦rinse¦
2. Color development - blix -¦rinse¦-stabilization 3. Color development - bleaching - blix -¦rinse¦-4. Color development - bleaching - blix -Irinsel-Stabilization 5. Color development - rinse - blix -¦rinse¦-6. Color development - fixing - blix -Irinse¦-stabilization 7. Black-and-white development -rinse - color development - blix -¦rinse¦
8. Black-and-white development rinse - color development - rinse - blix -¦rinse¦
The above describedIrinsel step may be replaced by the stabilizing step. The supply amount of the processing solution is 3 to 50 times the amount of the processing solution carried over from the pre-bath.
In recent years, as the time for processing of a color printing light-sensitive material has been shortened, and the time for continuous processing has been prolonged, the color printing light-sensitive material according to the present invention may be susceptible to dye leaving, poor desilvering, and stain.
The color developing solution to be used in the present invention may comprise any suitable known aromatic primary amine color developing agent. A preferred example of such an aromatic primary amine color developing agent is a p-phenylenediamine derivative. Typical examples of such a p-phenylenediamine derivative will be shown hereinafter, but the present invention should not be construed as being limited thereto.
D-l: N,N-diethyl-p-phenylenediamine D-2: 2-Amino-5-diethylaminotoluene D-3: 2-Amino-5-(N-ethyl-N-laurylamino)toluene D-4: 4-[N-ethyl-N-(B-hydroxyethyl)amino]aniline D-5: 2-Methyl-4-[N-ethyl-N-[B-hydroxy-ethyl)amino]aniline D-6: 4-Amino-3-methyl-N-ethyl-N-[B-(methanesul--fonamide)ethyl]aniline D-7: N-(2-amino-5-diethylaminophenylethyl)meth-anesulfonamide D-8: N,N-dimethyl-p-phenylenediamine D-9: 4-Amino-3-methyl-N-ethyl-N-methoxyethyl-aniline D-10: 4-Amino-3-methyl-N-ethyl-N-B-ethoxyethyl-aniline D-ll: 4-Amino-3-methyl-N-ethyl-N-B-butoxyethyl-aniline Particularly preferred amon~ these p-phenylenedi-amine derivatives is 4-amino-3-methyl-N-ethyl-N-[B-(methanesulfonamide)ethyl]-aniline (exemplary compound D-6).
These p-phenylenediamine derivatives may be salts such as sulfates, hydrochloride, sulfites, and p-toluenesulfonates. The amount of such an aromatic primary amine developing agent to be used is preferably in the range of about 0.1 to about 20 g, particularly about 0.5 to about 10 g per 1 e of developing solution.
The present color developing solution may optionally comprise any suitable development accelerator.
However, the present color developing solution preferably doesn't contain benzyl alcohol in the light of pollution, facility in solution preparation, and fog inhibition. In particular, the present color developing solution may contain benzyl alcohol in an amount of S ml or less, preferably 2 ml or less per 1 e thereof. Preferably, the present color developing solution is free of benzyl alcohol.
The present color developing solution may optionally comprise any other preservatives such as sulfite, e.g., sodium sulfite, potassium sulfite, sodium bisulfite, potassium bisulfite, sodium metabisulfite, and potassium methasulfite, and carbonyl-sulfite addition product. The added amount of such a preservative is in the range of 0 to 20 g/e, preferably 0 to 5 s/e. If the preservability of the color developing solution thus prepared can be fully attained, the added amount of such a preservative is preferably less.
~ 1339192 If the color developing solution contains a small amount of sulfite ion, the color developing capability thereof can be improved without increasing the used amount of silver halide or color couplers. On the other hand, it is known that the reduction in the sulfite ion content increases color stain and deteriorates color reproducibility. However, the present color image formation process using compounds represented by formula (XI) enables a processing which causes less color stain and provides an excellent color developing capability.
Sulfite ion may serve as a solvent for a silver halide emulsion having a high chlorine content (high silver chloride content emulsion), causing a remarkable reduction in the concentration of sulfite ion. If the sulfite ion concentration in the color developing solution varies due to the above described effect, the photographic properties, particularly printer conditions in the case of a printing light-sensitive materiàl, show a continuous change.
In the present invention, the substantial absence of sulfite ion may be preferably compensated by the incorporation of an organic preservative as described hereinafter.
In other words, the incorporation of such an organic preservative can stabilize the color developing '~ 1339192 solution and improve color mixture inhibition without deteriorating the color developing capability.
An organic preservative can be used in the present invention is an organic compound which reduces the speed of deterioration of an aromatic primary amine color developing agent when incorporated in a solution for the processing of a color photographic light-sensitive material. In other words, such an organic compound serves to inhibit oxidation of a color developing agent by air.
Particularly useful examples of such an organic preservative include hydroxylamines, hydroxams, hydrazines, hydrazides, phenols, ~-hydroxyketones, ~-aminoketones, saccharides, monoamines, diamines, polyamines, quaternary ammonium salts, nitroxy radicals, alcohols, oximes, diamide compounds, and condensed ring amines.
As compounds for directly preserving the above described color developing agent there may be preferably used various hydroxylamines, hydroxamic acids as described in Japanese Patent Application No. 186,559/86, hydrazines and hydrazides as described in Japanese Patent Application No. 186,559/86, hydrazines and hydrazides as described in Japanese Patent Application No. 170,756/86, phenols as described in Japanese Patent Application Nos. 188,742/86, and 203,253/86, ~-hydroxyketones and ~-aminoketones as described in Japanese Patent Application No. 188,741/86, and various saccharides as described in Japanese Patent Application No. 180,616/86. Examples of Compounds which can be used in combination with these compounds include monoamines as described in Japanese Patent Application Nos. 147,823/86, 166,674/86, 165,621/86, 164,515/86, 170,789/86, and 168,159/86, diamines as described in Japanese Patent Application Nos. 173,595/86, 164,515/86, and 186,560/86, polyamines as described in Japanese Patent Application Nos. 165,621/86, 169,789/86, and 188,619/86, nitroxy radicals as described in Japanese Patent Application No. 197,760/86, alcohols as described in Japanese Patent Application Nos. 186,561/86, and 197,419/86, oxims as described in Japanese Patent Application No. 198,987/86, and tertiary amines as described in Japanese Patent Application No. 265,149/86.
The present color developing solution may also contain an agent for restoring or capturing oxidation product of color developing agent as described in Japanese Patent Application No. 259,799/86. Other examples of preservatives which may be optionally incorporated in the present color developing solution include various metals as described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos.
44,148/82, and 53,749/82, salicylic acids as described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 180,588/84, - 133919~
alkanolamines as described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI No. 3,532/79 and Japanese Patent Publication 57,586/85, polyethyleneimines as described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 94,349/81, and aromatic polyhydroxy compounds as described in U.S. Patent No.
3,746,544. Particularly preferred among these compounds are aromatic polyhydroxy compounds.
The color developing solution to be used in the present invention preferably has a pH value of 9 to 12, particularly 9 to 11Ø The present color developing solution may contain compounds which constitute known developing solutions.
In order to maintain the above specified pH value, various buffering agents may be preferably used. As such buffering agents there may be used carbonates, phosphates, borates, tetraborates, hydroxybenzoates, glycine salts, N,N-dimethylglycine salts, leucine salts, norleucine salts, guanine salts, 3,4-dihydroxyphenyl-alanine salts, alanine salts, aminobutyrates, 2-amino-2-methyl-1,3-propanediolates, valine salts, proline salts, trishydroxyaminomethane salts, or lysine salts. Partic-ularly, carbonates, phosphates, tetraborates, and hydroxybenzoates are excellent in solubility and buffering action at a high pH range of 9.0 or more. When these salts are added to a color developing solution, they don't 13391g2 exert any bad inf luence upon photographic properties, e . g ., fog inhibition. These salts are inexpensive . In the light of such advantages, these salts may be particularly preferably used.
The amount of such a buffering agent to be incorporated in the color developing solution is preferably in the range of 0.1 mol/ or more, particularly 0 .1 to 0 . 4 mol/
In the present invention, an organic phosphoric compound as described in Japanese Patent Application No.
37, 350/87 may be preferably used . The added amount of such an organic phosphonic compound is in the range of 0.1 to 40 g, preferably 0 . 2 to 10 g per 1 of color developing solution .
The present color developing solution may also contain various chelating agents other than organic phosphonic chelating agents.
Specif ic examples of chelating agents which can be used in combination with other additives include nitrilotriacetic acid, diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid, ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid, trancyclohexanediaminetetra-acetic acid, 1,2-diaminopropanetetraacetic acid, 1, 2-diaminopropanetetraacetic acid, glycoletherdiaminetetra-acetic acid, ethylenediamineorthohydroxyphenylacetic acid, and N,N'-bis(2-hydroxybenzyl)ethylenediamine-N,N'-diacetic acid. However, the present invention should not be construed as being limited to these chelating agents.
These chelating agents may optionally be used in combination.
The present color developing solution may optionally comprise any suitable development accelerator.
However, the present color developing solution may preferably be substantially free of benzyl alcohol in the light of pollution, facility in solution preparation, fog inhibition, and stain inhibition.
Other examples of development accelerators which can be optionally incorporated in the present color developing solution include thioether compounds as de-scribed in Japanese Patent Publication Nos. 16,088/62, 5,987/72, 7,826/63, 12,380/69, and 9,019/70, p-phenylene-diamine compounds as described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 49,829/77, and 15,554/75, quater-nary ammonium salts as described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 49,829/77, and 15,554/75, quater-nary ammonium salts as described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 137,726/75, 156,826/81, and 43,429/77, and Japanese Patent Publication No. 30,074/69, amine compounds as described in U.S. Patent Nos.
2,494,903, 3,128,182, 4,230,796, 3,253,919, 2,482,546, 2,596,926, and 3,582,346, and Japanese Patent Publication No. 11,431/66, polyalkylene oxides as described in Japanese Patent Publication Nos. 16,088/62, 25,201/67, 11,431/66, and 23,883/67, and U.S. Patent 3,128,183, and 3,532,501, 1-phenyl-3-pyrazolidones, and imidazoles.
In the present invention, any suitable fog inhibitor may be optionally used. As such a fog inhibitor there may be used a halide of an alkaline metal such as sodium chloride, potassium bromide, and potassium iodide, or an organic fog inhibitor. Typical examples of such an organic fog inhibitor include nitrogen-containing hetero-cyclic compounds such as benzotriazole, 6-nitrobenz-imidazole, 5-nitroisoindazole, 5-methylbenzotriazole, 5-nitrobenzotriazole, 5-chloro-benzotriazole, 2-thiazolyl-benzimidazole, 2-thiazolylmethyl-benzimidazole, indazole, hydroxyazaindolidine, and adenine.
The present color developing solution may optionally contain various active agents such as alkyl-sulfonic acid, arylphosphonic acid, aliphatic carboxylic acid, and aromatic carboxylic acid.
The temperature at which the present color developing solution is used is in the range of 20 to 50~C, preferably 30 to 40~C. The processinhg time is in the range of 20 seconds to 5 minutes, preferably 30 seconds to 2 minutes. The replenishing amount of the present color developing solution i5 preferably less and is in the range of 20 to 600 ml, preferably 50 to 300 ml, particularly 100 to 200 ml per 1 m2 of light-sensitive material. The shorter the development time is, the more remarkable is the effect of the present invention.
When the reversal processing is effected, the color development is normally conducted after a black-and-white development. The black-and-white developing solution may comprise known black-and-white developing agents such as dihydroxybenzene, e.g., hydroquinone, 3-pyrazolidone, e.g., l-phenyl-3-pyrazolidone, and aminophenol, e.g., N-methyl-p-aminophenol, singly or in combination.
These color developing solution and black-and-white developing solution normally have a pH value of 9 to 12. The replenishing amount of these developing solutions depends on the type of the color photographic light-sensitive material to be processed but is normally in the range of 3 e per 1 m2 of the light-sensitive material. If the replenishing liquid of the developing solution has a reduced concentration of bromide ion, the replenishing amount thereof can be 500 ml or less. If the replenishing amount of the developing solution is reduced, the area of the processing tank in contact with air is preferably reduced to prevent the solution from being evaporated or ; 1339192 oxidized by air. A means of restricting the accumulation of bromide ion in the developing solution may be used to reduce the supply amount of the developing solution.
The photographic emulsion layer which has been subjected to color development is normally then subjected to bleaching. The bleaching solution, blix solution and fixing solution to be used in the present invention will be further described hereinafter.
It is normally said that a bleaching solution or blix solution is unstable at a pH of 6 to 8. In the present invention, it has been found that the bleaching bath is more stable and more excellent in bleaching capability at a pH range of 3.5 to 5 than at a pH value of 7. However, it was also found that a cyan dye is converted to a leuco-compound in this pH range. The Inventors have found that this problem can be remarkably eliminated by drastically saving the amount of water to be supplied to the subsequent bath (e.g. rinse and stabilization). This approach also improves the bleaching capability. This approach further effectively eliminates stain which easily occurs after a processing with a two-equivalent coupler.
As a bleaching agent for the present bleaching solution or blix solution there can be used any suitable bleaching agent.
Particularly preferred examples of suitable bleaching agents include organic complex salts of iron (III) with organic acids such as aminopolycarboxylic acid, e.g., ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid, and diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid, aminopolyphosphonic acid, phosphonocarboxylic acid, tartaric acid, and malic acid, persulfate, and hydroperoxide.
Particularly preferred among these compounds are organic complex salts of iron (III) in the light of rapidness of the development and pollution prevention. Examples of useful aminopolycarboxylic acid, aminopolyphosphonic acid, organic phosphonic acid, and salts thereof which can be used to form such organic complex salts of iron (III) include ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid, diethylenetraminepentaacetic acid, 1,3-diaminopropanetetra-acetic acid, propylenediaminetetraacetic acid, nitrilotriacetic acid, cyclohexanediaminetetraacetic acid, methyliminodiacetic acid, iminodiacetic acid, and glycoletherdiaminetetraacetic acid.
These compounds may be sodium salts, potassium salts, lithium salts or ammonium salts. Particularly preferred among these compounds are complex salts or iron (III) with ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid, diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid, cyclohexanediamine.etraacetic acid, 1,3-diaminopropane-tetraacetic acid, and methyliminodiacetic acid.
These ferric iron complex salts may be used in the form of a complex salt or may be formed of a ferric salt such as ferric sulfate, ferric chloride, ferric nitrate, ferric ammonium sulfate, and ferric phosphate, and a chelating agent such as aminopolycarboxylic acid, aminopolyphosphonic acid, and phosphonocarboxylic acid in a solution. Such a chelating agent may be used in excess of the stoichiometric amount for the formation of the ferric ion complex salt. Particularly preferred among these iron complexes are aminopolycarboxylic acid-iron complexes. The amount of such an aminooolycarboxylic acid-iron complex to be added is in the range of 0.01 to 1.0 mo~/~, preferably 0.05 to 0.50 mo~/~.
The present bleaching solution, blix solution and/or pre-bath thereof may comprise various compounds as bleaching agents.
Examples of suitable compounds excellent in bleaching capability include compounds containing a mercapto group or disulfide bond as described in U.S. Patent No. 3j893,858, West German Patent No. 1,290,812, Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No.
95,630/78, and Research Disclosure No. 17,129 (July 1978), thiourea compounds as described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 8,506/70, Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 20,832/77, and 32,735/78, and U.S. Patent No. 3,706,561, and compounds of halogen such as iodine, and bromine.
The present bleaching solution or biix solution may also contain a re-halogenating agent such as bromide, e.g., potassium bromide, sodium bromide, and ammonium bromide, chloride, e.g., potassium chloride, sodium chloride, and ammonium chloride, and iodide, e.g., ammonium iodide. The present bleaching solution or blix solution may optionally contain one or more corrosion inhibitors having a pH buffering capability such as inorganic acid, e.g., boric acid, borax, phosphinic acid, and phosphonic acid, organic acid, e.g., acetic acid, and tartaric acid, alkaline - 133~192 metal or ammonium salt thereof, e.g., sodium metaborate, sodium acetate, sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, sodium phosphate, and sodium citrate, ammonium nitrate, znd guanidine.
The fixing agent to be used in the present blix solution or fixing solution may be a known fixing agent, i.e., a water-soluble silver halide solvent such as thiosulfate, e.g., sodium thiosulfate, and ammonium thiosulfate, thiocyanate, e.g., sodium thiocyanate, and ammonium thiocyanate, thioether compound, e.g., ethylenebisthioglycolic acid, and 3,6-dithia-1,8-octanediol, and thiourea. These fixing agents may be used singly or in combination. Alternatively, a special blix solution made of a combination of a fixing agent as described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 155,354/80 and a large amount of a hal-ide such as potassium iodide may be used in the present invention.
In the present invention, a thiosulfate, particularly ammonium thiosulfate may be preferably used. The amount of such a fixing agent to be incorporated in the fixing or blix solution is preferably in the range of 0.3 to 2 mo~, particularly 0.5 to 1.0 mol/~. The present fixing solution or blix solution may have a pH value of 3 to 10, preferably S to 9.
The present blix solution may contain a fluorescent brighten-ing agent represented by the general formula (XI) in an amount of 0.1 to 10 g/~. The present blix solution may further contain various antifoam agents, surface active agents or organic solvents such as polyvinyl pyrrolidone, and methanol.
~ 1339192 The present fixing solution or blix solution may contain as a preservative a sulfite ion-releasing compound such as sulfite, e.g., sodium sulfite, potassium sulfite, and ammonium sulfite, bisulfite, e.g., ammonium bisulfite, sodium bisulfite, and potassium bisulfite, and metabisulfite, e.g., potassium metabisulfite, sodium r.etabisulfite, and ammonium metabisulfite.
Such a compound may be preferably used in an amount of 0.02 to ~.50 mo2/~, particularly 0.04 to 0.40 mo~/~ as calculated in terms of sulfite ion.
As such a preservative there may be commonly used a sulfite.
Other examples of suitable preservatives which may be used in the present invention include ascorbic acid, carbonyl-bisulfite addition product, and carbonyl compound.
The present fixing solution or blix solution may further contain a buffering agent, a chelating agent, an antifoam agent, and an antifungal agent as necessary.
In the present invention, the shorter the desilvering step is, the more remarkable is the effect of the present invention.
In particular, the desilvering time is preferably 2 minutes or less, particularly 1 minute or less.
The rinsing solution or stabilizing bath may contain a fluorescent brightening agent represented by the general formula (XI) in an amount of 0.1 to 10 g/Q.
~ 1339192 The rinsing solution may further contain a surface active agent as a hydro-extracting agent or a chelating agent such as EDTA as a water softener.
The rinse step may be followed by the stabilizing step. Alternatively, the present light-sensitive material may be processed with aq stabilizing solution at first hand after being subjected to the fixing or blix step.
Such a stabilizing solution may contain a compound which serves to stabilize images. Examples of such a compound include aldehyde compound such as formalin, buffering agent for adjusing the film pH to a value suitable for the stabilization of dyes, and ammonium compound. The stabilizing solution also may contain the above described various sterilizers or antifungal agents to inhibit proliferation of bacterial or render processed light-sensitive material fungi-resistant.
The stabilizing solution may further contain a surface active agent and a film hardener.
The amount of water to be used in the stabilizing step can drastically saved by employing the countercurrent process as in the rinse step by using 1 or less, preferably 0.5 or less. The supply of the rinsing solution or stabilizing solution may be continuous or intermittent. In the latter case, the supply of the solution may be effected as necessary depending on the amount of the light-sensitive material to be processed or at predetermined time intervals.
The pH value of the solution to be used in the present rinse or stabilization step is in the range of 4 to 10, preferably 5 to 8. The temperature of the solution to be used in the present rinse or stabilization step can be widely selected depending on the application, charac-teristics, etc. of the light-sensitive material to be processed but is normally in the range of 15 to 45~C, preferably 20 to 40~C. The pr~cessing time can be freely selected. However, the shorter the processing time is, the more remarkable is the effect of the present invention. In the present invention, the processing time is preferably 30 seconds to 2 minutes, particularly 30 seconds to 1 minute and 30 seconds. The supply amount of the processing solution is preferably small in the light of running cost, reduction in discharge and handleability.
The less the supply amount of the processing solutions is, the more remarkable is the effect of the present invention .
The solution used in the rinse and/or stabiliza-tion step can be further used in the pre-baths. For example, the overflow of the rinsing water obtained by saving by the countercurrent process may be introduced into the pre-bath, e.g., blix bath whichis supplied with a - 133919~
concentrated solution to reduce the amount of waste liquid.
The overflow liquid produced with the supply of the above described rinsing solution and/or stabilizing solution can be re-used in the other steps such as desilvering step.
The present silver halide color light-sensitive material may comprise a color developing agent for the purpose of simplifying and expediting the processing. To this end, such a color developing agent can be incorporated in the light-sensitive material in the form of various precursors thereof. Examples of such precursors of color developing agent include indoaniline compounds as described in U.S. Patent 3,342,597, Schiff base compounds as described in U.S. Patent 3,342,599, and Research Disclosure Nos. 14,850 and 15,159, aldol compounds as described in Research Disclosure No. 13,913, metal complexes as described in U.S. Patent 3,719,492, and urethane compounds as described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 135,628/78,.
The present silver halide color light-sensitive material may optionally comprise various l-phenyl-3-pyrazolidones for the purpose of accelerating color devel-opment. Typical examples of such compounds are described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 64,339/81, 144,547/82, and 115,438/83.
The various processing solutions to be used in the present invention is used at a temperature of 10 to 50~C.
The standard temperature range is normally between 33~C
and 38~C. Eowever, a higher temperature can be used to accelerate and shorten the processing. On the con-trary, a lower temperature can be used to improve the picture quality or the stability of the processing solu-tion. For the purpose of saving the amount of silver to be incorporated in the light-sensitive material, a proces-sing using cobalt intensification or hydrogen peroxide intensification as described in West German Patent No.
2,226,770, and U.S. Patent 3,674,499 may be effected.
In the present invention, the sum of the time required for the blix step and the rinse or stabilization step is preferably 3 minutes or less.
The process of the present invention can be applied to any processing with a color developing solu-tion. For example, the process of the present invention can be applied to the processing of color paper, color reversal paper, color direct positive light-sensitive material, color positive film, color negative film, color reversal film, or the like. Particularly, the process of the present invention is useful in the processing of color paper or color reversal paper which is susceptible to stain.
As the silver halide emulsion to be incorporated in the direct positive color printing light-sensitive material or color reversal printing light-sensitive material which is suitable for band stop filter of the present invention there may be preferably used a silver halide emulsion having the above described halogen composition comprising internal latent image type particulate silver halide having a multistructure as described in Japanese Patent Application No. 25,737/87.
As the silver halide emulsion to be incorporated in the color reversal printing light-sensitive material there may be preferably used an emulsion as described in European Patent No. 0217353A-2, and Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 39,043/86, and 61,156/86.
For an outer color reversal film, a soluble coupler is used instead of a hydrophobic coupler. Such a soluble coupler is incorporated in the color developing solution rather than the light-sensitive material.
The details of an internal latent image type emulsion and particulate silver halide which can be used in the present direct positive light-sensitive system such as autopositive color film and autopositive color paper are described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No.
81,337/88, left bottom on page 4 to right bottom on page 5.
Such an internal latent image type emulsion may be of the conversion type or the core/shell type, preferably of the core/shell type.
The details of the color couplers which can be used in the direct positive system are described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 81,337/88, left top on page 6 to left top on page 8. The details of various compounds which can be incorporated in the present light-sensitive material (e.g., color fog inhibitor, discolora-tion inhibitor, and dye) are described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 81,337/88, right top to right bottom on page 8.
In the present invention, if a direct positive color light-sensitive material is used, the direct positive color light-sensitive material which has been subjected to imagewise exposure is preferably then subjected to color development with a surface developing solution containing an aromatic primary amine color developing agent and preferably having a pH value of 12 or le~s subsequently after or simultaneously with a fogging process with light or a nucleating agent, and then to blix to provide a direct positive color image. More preferably, the developing solution has a pH value of 10.0 to 11Ø
The fogging process to be used in the present invention can be accomplished by a so-called "light fogging process" in which the second exposure is provided over the entire surface of the light-sensitive layer or a so-called "chemical fogging process"
in which the development is effected in the presence of a nucleating agent. The development may be effected in the presence of a nucleating agent and a fogging light. Alternatively, a light-sensitive material containing a nucleating agent may be subjected to fog exposure.
The details of the light fogging process are described in the above cited Japanese Patent Applicatlon (OPI) No. 81,337/88, left bottom on page 9 to left bottom on page 10. The details of nucleating agents which can be used in the present invention are described in the above described Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 81,337/88, rig~t top on page 10 to left top on page 14.
Particularly, the compounds represented by the general formulas [N-l] and [N-2] described in the same patent may be preferably used.
The details of nucleating accelerators which can be used in the present invention are described in the same Japanese Patent Application (OPI), left top to right bottom on page 15. Specific examples of such nucleating accelerators which can be preferably used in the present invention include compounds (A-l) to (A-13) - shown in the same Japanese Patent Application (OPI), page 15.
Furthermore, examples of color diffusion transfer light-sensitive materials and color image formation processes which can be used in the present invention are described in U.S. Patent No. 3,415,644 for those using a dye-developing agent, in T. H.
~ James, "The Theory of Photographic- Process", 4th ed., 1977, Chapter 12 for those using a diffusive dye-releasing coupler, and ~in "Photographic Science and Engineering", Vol. 20, No. 4, pp .
155-164, July and August 1976 for those using a diffusive dye-releasing redox compound.
On the other hand, the details of heat-developable color light-sensitive material and color formation process which can use the present invention are described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 58,543/83.
133~192 The pres_nt invention will be further described in the following examples, but the present invention should not be construed as being limited thereto.
Preparation of color light-sensitive material for use in photographing A multilayer color light-sensitive material specimen 101 was prepared by coating various layers of the undermentioned compositions on an undercoated cellulose triacetate film support.
Composition of light-sensitive layer The value of the coated amount of-each component is represented in g/m'. The coated amount of silver halide is represented in terms of amount of silver. The coated amount of sensitizihg dye is represented by molar amount thereof per 1 mo~
of silver halide contained in the same layer.
1st layer: antihalation layer Black colloidal layer 0.2 Gelatin 1.4 UV-l 0.02 UV-3 0,04 Solv-l 0.05 2nd layer: intermediate layer Finely divided particles of silver bromide (average particle diameter: 0.07 ~m) 0.08 133319~
Gelatin 1.1 ExC-l 0.02 ExM-l 0.06 W -1 0.03 UV-2 0.06 UV-3 0.07 Cpd-l 0.1 ExF-l 0.004 Solv-l . 0.1 Solv-2 - o.og 3rd layer: low sensitivity red-sensitive emulsion layer Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AgI content: 6.3 mo~ %;
internal high AgI type; c/s ratio: 1/1; diameter in terms of sphere: 0.8 ~m; coeffificent of fluctuation in diameter in terms of sphere: 25 %; tabular particles; diameter/thickness ratio: 2) 1.5 Gelatin 1.7 ExC-2 0-3 ExC-3 0.02 ExS-l 7.1 x 10 5 ExS-2 1.9 x 10 5 ExS-3 2.4 x 10 4 ExS-4 4.2 x 10 5 Solv-2 0.03 13391~2 4th layer: middle sensitivity red-sensitive emulsion layer Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AgI content: 4.8 mol ~; internal high AgI type; c/s ratio: 1/4; diameter in terms of sphere:
0.9 ~m; coefficient of fluctuation in diameter in terms of sphere: 50 %; tabular particles; diameter/thickness ratio:
1.5) 1.4 Gelatin 2.1 ExC-2 0.4 ExC-3 0.002 ExS-l 5.2 x 10 5 ExS-2 1.4 x 10 5 ExS-3 1.8 x 10 4 ExS-4 3.1 x 10 5 Solv-2 0.5 5th layer: high sensitivity red-sensitive emulsion layer Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AgI content: 10.2 mol %;
internal high AgI type; c/s ratio: 1~2; diameter in terms of sphere: 1.2 ~m; coefficient of fluctuation in diameter in terms of sphere: 35 %; tabular particles; diameter/thickness ratio: 3.5) 2.1 Gelatin 2.0 ExC-l 0.06 ExC-4 0 04 ExC-5 0.2 ExS-l 6.5 x 10 5 133~192 ExS-2 1.7 x 10 5 ExS-3 2.2 x 10 4 ExS-4 3. 8 x 10 5 Solv-l 0.1 Solv-2 0.3 6th layer: intermediate layer Gelatin 1.1 7th layer: low sensitivity green-sensitive emulsion layer Silver bromoiodide. emulsion (AgI content: 6.3 mo~ %;
internal high AgI type; c/s ratio: 1/1; diameter in terms of sphere: 0.8 ~m; coefficient of fluctuation in diameter in terms of sphere: 25 %; tabular particles; diameter/thickness ratio: 2) 0.6 Gelatin 0.8 ExM-2 0-3 ExM-l 0.03 ExY-l 0-04 ExS-5 3.1 x 10 ExS-6 1.0 x 10 ExS-7 3. 8 x 10 4 H-l 0.04 H-2 0.01 Solv-2 0.2 8th layer: middle sensitivity green-sensitive emulsion layer Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AgI content: 4.8 mo~ %;
internal high AgI type; c/s ratio: 1/4; diameter in terms OL
sphere: 0.9 ~m; coefficient of fluctuation in diameter in terms of sphere: 50 %; tabular particles; diameter/thickness ratio: 1.5) 1.1 Gelatin 1.4 ExM-4 0.2 ExM-5 0.05 ExM-l ~ 0.01 ExM-3 0.01 ExY-l 0.02 ExS-5 2.0 x 10 5 . ExS-6 7.0 x 10 5 ExS-7 2.6 x 10 4 H-l 0.07 H-2 0.02 Solv-l 0.06 Solv-2 0.4 9th layer: high sensitivity green-sensitive emulsion layer Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AgI content: 10.2 mo~ %;
internal high AgI type; c/s ratio: 1/2; diameter in terms of sphere: 1.2 ~m; coefficient of fluctuation in diameter in terms of sphere: 38 %; tabular particles; diameter/thickness ratio: 4) 2.1 Gelatin 2.2 ExC-2 0.02 133919~
ExM-5 0.1 ExM-l 0.05 ExS-5 3.5 x 10 5 ExS-6 8.0 x 10 5 ExS-7 3.0 x 10 Solv-l 0.08 Solv-2 0.7 10th layer: yellow filter layer Yellow colloidal silver 0.08 Gelatin - 1.0 Cpd-l 0.1 11th layer: low sensitivity blue-sensitive emulsion layer Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AgI content: 9.0 mo~ %;
internal high AgI type; c/s ratio: 1/2; diameter in terms of sphere: 0.75 ~m; coefficient of fluctuation in diameter in terms of sphere: 21 %; octahedron particles; diameter/thickness ratio: 1) 0.3 Gelatin 1.3 ExY-2 0-7 ExY-l 0-03 H-l 0.03 H-2 0.01 Solv-2 0 3 12th layer: middle sensitivity blue-sensitive emulsion layer Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AgI content: 10.2 mo~ %;
internal high AgI type; c/s ratio: 1/2; diameter in terms of 1333l~2 sphere; 1.0 ~m; coefficient of fluctuation in diameter in terms of sphere: 30 %; tabular particles; diameter/thickness ratio: 3.5) 0.4 Gelatin 0.7 ExY-2 0.1 ExS-8 2.2 x 10 4 H-l 0.01 Solv-2 0.05 13th layer: high sensitivity blue-sensitive emulsion layer Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AgI content: 9.8 mo~ ~;
internal high AgI type; c/s ratio: 1/2; diameter in terms of sphere: 1.8 ~m; coefficient of fluctuation in diameter in terms of sphere: 55 %; tabular particles; diameter/thickenss ratio: 4.5) 0.8 Gelatin 0.7 ExY-2 0.2 ExS-8 2.3 x 10 4 Solv-2 0.07 14th layer: 1st protective layer Gelatin 0.9 UV-4 0.1 UV-5 0.2 H-l 0.02 l33als2 Solv-3 0.03 Cpd-2 0 7 15th layer: 2nd protective layer Emulsion of finely divided particles of silver bromide (average particle diameter: 0.07 ~m) 0.1 Gelatin 0.7 H-l 0.2 ExS.- 1 C H = C - C H=<
tC H2)3S 03N a E x S ~ 2 C,ll, ~S~3 (CH2)3SO3H ~ N(C2Hs)3 E x S--3 C~ S ~ C 2 H ~ ~ S ~C e tC H2)3S 03-tCHz)sSOsH ~ N~
133919~
ExS, 4 C Q~ ~>eC H--C H;= N~
C Q N
E x S - 5 C H = C--C H~ ~(C H
(C H2)zS 03- (C H2)~S 03K
E x S--6 C H = C H - C H~ ~( (C H2)~S 03-(CH2)~S03H ~ N(C2H5)3 E x S ~ 7 >--C H = C - C H~< ~
(C H2)2S 03- (C H2)~S 03H ~ N(C2Hs)3 E x S - 8 C e~ C H ~\+~
(CH2)~SO3- (CHz)~SO3H ~ N (CzHs)3 E x C ~ 1 O H
O C H 2 C H 2 0 ~N = N ~
N a 03S~--S 03N a ~ 159 --l33~l32 E x C. - 2 Q~ .
- ~CONH(CHz)30CI2H25 ( i S O ) C 4 H ~ O C O N H
E x C - 3 O ( n ) C, ~ H
~ C 0 E x C - 4 OH A
C O N H ~
(n) C ,zH 25 ExC, 5 CbH ~3 ~N H C O N H ~C N
~t) C 5 H I I ~ O C H C O'N H ~J
\=<\ ~
(t) CSHI, ~
C(CH3)2CH2C(CH3)3 ExM- 1 C 2 ~I S
( t) C 5 H , ~ ~ O C H C O N H
(t)C5H" N ~; OC115 C Q~C Q
~Q
133~192 E xM--2 ~CH2--CH ) n ( CH2- CH ) Q t CHz--CH ) ~, ~ . I I
C O N H ~ ~ C O O C H 3 C O O C 4 H 9 --N/~O
~_C ~
~ n / m + m ' = 1 C ~ m / m ' = 1-Molecular Weight about 40,000 ExM- 3 =<N = N ~INHCO ( t) C 5 H y ~OCHCONH N/ S
(n)CIsH3l C~~co C Q
133~192 E xM 4 O C~Hs N S C ~ H
C
E xM--5 C z H 5 (t) CsHIl~O C H CONH
~ ~.
(t)CsH~
C O N H //
N N/~O
CQ ~ CQ
-- 163 ~
E x Y , 1 C32H2sOOCCllOOC_~ NHCO,HCONN ~ COOIilCCOCIzHzs ~ ~COO~
E x Y ~ 2 CO O C~zH2s C H30~C O C H C O N H
O~N~O
H~ ~ H
O CsHs -- 164 ~
UV . 1 OH (t) C4H9 \ N ~
~t) C4H9 O H
N ~
(t) C~Hq U~J- 3 ~,C 4 H 9 (t) C~H9 UV -.4 ( C Hz C ) c ( C Hz C ' y ~/ C O O C HzC HzO C O C O O C H
H3C~ ~C H = C~
\=/ ~C N
x / y = 7 / 3 ~wt.) C2H5 \~C O O C8H,.
~ N--C H = C H - C H = C~
C Hz = C H S 02C H2C O N H--C Hz CH2 =CHSO2CH2CONH--CH2 E x F--1 CQ~CH--CH=CH~C~
C2HsOSO3~
CzHs CzH~
Cp d--1 Cp d--2 0~ 0 (t) C I sHs ,~ HN ~--CH~
OH o S o 1 v - 1 : Di-n-~utylphthalate S 0 1 v - 2 : Tricresylphosphate S o l v - 3 : Trihexylphosphate CH2 =CHSO2 CHz CONH--CHz C H2 = C H S 02 C H2 C O N H - C H2 - 167 ~
Preparation of Specimen 102 Specimen 102 was prepared in the same manner as in Specimen 101 except in that 0.2 g of Compound C of the undermentioned general formula was added to the 10th layer in stead of the yellow colloidal silver, ExM-4 and ExM-S were replaced by the above described ecemplary compound (VIII)-2 and ExY-2 was replaced by the above described exemplary compound (X)-(7).
Compound C
> C= CH ~ < CHzCOOC4Hs(n) CH3SO2NH ~ , CH2COOC~.Hq(n) \d I CHJ
(Yellow dye described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 205,934/86) Color development of color light-sensitive material for use in photographing Processing Step Processing time Processing temperature .
Color development3 min. 15 sec. 38 ~C
Bleaching1 min. 00 sec. "
Blix 3 min. 15 sec. "
Rinse (1) 40 sec. 35 ~C
Rinse (2)1 min. 00 sec. "
Stabilization 40 sec. 38 ~C
Drying 1 min. 15 sec. 55 ~C
The composition of various processing solutions used in the above processing steps were as follows:
Color developing solution (unit: g) Diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid 1.0 l-Hydroxyethylidene-l,l-diphosphonic acid 3.0 Sodium sulfate 4.0 Potassium carbonate - 30.0 Potassium bromide 1.4 Potassium iodide 1.5 mg Hydroxylamine sulfate 2.4 Water to make 1.0 pH 10.05 Bleaching solution (unit: g) Ferric ammonium ethylenediaminetetraacetate (dihydrate) 120.0 Disodium ethylenediamine tetraacetate 10.0 Ammonium bromide 100.0 Ammonium nitrate 10.0 Bleach accelerator 0.005 moQ
133~192 >N--C H 2--C Hz--S ~ ~ 2 H C
Aqueous ammonia (27 %) 15.0 m~
Water to make 1.0 pH 6.3 Blix solution (unit: g) Ferric ammonium ethylenediamine tetraacetate (dihydrate) . 50.0 Disodium ethylenediamine tetraacetate 5.0 Sodium sulfite 12.0 Aqueous solution of ammonium thiosulfate (70 %) 240.0 mQ
Aqueous ammonia (27 %) 6.0 m~
Water to make 1.0 Q
pH 7.2 Rinsing solution Tap water was passed through a mixed bed type column filled with a s ~ongly acidic H type exhange resin (Rome & Herse Corp's Amberlite IR-l~OB) and an OH type anionic exchange resin (Amberlite IR-400) so that the calcium and magnesium concentration was adjusted to 3 mg/~ or less. Sodium dichlorinated isocyanurate and sodium sulfate were added to the water thus treated in amounts of 20 mg/~ and 150 mg/~, respectively.
~ ~ 5 ~ ~ k' The pH value of the rinsing solution thus prepared was in the range of 6.5 to 7.5.
Stabilizing solution (unit: g) Formalin (37 %) 2.0 mQ
Polyoxyethylene-p-monononylphenylether (average polymerization degree: 10) 0.3 Disodium ethylenediaminetetraacetate 0.05 Water to make 1.0 Q
pH 5.0 - 8.0 The color light-sensitive material specimen 101 thus prepared was then exposed to light from a standard light source for use in photographing (about 5,500 ~K) through a Macbeth chart. The specimen thus exposed was then subjected to the above described color development to obtain a color negative film. The spectral transmittance curve T (~) for the various coloring materials contained in the color negative film were then obtained. Furthermore, the specimen 101 was exposed to light through a Macbeth chart No. 22 (achromatic chart; optical density: about 0.7). The image on the film was then printed on a color printing paper (Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.'s Super HR) by means of a printer. The printing paper was then subjected to processing with Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.'s standard developing solution CP-20 to obtain a grey color print. -On the other hand, the spectral sensitivity distribution S (~) (modifed so as to give the same energy) of the color printing paper was obtained.
~he energy distribution of a l t g~t source for printing p(~ as determined.
The effective spectral sensitive energy distribution E (~ ) for the each ligh'-sensitive layers were obtained by the following equations:
Eb(~) = Sb(~ Ty(A ) P(~) ~--- (3) Eg( ~) = Sg(~) Tm(~) p(/~) ,,,, (4 Er( ~) = Sr( ~) Tc(~) The results are shown in Figure l-(a)~ The characteristics concerning the mutual independence of the various light-sensitive layers are shown in Ta~le l. The results show that only Er(~) is independent.
Table l Specimen used Specimen lOl and Super HR Paper E~) Eb(~ ig, l-(a) Eb(~) Eg(/~) " Eg(~ ) Er ( )~ ) Er ( /~ ) Eg~ ~)/Eb~) at 400-485 mm 0.20 Ema(X )/E'a~ ) at 400-485 mm max max Eb(~)/Eg(~) at 485-570 mm 0.20 Er~ ~)/Eg~ ~) at 485-570 mm 0.01 >
Ebm~)/Er~ ~) at 570-750 mm 0.01 >
Eg~ )/Er~ l) at 570-750 mm O.Ol >
Eg/Eb at 400-485 mm 0.2 Er/Eb at 400-485 mm 0.01 >
133~192 Eb/Eg at 485-570 mm 0.11 Er/Eb at 485-570 mm 0.01 >
Eb/Er at 570-750 mm 0.01 >
Eg/Er at 570-750 mm 0.01 >
The image on the negative film was then printed on a color printing paper (Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.'s Super HR) with a multi-layer dielectric c~und deposited film, having a spectral transparent curve as is shown in Fig. 3-(a), interposed between a light source and the negative film. The color printing paper thus printed was then sub-jected tothe above described processing with CP-20 to obtain a grey color print.
The results of Eb(~), Eg(~), and Er(~ ) are shown in Figure 2-(a). The results show that Er(A) and Eg(~).are independent.
Preparatlon of multilayer color printing light-sensitive Material A multilayer color printing paper specimen 201 was prepared by coating various layers of the undermentioned compositions on a paper support laminated with polyethylene on the both sides thereof.
Preparation of coating solution for 1st layer 19.1 g of a yellow coupler (ExY) and 4.4 g of a dye stabilizer (Cpd-l) weré dissolved in 27.2 cc of ethyl acetate and 7.7 cc of a solvent (Solv-l). The solution thus obtained was then ~mulsion-dispersed in 185 cc of a 10 % aqueous solution of ~elatin containing 8 cc of 10 % sodium dodecylbenzenesulfonate.
On the other hand, a blue-sensitive sensitizing dye was added to a silver bromochloride emulsion (containing 80.0 mo~ % of silver bromide and 70 g/kg of Ag) in an amount of 5.0 x 10 4 mo~ per 1 mo~ of silver to prepare an emulsion. The emulsion dispersion and the emulsion thus obtained were mixed to prepare a 1st layer coating solutio~ having the undermentioned composition. Coating solutions for the 2nd layer to the 7th layer were then prepared in the same manner as described above. As a gelatin hardener for the various layers there was used sodium l-oxy-3,5-dichloro-s-triazine.
As spectral sensitizing dyes for the various layers there were used the following compounds:
Blue-sensitive emulsion layer C ~N+ ~ =~N /¢~\c o (CHz)~ (CH2)~SO3H ~ N (C2H5)3 (5.0 x 10 4 mo~ per 1 mo~ of silver halide) Green-sensitive emulsion layer c e~~~ C 2 ~I s =<~~
(CHz)3 (CH2)2 SO3- SO3H ~ N(C2Hs)3 (4.0 x 10 4-mo~ per 1 moQ of silver halide) and C H
So3 S 03H ~''!C7H~)~
(7.0 x 10 5 mo~ per 1 mol of silver halide) Red-sensitive emulsion layer [~ /~ C H ~--C H =< ~¢~
C2Hs I- C2Y.s (0.9 x 10 4 mo~ per 1 mol of silver halide) A compound of the undermentioned general formula was incorporated in the red-sensitive emulsion layer in an amount of' 133~192 2.6 x 10 mo~ per 1 mol of silver halide.
~ ~ S O,H
- ~ , z'.
1-(5-Methylureidephenyl)-5-mercaptotetrazole was incorporated in the blue-sensitive emulsion layer, the green-sensitive emulsion layer and the red-sensitive emulsion layer in amounts of 4.0 x 10 6 mol, 3.3 x 10 5 mol and 1.0 x 10 5 mo~ per 1 mol of silver halide, respectively.
4-Hydroxy-6-methyl-1,3,3a,7-tetrazaindene was incorporated in the blue-sensitive emulsion layer and the green-sensitive emulsion layer in amounts of 1.2 x 10 2 mol and 1.1 x 10 2 mol per 1 mol of silver halide, respectively.
For the purpose of inhibiting irradiation, the undermentioned dyes were incorporated in the emulsion layer.
(D ~
HO OH
~OCH2CH2NC l~ ~ CH- CH= CH ~ ~ CNCH2CH20H
- - ~ O HO N -~Hz CH2 [ ~ SO,Na [ ~ SOlNa and (~ - 2) HO -lll OH
80CH2CHzNC // ~ -CH=CH-CH= ~ IINCH CH
'H
. z CHz [~SO3Na ~SO3Na Layer construction The composition of the various layers will be described hereinafter. The value of the coated amount of each component is represented in g/m2. The coated amount of silver halide emulsion is rèpresented in terms of amount of silver.
- 177 ~
1~39192 Polyethylene laminated paper (Polyethylene at the first layer side contains white pigment tTiO2) and blue dye (ultramarine)).
Support 1st layer (Blue-sensitive layer) Silver halide emulsion (Br: 80%) 0.26 Gelatin 1.83 Yellow coupler (ExY) 0.33 Dye stabilizer (Cpd-l) 0.19 Solvent (Solv-l) 0.35 2nd layer (Color mixinq inhihiting l~y~r) .- Gelatin 0.99.
Color mixing inhibitor (Cpd-2) 0.08 3rd layer (Green-sensitive layer) Silver halide emulsion (Br: 80 %) 0.16 Gelatin - 1.79 Magenta coupler (ExM) 0.32 Dye stabilizer (Cpd-3) 0.20 Dye stabilizer (Cpd-4) 0.01 Solvent (Solv-2) 0.65 Dye stabilizer (Cpd-8) 0.06 " (Cpd-9) 0.06 Dye (D-l) 0.10 -133~192 4th layer (ultraviolet absorbing layer) Gelatin 1.58 Ultraviolet absorber (UV-l) 0.62 Color mixing inhibitor (Cpd-5) 0-05 Solvent (Solv-3) 0.24 5th layer (red-sensitive layer) Silver halide emulsion (Br: 70 %) 0.23 Gelatin 1.34 Cyan coupler (ExC) 0.34 Dye stabilizer (Cpd-6) 0.17 Polymer (Cpd-7) 0.40 Solvent (Solv-4) 0.23 Dye (D-2) 0.12 6th layer (ultraviolet absorbing layer) Gelatin 0.53 Ultraviolet absorber (UV-l) 0.21 Solvent (Solv-3) 0.08 7th layer (protective layer) Gelatin 1.33 Acryl-modified copolymer of polyvinyl alcohol (modification degree: 17%) 0.17 Liquid paraffin 0-03 133~192 Dy.e stabilizer (Cpd-l) C.H9(t) \ / ~CH3 H O ~C H z C C O O ~ C O O H = C H z C~H~(t) ~2 \ CH3 /2 Color mixing inhibitor (Çpd-2) O H
~C 8 H , 7 (sec) (sec) C~H ,.
O H
Dye stabilizer (Cpd-3) C3H,O ~><
C 3 H 7 0--~ ~ O C 3 H , X~o C3H, 133gl92 Yellow coupler (ExY) C~
CH3 ~ \
CH3- C~CO ~ CH-CONH ~ Cs~ll(t) ~ ~ NHCOINO ~ CsH~(t) ~J OCz~5 Magenta coupler (ExM) CH3 ~
N NH , OCHzCHzOC2Hs NHSO/~ ~
CsH, 7 ( t) Cyan coupler (ExC) O H Cs Hlltt) C ~ ~ N H C O C H O ~ C 5 H " (t) C2H s ~ C z Hs C ~
133gl92 Dye stabilizer (Cpd-~) _~ S 0 3 N a C~s~31 ~) ''' ~
Color mixing inhibitor (Cpd-5) O H
C8H,7(t) O H
Dye stabilizer (Cpd-6) .5:8:9 mixture (by weight) of C Q N O H
\N~.C~Hy(t) C H2C H2C O O CBH,7 C Q N O H
\ N ~ C4Hy(t) C4Hy(t) 133~192 N ~ ~ ( ) C4~9~t) Polymer (Cpd-7) ( C H2 C H ) n C O N H C4H9(t) Average molecular weight 80,000 Ultraviolet absorber (UV-l) 2 : 9 : 8 mixture (by weight) of .
C ~ \ ~ C4H9(t) C H2C HzC O O C8H17 ~N / ~1 C4H9(t) - 183 ~
; 133919~
N OH
[~ \ ~ C ~ H 9 (sec) C~H9(tj Solvent (Solv-l) ~C 00 C.,H9 C O O C ~ H 9 Solvent (Solv-2) 2 : 1 mixture (by volume) of CzHs O = P ~O C H ~ C H C ~ H, / ~C H 3 )3 Solvent (Solv-3) O = P--O--CqHIq(iso~
~ \ 13 Solvent (Solv-4 ) ~ ~ ) (Cpd-8 ) (n) H9C~--C H C H20~0 CzHs 0 N~
~ ., ~ , .
~~0 C~2Hzs (Cpd-9 ) S 02N a ~O(CNz)~NN~ NN(CNz)~
O O
The color printing light-sensitive material thus obtained was then subjected to the following color development.
Processing step Temperature Time Color development 35 ~C 45 sec.
Blix 30-36 ~C 45 sec.
Stabiliza~ion-l 30-37 ~C 20 sec.
Stabilization 2 30-37 ~C 20 sec.
Stabilization 3 30-37 ~C 20 sec.
Stabilization 4 30-37 ~C 30 sec.
Drying 70-85 ~C - 60 sec.
(The stabilizing step was effected in a countercurrent process in which water flows from the tank 4 to the tank 1 through the tank 3 and the tank 2.) The composition of the various processing solutions were as follows: ~
Color developing solution Water 800 m~
Ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid 2.0 g Triethanol amine 8.0 g Ammonium sodium chloride 1.4 g Disodium ethylenediaminetetraacetate 3 g Potassium carbonate 25 g N-ethyl-N-(~-methanesulfoamidoethyl)-3-methyl-4-aminoaniline sulfate 5.0 g 133~l92 N,N-diethylhydroxylamine 4.2 g 5,6-Dihydroxybenzene-1,2,4-trisulfonic acid 0.3 g Fluorescent brightening agent (4,4'-diaminostylbene series) 2.0 g Water to make 1,000 m~
pH at 25 ~C 10.10 Blix solution ~ater 400 m~
Ammonium thiosulfate (70 ~) 100 mQ
Sodium sulfite 18 g Ferric ethylenediaminetetraacetate55 g Glacial acetic acid 8 g Water to make 1,000 m~
pH at 25 ~C 6.5 Stabilizing solution Formalin (37 %) 0.1 g Formalin-sulfite addition product 0.7 g 5-Chloro-2-methyl-isothiazoline-3-one 0.02 g 2-Methyl-4-isothiazoline-3-one 0.01 g Copper sulfate 0.005 g Water to make 1,000 m ~
pH at 25 ~C. 4.0 - 187 ~
Specimen 202 was prepared in the same manner as in Specimen 201 except in that the silver halide emulsion (Br: 80 moQ ~) to be incorporated in the 1st layer was replaced by the silver halide emulsion A (Br: 0.5 moQ %) shown below and the silver halide emulsion B (Br: 1.0 mpQ %) shown below was incorporated in the 3rd layer.
Preparation of Emulsion (A) Formation of host particulate silver chloride Solution 1 H20 - 1,000 cc NaCQ g Gelatin 32 g Solution 2 Sulfuric acid (1 N) 24 cc Solution 3 Compound A of the general formula (1%);
Compound A
N \ 3 cc N
C H~
Solution 4 NaCQ 1.7 g H2O to make 200 g Solution 5 AgNO3 5 g H2O to make 200 cc Solution 6 NaCQ 41.3 g K2IrC~6 (0.001 %) 0.5 cc H2O to make 600 cc Solution 7 AgNO3 120 g H2O to make 600 cc Solution 1 was heated to a temperature of 76 ~C. Solution 2 and Solution 3 were then added to Solution 1.
Solution 4 and Solutio~ 5 were then added to the miY~ture at the same time in 10 minutes.
After 10 minutes passed, Solution 6 and Solution 7 were then added to the mixture at the same time in 35 minutes. After 5 minutes passed, the temperature of the mixture was lowered. The solution was then desalted. Water and gelatin were added to the solution to adjust the pH value thereof to 6.3. As a result, a monodisperse emulsion of cubic par-~iculate silver chloride having an average particle size of 1.1 ~m and a particle size fluctuation coefficient of 0.10 (value obtained by dividing standar deviation by average particle size: s/d).
The emulsion thus obtained was then halved. 12.6 cc of a 0.6 ~ solution of a blue spectral sensitizing dye (general formula CR-l shown below) as CR compound was added to one of the two halves of the emulsion. An emulsion of ultrafine particulate AgBr having a particle size of 0.05 ~m was added to the emulsion in a proportion of 0.5-moQ % based on the host AgC~
emulsion. The emulsion was then subjected to mixing and ripening at a temperature of 5~ ~C for 10 minutes. The emulsion was then subjected to optimum chemical sensitization with sodium thiosulfate. A stabilizer of the undermentioned general formula B was added to the emulsion in an amount of 10 4 mo~/mo~ Ag to prepare Emulsion (A).
Compound CR-l C Q/~~ \N/~\C
( C H 2) 3 ( C H 2) 3 S 03N a S 03- ~
Stabilizer B
N--N
N~ ~
S ~
133gl92 Preparation of Silver halide Emulsion (B) Solution 8 H2O 1,000 m~
NaCQ 3- g Gelatin 32 g Solution 9 Sulfuric acid (1 N) 24 mQ
Solution 10 Compound A (Emulsion A) (1 %) 3 mQ
Solution 11 NaCQ . 11.00 g H2O to make 200 mQ
Solution 12 AgNO3 32.00 g H2O to make 200 mQ
Solution 13 NaCQ 44.00 g K2IrCQ6 (0.001 %) 2.3 mQ
H2O to make 560 mQ
Solution 14 AgNO3 128 g H2O to make 560 mQ
Solution 8 was heated to a tempera~ure of 52 ~C. Solution 9 and Solution 10 were then added to Solution 8 thus heated.
Solu~ion 11 and Solution 12 were then added to the mixture at the same time in 14 minutes. After 10 minutes passed, Solution 13 and Solution 14 were then added to the mixture at the same time in 15 minutes. After 5 minutes passed, the temperature of the emulsion was lowered. The emulsion was then desalted.
Water and dispersed gelatin were then added to the emulsion to adjust the pH value thereof to 6.2 to obtain a monodisperse emulsion of cubic particulate silver chloride having an average particle size of 0.48 ~m and a particle size fluctuation coefficient (value obtained by dividing standard deviation by average particle size: s/d) of 0.10. A compound of the undermentioned general formula CR-2 was then added to the emulsion in an amount of 4.0 x 10 4 mo~ per 1 mo~ of silver halide. An emulsion of ultrafine particulate silver bromide having a particle size of 0.05 ~m was then added to the emulsion in an amount of 1 mo~ % as calculated in terms of amount of silver bromide based on the silver silver chloride emulsion. The emulsion was then ripened at a temperature of 58 ~C for io minutes.
Compound CR-2 C H - C = C H
C H2C HzC H C H3 (C H2)3S 03N
The emulsion was then subjected to optimum chemical sensitization with sodium thiosulfate at a temperature of 58 ~C.
The emulsion was further subjected to spectral sensiti~ation with Compound CR-2 added in an amount of 4 x 10 4 mo~ per 1 moQ of silver halide. As a stabilizer Compound B as used in Emulsion A
was added to the emulsion in an amount of 5 x 10 4 moQ per 1 mo~
of silver halide.
A Macbeth chart was then photographed on Specimen 102 in the same manner as in Example l to prepare a color negative film.
The images on the color negative film were then prin~ed on the color printing light-sensitive material specimens 201 and 202 by means of a printer, and then subjected to the above described color development to obtain color prints.
Eb(~ ), Eg (~) and Er (~ of these color prints were determined in the same manner as in Example 1. The results show that Specimen 201 gives the-similar characteristics as shown in Fig. l-(a). Eb(~), Eg(~) and Er(~) obtained from Specimen 202 are shown in Fig. 3-(a).
The images on the color negative film were then printed on Specimen 201 with a filter having a half value width of 30 mm (about 480 to 510 nm) in the similar waveform as shown in Fig. l-(d) clamped by infrared absorbing filters and interposed between the light source and the negative film, and then subjected to the similar development. The results of Eb(A) and Eg( ~ are 133~192 shown in Fig. 4-(a). The results show that Er(~), Eg(~) and Eb(~) are all independent.
The characteristics concerning the effective spectral sensitivity distribution in the various layers shown in Figs.
3-(a) and 4-(a) are shown in Table 2.
Table 2 E ( ~) Fig. 3-(a) Eb(/~) Fig. 4-(a) Eb(~ ) Eg(~ ) Eg(~) max max r(l) Er(~ ) E~(~)/Eb(~) at 400-485nm 0.2 0.09 ax max r(~)/Eb( 1) at 400- 0.01 > 0.01 >
485 nm max max Eb(~ )/E (~) at 485-570nm 0.14 0.06 max ~ax Er(~ )/Eg(~_) at 485- 0.01 > 0.01 >
570 nm max max Eb(~)/Er(,~) at 570-750nm 0.01 > 0.01 >
max max Eg(!~ )/Er(/~) at 570- 0.01 > 0.01 >
750 nm Eg/Eb at 400-485 nm 0 03 Er/Eb at 400-485 nm 0.01 > 0.01 >
Eb/Eg at 400-485 nm 0.02 0.01 >
Er/Eg at 485-570 nm 0.01 > 0.01 >
Eb/Er at 570-750 nm 0.01 > 0.01 >
E~/Er at 570-750 nm 0.01 > 0.01 >
133!~192 An object comprising natural green leaves and yellow chrysanthem flowers was then photographed on the color negative light--sensitive material specimen 102 with natural light. The specimen was subjected to the above described development to obtain a color negative film.
The images on the color negative film were then printed on Specimens 201 and 202 (Specimens I and II in Table 3).
On the other hand, the images on the color negative film were printed on Specimen 202 with a multilayer dielectric-deposited film applied in the same manner as described above (Specimen III).
The specimen was then subjected to the above described development to obtain a color print. The results are shown in Table 3.
The results show that improvements can be seen particularly in saturation and brightness of yellow of the chrysanthem flowers and green of the plant as viewed against the light.
Table 3 Object Yellow chrysanthem Green leaves Representatation Specimen used flower in Fig.
Specimen I Saturation Brightness Saturation Brightness Specimen 202 + Q ~ ~ X
Specimen 201 Specimen II Point II
Specimen 202 + O O O ; ~
Specimen 202 Specimen III
Point III
Specimen 202 + O ~ (~
Specimen 202 +
Filter X ... Poor, ~ ... Slightly poor, O ...Good, ~ .. Extremely good Fig. 5-(a) shows the representation of the color prints obtained from Specimens II and III and CIE
(L * a * b) color specification system (as described in Nihon Shikisai Gakkai, "Shikisai Kagaku Handbook, 5th ed., 1985, pp. 140-141) (represented at points II and III, respectively).
Improvements can be seen in saturation and brightness of green and yellow. In particular, color stain of magenta dye is remarkably decreased, and the fidelity in color reproduction is improved.
Furthermore, the use of a filter having a spectral absorption in a wavelength band of 380 to 400 nm gives some improvement in brightness.
Examples of the measurement of the value of color stain degree ~-i and average color mixing degree r of the various Macbeth charts of the present invention will be described hereinafter.
Macbeth charts were photographed with Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.'s photographing color light-sensitive material SUPER HR 100 under a photographing standard light source (about 5,500 ~K). The light-sensitive material was then subjected to development with Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.'s standard developing solution CN-16 (Fuji color negative pr~cess and ~hpn;c~lc) to obtain a color negative film.
The images on the color negative film were then printed on Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.'s color photographic paper SUPER HR Paper by means of a printer (see P curve in Fig. l-(b)). The color photographic paper thus printed was then subjected to development with Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.'s standard developing solution CP-20 (Fuji color negative process and chemicals) to obtain a color print.
The spectral sensitivity of GL in the color photo-graphic paper used in the present example was determined by a conventional method. (See GL curve in Fig. l-(b)) The color stain degree ~1 of color,of Macbeth chart i was determined. The results are shown~in Table 4.
The results show that when i is 16 (Y), the highest color stain degree is obtained, and the next highest color stain degree is obtained at i = 11 (YG) and i = 12 (OY).
Accordingly, the color mixing degree of the print thus, obtained at i = 16 Y is 0.47. The average color mixing degree r of GL was determined by means of the equation (2-5) to obtain 0.14.
A multilayer dielectric-deposted filter was prepared.
The spectral transmittance F (~) curve of the filter thus obtained is shown in Fig. l-(d). For the color chart i, the exposure is given by the following equation:
,570 E i = S (A) ~ T i (A) ~ P (A) ~ F (1) d A
' 485 The value of color stain degree ~_iF obtained with the filter interposed between the light source and GL in the printing light-sensitive material during the printing is shown in Table 4. When i is 16 (Y), the color mixing degre~
degree ~_iF is 0.23 and the average color mixing degree r of GL is 0.07. Thus, it was found that the multilayer dielectric-deposited filter halves the color of GL in a color printing material.
Furthermore, printing was conducted with a filter F~ (spectral transmittance F~ (~); see Fig. 2-(d)) in the same manner as described above. If the same light-sensitive material and color development process as described are used, the value of the average color stain F~
degree r of GL is in the range of 0.02 to 0.03.
In yeneral, the color mixing degree of a color printing light-sensitive material shows the greatest value in GL. Therefore, it can be said that the above described value is the color mixing degree of the color printing light-sensitive material.
i color H i H i ~ i ~ i ~ i F
1 1.75 1.78 1.020.02 0.02 2 0.82 0.87 1.070.07 0.03 3~ 0.98 0.93 0.94-0.06 -0.03 4 - 1.03 1.16 1.120.12 0.06 0.97 0.92 0.95-0.05 -0.02 6 B G 0.50 0.53 1.060.06 - 0.02 7 O 0.96 1.l9 1.230.23 0.12 8 1.48 1.29 0.87-0.13 -0.06 9 M. R 1.66 1.64 0.99--0.01 0 0 P 2.10 1.86 0.89-0.11 -0.05 11 YG 0.43 0.59 1.370.37 0.18 2 O. Y. 0.55 0.74 1.350.35 0.17 13 B 2.0~ 1.69 0.83- 0.17 - 0.08 14 G 0. 60 0. 73 1.200.20 0.10 -R 2.26 2.30 1.020.02 0.02 16 Y 0.~0 O.S9 1.d~70.~7 0.23 17 M 1. 56 1.43 0.92- 0.08 - 0.03 18 C 0.85 0.80 0.95-0.0S -0.03 22 Grey 1.0 1.0 1.0 0 0 Preparation of multilayer color printing light-sensitive material A multilayer color photographic paper was prepared by coating various làyers of the undermentioned composi-tion on a paper support laminated with polyethylene on both sides thereof. The coating solution used were pre-pàred according to the procedure in Example 2, to prepare Specimen 401.
Preparation of Specimens 402 to 403 Specimen 402 was prepared in the same manner as in Specimen 301 except in that the compound of the general formula D-3 was further incorporated in the 4th layer.
Specimen 403 was prepared in the same manner as in Specimen 402 except in that Compound (D-3) to be incor-porated in the 4th layer was replaced Compound (S-l) and a functional dye (F-l) as is shown in Table 5. Compounds (S-l) and (F-l) were dispersed in the layer together with an ultraviolet absorber. Compound (D-3) was in-corporated in the layer in the form of an aqueous solution.
133~192 .Compound incorporated Compound incorporated Specimenin the 3rd layer in the 4th layer 401 (D-l) 1.4 x 10 moQ/m 402 (D-3) 1.4 x 10 moQ/m 403 " (S-l) 0.20 g/m2 (F-l) 1 x 10 moQ/m (S- 1 ) 0~ .
SO,Na ~ ; I 11 ' .
(n)H3lCIs~
~~
(F--1 ) H3C
(CH3) J-C~ -CH2--OC-- CH ~CH ~CHzSO3Na 0\N~0 ll N~;0 \cH2cHzso3Na OzN~
~CR3 S02N~ S03Na Cl ~H33 (D - 3) ~N ~ ~ CH~C~ 3 O \N~i ~max about 520 nm ~1 S~3~
The color printing light-sensitive material thus obtained was subjected to the following color development.
Processing step Temperature Time Color development 35 ~C 45 sec.
Blix 30-36 ~C 45 sec.
Stabilization 1 30-37 ~C 20 sec.
Stabilization 2 30-37 ~C 20 sec.
Stabilization 3 30-37 ~C 20 sec.
Stabilization 4 - 30-37 ~C 30 sec.
Drying 70-85 ~C 60 sec.
(The stabilizing step was effected in a countercurrent process in which water flows from the tank 4 to the tank 1 through the tank 3 and the tank 2.) The composition of the various processing solutions used were as follows:
Color developing solution Water 800 m Ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid 2.0 g Triethanol amine 8.0 g Ammonium sodium chloride 1.4 g Disodium ethylenediaminetetraacetate 3 g Potassium carbonate 2S g N-ethyl-N-(~-methanesulfonamidoethyl)-3-methyl-4-aminoaniline sulfate 5.0 g N,N-diethylhydroxylamine 4.2 g 5,6-Dihydroxybenzene-1,2,4-trisulfonic acid 0.3 g Fluorescent brightening agent (4,4'-diaminostylbene series) 2.0 g Water to make 1,000 m~
pH at 25 ~C 10.10 Blix solution Water 400 m~
Ammonium thiosulfate (70 %) lO0 mQ
Sodium sulfate 18 g Ferric ethylenediaminetetraacetate (III) 55 g Glacia~ acetic acid 8 g Water to make l,000 m~
pH at 25 ~C 5.5 Stabilizing solution Formalin (37 ~) 0.1 g Formalin-sulfite addition product 0.7 g 5-Chloro-2-methyl-isothiazoline-3-one 0.02 g 2-Methyl-4-isothiazoline-3-one 0.01 g Copper sulfate 0.005 g Water to make 1,000 m~
pH at 25 ~C 4.0 Specimens 401 to 403 thus obtained were than processed in the same manner as in Example 3 with the color negative film shown in Example 3 as a color print original to obtain a color mixing degree ~-i = 15 and an average color mixing degree r (Y, i = 16). The results are shown in Table 6.
The results show that Specimens 402 and 403 exhibit an excellent color reproducibility.
SpecimenName of color ~i r 401 (Comparative)16 Y 0.47 0.14 402 16 Y 0.46 0.12 403 16 Y 0.40 0.11 404 16 Y 0.38 0.10 EX~PLE 5 Specimen 404 was prepared in the same manner as in Specimen 403 except in that the silver halide emulsion (Br: 80 moQ%) to be incorporated in the 1st layer was replaced by the silver halide emulsion A (Br: 0.5 moQ%) used in Example 2 and the silver halide emulsion B
(Br: 1.0 moQ%) used in Example 2 was incorporated in the 3rd layer.
In the same manner as in Specimen 403 in Example 4, the color mixing degree ~i = 16 and the average color mixing degree r of Specimen 104 were determined. The results are shown in Table 6. The results show that distinction between orange yellow and lemon yellow and the reproduc-tion of sharp green are improved.
Preparation of photographing color light-sensitive material A multilayer color light-sensitive material specimen 601 was prepared by coating various layers of Example 1 or an undercoated cellulose triacetate film support in the same manner as in Example 1.
Preparation of Specimen 602 Specimen 602 was prepared in the same manner as in Specimen 601 except in that the yellow colloidal silver to be incorporated in the 10th layer was replaced by Compound C shown below as a comparative compound in an amount of 0.2 g.
Compound C
~ C= CH ~ /CHzCOOC4Hs(n).
CH3SO2~H ~ C ~ ~ \ CH2COOC4H9(n) (Yellow dye as described in Japanese Patent Appli-cation (OPI) No. 205,934/86) Color development of photographing color light-sensitive material was carried out according to the same procedure as in Example 1.
Color negative films were prepared in the same manner as in Example 3 except in that the color light-sensitive material for use in photographing was replaced by Specimens 601 and 602. These color negative films were then used as print originals.
The images on these print originals were then printed on Specimen 404 of Example 5 as a printing light-sensitive material with the multilayer dielectric-deposited filter of Example 3 mounted in Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.'s automatic color printer Type FAP-3500 to obtain color prints. The results are shown in Table 7.
Specimen i Name of color ~i r 601 16 Y 0.25 0.09 602 16 Y 0.22 0.07 When a color negative light-sensitive material comprising a filter layer was used in combination with the above described filter, the average color mixing degree was further lowered, attaining an excellent color reproducibility.
A photographing multilayer color light-sensitive material specimen 701 was prepared by coating various layers of the undermentioned compositions on an under-coated cellulose triacetate film support.
Preparation of color light-sensitive material for use in photographing Composition of light-sensitive layer The value of the coated amount of each component is represented in g/m . The coated amount of silver halide is represented in terms of amount of sil~er. The coated amount of sensitizing dye is represented by molar amount 133~92 thereof per 1 moQ of silver halide contained in the same layer.
Specimen 701 1st layer (antihalation layer) Black colloidal silver 0.18 Gelatin . 0.40 2nd layer (intermediate layer) 2,5~ t-pentadecyl hydroquinone 0.18 EX-l 0-07 EX-3 0.02 U-l 0.06 U-2 0.0~
U-3 0.10 HBS-l 0.10 HBS-2 a .02 Gelatin 1.04 3rd layer (lst red-sensitive emulsion layer) Monodisperse emulsion of silver bromoiodide (AgI content:
6 mo~ %; average particle diameter: 0.6 ~m; coefficient of fluctuation in particle diameter: 0.15) 0.55 Sensitizing dye I 6.9 x 10 5 Sensitizing dye II 1.8 x lO
Sensitizing dye III 3.1 x lO
133~192 Sensitizing dye IV 4.0 x 10 5 EX-2 0,350 HBS-l 0.005 EX-10 0.020 Gelatin 1.20 4th layer (2nd red-sensitive emulsion layer) Emulsion of tabular particulate silver bromoiodide (AgI
content: 10 mo~ ~; average particle diameter: 0.7 ~m; average aspect ratio: 5.5; average thickness: 0.2 ~m) 1.0 Sensltizing dye I 5.1 x 10 5 Sensitizing dye II 1.4 x 10 5 Sensitizing dye III 2.3 x 10 Sensitizing dye IV 3.0 x 10 5 EX-10 0.015 Gelatin 1.30 5th layer (3rd red-sensitive emulsion layer) Silver bromoiodid~ emulsion (AgI content: 16 mo~ %; average particle diameter: 1.1 ~m) 1.60 Sensitizing dye IX 5.4 x 10 5 Sensitizing dye II 1.4 x 10 Sensitizing dye III 2.4 x 10 4 Sensitizing dye IV 3.1 x 10 EX-3 0.240 EX-4 0.120 HBS-l 0.22 HBS-2 0.10 Gelatin 1.63 6th layer (intermediate layer) HBS-l 0.020 EX-12 0.004 Gelatin 0.80 7th layer (lst green-sensitive emulsion layer) Emulsion of tabular particulate silver bromoiodide (AgI
content: 6 moQ %; average particle diameter: 0.6 ~m; average aspect ratio: 6.0; average thickness: 0.15) 0.40 Sensitizing dye V 3.0 x 10 5 Sensitizing dye VI 1.0 x 10 Sensitizing dye VII 3.8 x 10 4 EX-6 0.260 EX-l - 0.021 EX-7 0.030 EX-8 0.025 ~ 211 -1~391~
HBS-l 0.100 HBS-4 0.010 Gelatin 0.75 8th layer (2nd green-sensitive emulsion layer) Monodisperse emulsion of silver bromoiodide (AgI content: 9 mo~ %; average particle diameter: 0.7 ~m; coefficient of fluctuation in particle diameter: 0.18) 0.80 Sensitizing dye V 2.1 x 10 5 Sensitizing dye VI 7.0 x 10 5 Sensitizing dye VII 2.5 x 10 4 EX-6 0.180 EX-8 0.010 EX-l 0.008 EX-7 0.012 HBS-l 0.160 HBS-4 0.008 Gelatin 1.10 9th layer (3rd green-sensitive emulsion layer) Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AgI content:12 mo~ %; average particle diameter:l.0 l~m) 0.77 Sensitizing dye V 3.5 x 10 5 Sensitizing dye VI 8.0 x 10 5 Sensitizing dye VII 3.0 x 10 4 EX-6 0.065 EX-ll 0.030 EX-l - 0.025 HBS-l 0.25 HBS-2 0.10 Gelatin 1.74 10th layer (yellow filter layer) Yellow colloidal silver 0.05 EX-5 0.08 Gelatin o.g5 11th layer (lst blue-sensitive emulsion layer) Emulsion of tabular particulate silver bromoiodide (AgI
content: 6 mo~ %; average particle diameter: 0.6 ~m; average aspect ratio: 5.7; average thickness: 0.15 l~m) 0.24 Sensitizing dye VIII 3.5 x 10 EX-9 0.85 EX-8 0.12 HBS-l 0.28 Gelatin '- 1.28 12th layer (2nd blue-sensitive emulsion layer) Monodisperse emulsion of silver bromoiodide (AgI content: 10 mo~ ~; average particle diameter: 0.8 ~m; coefficient of fluctuation in particle diameter: 0.16) 0.45 Sensitizing dye VIII 2.1 x 10 4 133gl92 13th layer (3rd blue-sensitive emulsion layer) Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AgI content: 14 mo~ %; average particle diameter: 1.3 ~m) 0.77 Sensitizing dye VIII 2.2 x 10 EX-9 0.20 HBS-l 0.07 Gelatin 0.69 14th layer (lst protective layer) Silver bromoiodide emulsion (AgI content: 1 mo~ %; average particle diameter: 0.07 ~m) 0.5 U-4 0.11 U-5 0.17 HBS-l 0 90 Gelatin 1.00 15th layer (2nd protective layer) Particulate polymethyl acrylate (particle diameter: about 1.5 ~m) 0.54.
S-l 0.15 Gelatin 0.72 Besides the above described components, a gelatin hardener H-l and a surface active agent were incorporated in each layer.
- 214 ~
cè~N ' -~4Hg(t) C 4Hg(t) OH
I~N,N~
C4Hg (t) OH C4Hg (sec) /N~
C4Hg (t) I
CH 2 -Cl CH2 -Cl ,, , ; O
( CH2 ) 2 ' CX3~Cx C~ COO
CN
0.7 '0.3 N-CH=CH-CH=C~
~,C3Hl, ~JC.~2CO~.-H Q N=N~ocn3 t C 5 ~ CO~
N~ N,bo c~ce ce OH
~CONH(CH2 ) 30C 1 2H2 5(I ) (i)C 4H 90CONH
OH
~ ~ CONHC 1 2H2 5 ( ), IGH2CHZO~N N~
SO3Na . SO3Na,, _ ~.17 --OH t ~CONH ( CH2 ) 3 OC 1 2H2 5 (i)C 4 H g OCONH O C H 2 CH 2 SCH 2 COOH
OH NHCOC l 5 H 3 ~NHCO ~
NHCOC 1 sH3, (i) OH
C'~3 C~'2-C ,N CH2-Cn CH2-CX
~ N ~i ~ COOC4Hg, ~
CONH ~ 2s~ , ~ N o ce~ce Average molecular weight 30,000 .~ . .
ce ~ . ~50 NH ~ ~NHCOC ( CH 3 ) 3 ~2H5 / N ~
~-OCHCONH~' ce~o~fce (n)Cl 5H3 1 ~
ce Cl H3 CH3 (n)Cl 2H2 50COCHOCO~_~ COOCHCOOCl 2H2 5(n) ~NHCOC~CONH~
ce ce N~ 3}
133~192 X -- Q
CCOC 1 2-~-2 CH3 O ~ COCHCONH~
o~N~=O Ce C H )-- \
OH
,~MHCOC3F7 (n) (t)C5Hl 1 ~OCH2CONH
(tJc5Hl I HO~
HOJ~NHCOC3H7 (n) N~
N~S
l339l92 (tJCsHl l~OCHCO.
(t)C5Hl 1 CONH~
N'N~O
ce~? ce ce~' N ~-C~I-CH ,l~ce O ' . O
N-CH3 HNJ!~NH
~ \ I
E~N NH CH2--CH2 -- ;~22 --H B S - 1: Tric ecyl ph~sphzte H B S - 2: Dibutyl phthalz~e H B S - 3: Bis(2-ethyle,~yl)phthalate C2H~
(t) CsHl l~OCHCO~H~H
~ (t)C5 CH 2 zCH-SO 2 -CH 2 CONH--CH2 CH 2 ZC~-SO 2 ~CH2 -CONH-CH 2 sensitizing dye ¢~S~ CH C CH=< ~
(CH2 ) 4SO3~ (CH2 ) 3SO3Na CH=~,-CH=
(Gh2)3SO3~
(CH2 )3SO3Na m ce J~E,~CH=C-CH~ ~ce (CH2)3SO36 , I
(CH2 ) 3SO3Na ' A~
- C~ =CH-CH=N~
C 2Hs . ~
-- 2~4 --133~192 C2Hs f~ ~-CH-C-CH=< ~CH3 N~CH3 (CH2 ) 2S~3~ l (CH2 )4S03K
~CH--CH-CH=<
C2H5 (CH2 ) 4S03 C2Hs J~C~CEleC-CH=< ~"Ce (C~2 ) 2S~3~ (CH2 ) 3SC3K
13~9192 ,~
.~ CH--~N~''Ce ( CH2 ) 4S03(~ (CH2 ) 4S03X
S C2Hs o ~3 (CH2 ) 3So36 (CH2 ) 4SO3Na Specimens 702 and 703 were prepared in the same manner as in Specimen 701 except in that EX-6 was replaced by VII-(2) and X-(7) was used as shown in Table 8.
(EX-2, EX-4 and EX-7 are couplers according to the present invention.) Specimen 702 Specimen 703 7th layer VIII-(2) 0.25 "
8th layer VIII-(2) 0.20 "
9th layer VIII-(2) 0.08 "
11th layer - EX-9 0.40 X-(7) 0.50 12th layer - EX-9 0.10 X-(7) 0.10 An object comprising a Macbeth grey color chart (No. 22) and a fresh flower (e.g. chrysanthemum or palm leaf) was photographed on these light-sensitive material specimens by means of a light source having a color temperature of about 5,400 ~K.
These specimens were then subjected to the follow-ing color development to obtain color negative films (print originals).
Color development of color light-sensitive material for use in photographing is carried out according to the same procedure as in Example 1.
- 2~7 -Preparation of multilayer color printing light-sensitive material A multilayer color photographic paper specimen 801 was prepared by coating various layers of the undermentioned compositions on a paper support laminated with polyethy-lene on both sides thereof.
Preparation of 1st layer coating solution 19.1 g of a yellow coupler (ExY) and 4.4 g of a dye stabilizer (Cpd-l) were dissolved in 27.2 cc of ethyl acetate and 7.7 cc of a solvent (Solv-l). The solution thus obtained was then emulsion-dispersed in 18.5 cc of a 10% aqueous solution of gelatin containing 8 cc of 10%
sodium dodecylbenzenesulfonate. On the other hand, a blue-sensitive sensitizing dye of the undermentioned general formula was added to a silver bromochloride emulsion (cont~in;ng 80.0 moQ% of silver bromide and 70 g/kg of Ag) in an amount of 5.0 x 10 moQ per 1 moQ
of silver. The emulsion dispersion and the emulsion thus obtained were mixed to prepare the 1st layer coating solution having the undermentioned composition. The coat-ing solutions for the 2nd layer to the 7th layer were similarly prepared. As a gelatin hardener for each layer there was used sodium l-oxy-3,5-dichloro-s-triazine.
As sensitizing dyes for the various layers there were used the following compounds:
Blue-sensitive emulsion layer Compound I-(l) (5.0 x 10 moQ per 1 moQ of silver halide) Green-sensitive emulsion layer Compound III-(9) (4.0 x 10 moQ per 1 moQ of silver halide);
and Compound III-(8) (7.0 x 10 moQ per 1 moQ of silver halide) Red-sensitive emulsion layer Compound IV-(8) (0.9 x 10 4 moQ per 1 moQ of silver halide) Compound I-(9) was incorporated in the red-sensitive emulsion layer in an amount of 2.6 x 10 3 moQ per 1 moQ
of silver halide.
1-(5-Methylureidephenyl)-5-mercaptotetrazole was incorporated in the blue-sensitive emulsion layer, the green-sensitive emulsion layer and the red-sensitive emulsion layer in amounts of 4.0 x 10-6 moQ, 3.0 x 10-5 moQ and 1.0 x 10 moQ per 1 moQ of silver halide, respectively.
4-Hydroxy-6-methyl-1,3,3a,7-tetrazaindene was incorporated in the blue-sensitive emulsion layer and the green-sensitive emulsion layer in amounts of 1.2 x 10 2 moQ and 1.1 x 10 2 moQ per 1 moQ of silver halide, respectively.
- 2~9 -For the purpose of inhibiting irradiation, the dyes used in Example 2 were incorporated in the emulsion layer.
Layer construction The composition of the various layers is the same as in Example 2.
Specimen 802 was prepared in the same manner as in Specimen 801 except in that the silver halide emulsion (Br: 80 moQ%) to be incorporated in the 1st layer was replaced by the silver halide emulsion A (Br: 0.5 moQ%) used in Example 2 shown below and the undermentioned silver halide emulsion B used in Example 2 (Br: 1.0 moQ%) was incorporated in the 3rd layer.
ExY, ExM or ExC as used in Example 8 is a suitable color coupler which can be used in the present invention.
Specimens 801 and 802 were then exposed to light by means of a spectral photographing machine which had been corrected so as to give the same spectral energy intensity of the light source. These specimens were then subjected to the same color development as in Example 2, except for adjusting pH value of blix being 5.5.
The results thus obtained are shown in Figure l-(c).
Curve 1 was obtained from Specimen 801, and Curve 2 was obtained from Specimen 802. J indicates the maximum spectral sensitivity showing the characteristics of a J
type spectral sensitization and an M type sensitization.
- ~30 -The images on the color negative films obtained from Specimens 701 and 702 in Example 7 were then printed on Specimen 801 and Specimen 802 by means of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.'s Autoprinter Type FAP-35000. These specimens were then subjected to the following color development B.
Color development B
Processing Supply Tank step Temp. Time amount* Volume Color development38~C1 min. 40 sec. 290 mQ 17 Q
Blix 33~C40 sec. 100 mQ 9 Q
Rinse 1 30-34~C15 sec. - 4 Q
Rinse 2 " " - 4 Q
Rinse 3 " " Shown in 4 Q
Table 9 Drying 70-80~C50 sec.
* Value per 1 m2 of light-sensitive material (The rinse was effected in a countercurrent process in which water flows from the tank 3 to the tank 1 through the tank 2.) ** The amount of solution carried over from the pre-bath was 30 mQ/m2.) The composition of the processing solutions used in the various steps were as follows:
1339~3~
Color developing solution Tank Supply solution liquid Water 800 mQ 800 mQ
Diethylenetriaminepenta-acetic acid 1.0 g 1.0 g Nitrotriacetic l-hydroxy-ethylidene-l,l-diphosphonic acid 2.0 g 2.0 g Potassium bromide 0.5 g Potassium Carbonate 30 g 30 g N-ethyl-N-(~-methanesulfon-amideethyl)-3-methyl-4-amino-aniline sulfate 5.5 g 7.5 g N,N-diethylhydroxylamine 3.6 g 5.5 g Fluorescent brightening agent1.5 g 2.0 g Triethylenediamine(1,4-diaza-bicyclo[2,2,2Joctane 5.0 g 5.0 g Water to make 1,000 mQ 1,000 mQ
pH at 25~C 10.20 10.060 Blix solution Tank Supply solution liquid Water 400 mQ 400 mQ
Ammonium thiosulfate (70%) 200 mQ 300 mQ
Sodium sulfite 20 g 40 g Ferric ammonium ethylenediamine-tetraacetate 60 g 120 g Disodium ethylenediaminetetra-acetate 5 g 10 g Tank Supply solution liquid Water to make 1,000 mQ 1,000 mQ
pH at 25~C
Aqueous ammonia and water were used to give a pH
as shown in Tables 9-1 and 9-2.
Rinsing solution Water which had been passed through an ion exchange resin (calcium and magnesium content: 3 ppm or less each) was used.
The specimens thus developed were then observed for the degree of stain on the resulting images and background. The results are shown in Table 9-1.
_ ~33 -1339192 r a) r a ~
5~ o ~ ~ 3 o ~ , ~ ~
r r o ~ r ~ a _ . 1 u r ~ ~ ~ r;~ s s~ r e V~ O ~ o o ~ o ~ _ o a P~ u ~ r VJ ~ 4 O
r O x O u 3 ~ 3 r ~ s~ O O ~) O ~ ~ O O .r O e ~ e ~ o h :~
r-~~ e ~ o h h f~ U O
h h _ -- _ _ _ _ _ _ z v~
V~
U~ o - ~ o o o o o o o o r~ ui ~ J
a~
r. ~ ~ , J * .,1 .
V, r ~ ~ J r~ U
c ~r~ u~
v~,~ O oooo oo~ --a c~ z zzzz zz~
~ r4 ~ r--Q~ r--C r~ S
C 4 ~ ~r rJ C -- _ _ -- -- -- -- -- rJ ~ --C Ir~ oooo ~oo 1~'., c o r. r I rn~ r~ I
r~ -- _ _ ~ r ~ .-u a) ;~ r.. ~l ~ ~ ~ l v r, V~ a~ o--qv~ u, c l o r.
r~ . s, h * . .~1 r,--rn ~ ~ I X ~
J; ~ ri Vl ~ ~) ~ r3 _I O O O O O O tl) O V~
;4 ~ ~ R Z Z Z Z Z Z ~ Z ~ V
r, o ~ c~ v e ~ _, r~ o C
l~ ~1 ~ tl rrJ
Po r.
~., r. r r, v~ .
a) c~ , o u v, . ~-~1 r v J o ~ v~ rn v~ v~ v~
~1) ~1 .5 ~ r-- rt a.~
O ~ ~ ~ Z Z Z ~ ~_ ~C
v~ _ *
o z _I ~I rr~ ~ Ul ~D ' r~ oo Specimens prepared in the same manner as in Spe-cimens 4, 6, 7 and 8 except in that the fluorescent brightening agent XI-(2) was replaced by XI-(l), XI-(2), XI-(4), XI-(5) or I-(6) were subjected to the same color development. As a result, the similar effect of stain removal was observed.
The processing No. 9 was then effected in the same manner as in the processing No. 3 except in that the fluorescent brightening agent XI-(2) was replaced by Compound A of the following general formula:
Compound A
NaO 3S (CH2 ) 3NH ~~ ~
The processing Nos. 10 and 11 were effected with Compound XI-(10) or a 1 : 1 mixture of Compound XI-(10) and Compound XI-(2). The results are shown in Table 2-2.
.,, o U~
~ o .,, ~ C~
~ ~, r r O
o o ~
U~
_I ~ ~ o ~
--~ o _ _ _ U~
~ ~ o o o rn u. ~ r' U~
u~ ~r O ~
O
J
~, : L ~ '.
O O O
r~ C t~l ~ Z Z Z
C~ , ,1 p U
r~
~, _ C O O o o - ~ I In u~ In C r~ ~ O--,~ x--, - ~1 ~-,1 a ~ o o o i~ ~ Q Q Z Z Z
4~ J tJ~ _ O - ~ p r _l _l ~ C ~
~ r~
- 1 -- ~ C I ~ -- --, _ _ (- _ - O O O
a a,_ ~ _, _, ~, : ~ P~ o ~ _ _ _ U o ~I Q ~ ~ H H H
O ~ O
If a continuous processing (1 m or more) is effected without supplying a blix solution or rinsing solution, an increase in stain is generally observed.
However, even in such a condition, the processing Nos.
3, 10 and llgive a relatively small increase in stain.
The most excellent results were obtained.
The effective spectral sensitive energy distribu-tion Eb(~), Eg(~) or Er(A) obtained when a grey object was photographed on the color printing light-sensitive materials used in the previous example in combination with the color negative films used in the previous example as shown in Table 10 is shown in Figs. 2-(c), 3-(c), 4-(c) and 5-(c). Fig. 2-(c) shows that in the combination of Specimen 701 and Specimen 701 Er(~) is independent but Eg(~) and Eb(~) are independent. Figs.
3-(c) and 4-(c) show that Er(~) and Eg(~) are independent but Eb(~) is not independent. Fig. 5-(c) shows that Er(~), Eg(~) and Eb(~) are all independent.
- 237 ~
U U U U
C
c ... ... ... ...
w U~ U~ U~ U~
~D
o ~,1 ~ o o o o v ~d ~ D ~D ID ID
a o ~ U~
~D o o D VJ t' D ~D
~ ~ Vl-~ ., _ O C ~
J _ ~D D a O O VJ ~
C~ g U. U~
zl 1339l92 The images on the color negative films obtained from the photographing color light-sensitive material specimens 701 and 702 of Example 7 were printed on the color printing lisht-sensitive material specimens 801 and 802 in the same manner as in Example 9. These spe-cimens were then subjected to the color development process B No. 3 to obtain color prints. These specimens were observed by the naked eye for the photographic properties. The results are shown in Table 11. On the other hand, the representation of green leaf of natural cycad and yellow chrysanthemum flower in CIE (L* a* b*) color specification system (as described in Nihon Shikisai Gakkai, "Shikisai Kagak~ Handbook" (5th ed., 1985, pp.
140-141)) gave the results shown in Figure 6-(c). The results show that saturation and lightness are improved for yellow, particularly for green, and color fidelity is remarkably improved.
..
~ O O O
.~
3 ~
-- O
a s~
~ ~ O O ~ ~
cn V' s~
- X ~ ~, .; ~ O O O
.,, : :
_I ~ ~
~- ~ o ~ ~.,, a C!1 J
O 0 ~3 U~
O ~r O (~
~ ~n o o o o O rl ~ ~
O ~ B
o o o o ~ I~ I' 1' 1 o , ~ ~ F E~
CJ C~ U C) U. U~ U U~
On the other hand, these specimens were exposed to light through a sharp cutoff filter I as shown in Fig. 7-(c) (wavelength band longer than 440 nm is cut) or a sharp band stop filter II as shown in Fig. l-(d) (wavelength band of 490-530 nm is cut; ~1/4/W3/4: 0.67) and then developed in the same manner as described above to obtain color prints. The results are shown in Table 12 and Fig. 6-(c).
Color Color printing Filter negative light-sensitive used Point in film used material used I II Fig. 6 Specimen 701 Specimen 801 None None " " None Used " " Used Used Specimen 702 Specimen 801 None None "" None Used "Specimen 802 None None " " None Used " " Used Used ~ (almost corresponds to ~ ) Thus, the use of the sharp band cut-off filter II
gives an improvement in the saturation, lightness and hue fidelity of yellow, green and violet color systems.
In particular, the incorporation of a pyrazoloazole coupler represented by the general formula (VIII) in a photographing color light-sensitive material and a color printing light-sensitive material exhibited further improvement in saturation and fidelity of red color system.
E (~) of the color printing light-sensitive materials obtained when the filters I and II were used in Table 12 (No. 8) is shown in Fig. 8-(c). Fig. 8-(c) shows that Er (~), Eg (~) and Eb (~) are all independent.
Specimen 703 obtained in Example 7 was used to replace Specimen 102 in Examples 10 and 11. As a result, an improvement in color reproducibility was observed similarly.
E ~ ~LE 13 A polished white glass plate having a thickness of 3 mm was cleaned with soapy water. After being dried, the glass plate was then ultrasonically cleaned in a liquid fleon in an ultrasonic cleaner for 1 minute and 30 seconds. The glass plate thus treated was later used as a substrate for deposited film interference filter. The glass plate was then mounted on a substrate holder in an electron beam heating type evaporator.
One of two evaporation sources was provided with 20 g of pelletized silicon oxide and the other was provided with 20 g of aluminum oxide. The evaporator was pre-evacuated for 10 minutes by a rotary pump, and then evacuated by an oil diffusion pump for 20 minutes so that the pressure therein reached 2 x 10 5 torr.
Then, silicon oxide and aluminum oxide were alternately evaporated. The substrate was kept at a temperature of about 350~C by a halogen lamp in the tank during evapora-tion. Silicon oxide was heated by an electron beam of 5 KV and 30 mA for 6 minutes, and aluminum oxide was heated by an electron beam of 5 KV and 250 mA for 8 minutes. The thickness of the film thus deposited was controlled while being observed by an optical monitor.
In such a manner, Filter Specimens 1 and 2 having thick-nesses as shown in Table 13 were prepared. These inter-ference filters thus ~repared were then measured for properties by Hitachi's Type 307 Spectrophotometer.
The spectral transmittance curves thus determined are shown in Figs. l-(d) and 2-(d).
_ rn -- -- _ I I
~
~4 ~I' O
~ ~ ~ -erO O O
.5 ~D _ ~J-- C S~
3 ~ 3 n _ ~ / /D -I
a ~ ~ D
't r E~ ~ ~ ~ ~
O ~ ~ I
O ~Z
~ /D
C
o O
E~/D ~ ~n , ~-, n S /D O o o I C
n /D ~1 'CR ~ D ~~1 o~ ~7 ,_1 ~- ~ O
G ~I Z --I
/D
C ~
O ~_ CJ ~-1 1 ~
o r~o a~ o D ~ O u~O ~D o ,~-, n o ~ o~ o u~
u~~ S ~n ~ ~ ~ -,~ I /D O O o o O O
C
5 ~D
a ., ~, ~4 L
~Q
On the other hand, a filter having a structure shown in Fig. 5 in U.S. Patent No. 2,997,389 was prepared in the vacuum evaporation process to obtain Filter Specimen A.
Filter Specimens A and 1 were then scratched on the surface thereof with the tip of an aluminum diecast of the same material as the insertion holder for band stop filter under substantially the same pressure. Furthermore, these filter specimens were rubbed on the surface thereof with a dust-covered cloth. As a result, Specimen A had scratches on the surface thereof while Specimen 1 had no scratches on the surface thereof. Thus, it is obvious that Specimen 1 is excellent in scratch resistance as compared to Specimen A.
When Filter Specimen A was allowed to stand in the atmosphere at an elevated temperature of 100 to 200~C
while being irradiated with light, ZnS on the surface thereof was oxidized, lowering the transmittance thereof.
This discolored the filter.
When Filter Specimens 1 and 2 were allowed to stand at a temperature of 150~C for 1 hour, there were observed no practical changes in spectral characteristics. There were observed no practical problems in scratch resistance, light resistance and heat resistance.
13391~2 A Macbeth's color chart, a man, and a natural flower were photographed as objects on a 135-size color negative light-sensitive material (Fuji Color SUPER HR 100) under a 5,500~K light source. The color negative light-sensitive material was subjected to CN-16 standard color develop-ment to obtain a color negative film. The images on the color negative film were then printed on Fuji Color Super HR Paper by means of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.'s Auto-printer Type 3500 with a band stop filter according to the present invention interposed between the light source in the autoprinter and the negative filter. For comparison, printing was effected in the same manner as described above except in that no band stop filter was interposed between the light source and the color negative film.
These color papers were then subjected to CP-2 standard color development to obtain color prints.
The color prints obtained with Band Stop Filter Specimen 1 or 2 showed remarkable improvements in fidelity in color reproduction and saturation, particularly of green or yellow system as compared to the color prints obtained without such a filter.
Specimen 3 was prepared in the same manner as in Specimen 1 of Example 13 except in that the film thick-ness and the number of layers were changed (See Table 13).
The spectral transmittance curve of Specimen 3 is shown in Fig. 3-(d).
The same objects as used in Example 13 were photo-graphed on Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.'s Fujichrome lOOD
(135-size). The light-sensitive material was then subjected to CR-56P standard color reversal development to obtain a transparent positive film.
The images on the transparent positive film were then printed on Fuji Color Print by means of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.'s Autoprinter Type 8C 6910 II with Filter Specimen 3 interposed between the light source and the film original and disposed close to the light source.
The light-sensitive material was then subjected to RP-303 -st~ rd color reversal development to obtain a color print. For comparison, printing was effected in the same manner as described above except in that Filter Specimen 3 was not used. Thus, a comparative color print was obtained.
The color print obtained with Band Stop Filter Specimen 3 according to the present invention showed an excellent color reproducibility, and remarkable improve-ment in the saturation of a red system as compared to the color print obtained without such a filter.
A color print was obtained in the same manner as described above except in that Filter Specimen 1 was used in combination with Specimen 3. The color print thus prepared showed remarkable improvements in the fidelity in color reproduction of a green system and the saturation of a red system.
While the invention has been described in detail and with reference to specific embodiments thereof, it will be apparent to one skilled in the art that various changes and modifications can be made therein without departing from the spirit and scope thereof.
Claims (8)
1. A process for the formation of color images which comprises printing on a color printing light-sensitive material comprising a blue-sensitive layer, a green-sensitive layer, and a red-sensitive layer provided on a support from a color print original in a subtractive exposure process, and then subsequent color development, a band stop filter or a band stop filter layer is interposed between the light source and the concerned light-sensitive layer of the color printing light-sensitive material so that the effective spectral sensitive energy distribution of at least two light-sensitive layers of the light-sensitive layers of the color printing light-sensitive material becomes independent from each other in a wavelength band of 400 to 750 nm, characterized in that the average color mixing degree in each of said light-sensitive layers becomes 0.10 or less, and said blue-sensitive layer contains a yellow coupler, said green-sensitive layer contains a magenta coupler and said red-sensitive layer contains a cyan coupler provided on a support and wherein the color printing light-sensitive material satisfies the following conditions A), B), and C):
A) Silver halide emulsion used in the blue-sensitive layer and/or green-sensitive layer is an emulsion of silver chloride, silver bromide, or silver chlorobromide which contains 2 mol % or less of an average silver iodide;
B) Silver halide emulsion used in the blue-sensitive layer is not spectrally sensitized or spectrally sensitized using sensitizing dye selected from the group consisting of the compounds represented by the formulae (I) and (II) following C);
C) Silver halide emulsion used in the green-sensitive layer is spectrally sensitized using sensitizing dye selected from the group consisting of the compounds represented by the formula (III) following formulae (I) and (II);
(I) wherein Z1 and Z2 each represents a benzothiazole nucleus, napthoathiazole nucleus, benzoselenazole nucleus, naphthoselenazole nucleus, benzooxazole nucleus, naphthooxazole nucleus, benzoimidazole nucleus, naphthoimidazole nucleus, indolenine nucleus, benzoindolenine nucleus, indole nucleus or quinoline nucleus which may be substituted; R1 and R2 each represents an alkyl group, alkenyl group, alkynyl group or aralkyl group; either or both of R1 and R2 each has at least one sulfonic acid group, carboxyl group or hydroxyl group; j1 and k1 each represents an integer of 0 or 1; n1 represents an integer of 0 or 1;
and x1 represents an acid anion, with the proviso that when n1 is 0, it indicates that an intramolecular salt is formed (II) wherein Z21 has the same meaning as Z1 or represents a thiazole nucleus, selenazole nucleus, oxazole nucleus, imidazole nucleus, thiazolizine nucleus, thiazoline nucleus, benzothiazoline nucleus, naphthothiazoline nucleus, selenazolizine nucleus, selenazoline nucleus, benzoselenazoline nucleus, naphthoselenazoline nucleus, benzooxazoline nucleus, naphthooxazoline nucleus, benzimidazoline nucleus, naphothoimidazoline nucleus, pyrroline nucleus, pyridine nucleus, dihydroprydine nucleus, dihydroquinoline nucleus, benzoiumidazoline nucleus or naphthoimidazoline nucleus which may be substituted; Q2 represents a sulfur atom, oxygen atom, selenium atom or >N-R23; R21, R22, and R23 each has the same meaning as R1; and j2 has the same meaning as j1 (III) wherein Z31 represents benzimidazole nucleus, benzooxazole nucleus, naphthoimidazole nucleus or naphthooxazole nucleus; Z32 represents benzimidazole nucleus, naphthoimidazole nucleus, benzooxazole nucleus, naphthooxazole nucleus, benzolthiazole nucleus or benzoselenazole nucleus which may be substituted; R31 and R32 each has the same meaning as R1 and R2 in the general formula (I); R33 represents a hydrogen atom, lower alkyl group or aralkyl group; j3 and k3 has the same meaning as j1 in the general formula (I); n3 has the same meaning as n1 in the general formula (I); and x3 represents an acid anion.
A) Silver halide emulsion used in the blue-sensitive layer and/or green-sensitive layer is an emulsion of silver chloride, silver bromide, or silver chlorobromide which contains 2 mol % or less of an average silver iodide;
B) Silver halide emulsion used in the blue-sensitive layer is not spectrally sensitized or spectrally sensitized using sensitizing dye selected from the group consisting of the compounds represented by the formulae (I) and (II) following C);
C) Silver halide emulsion used in the green-sensitive layer is spectrally sensitized using sensitizing dye selected from the group consisting of the compounds represented by the formula (III) following formulae (I) and (II);
(I) wherein Z1 and Z2 each represents a benzothiazole nucleus, napthoathiazole nucleus, benzoselenazole nucleus, naphthoselenazole nucleus, benzooxazole nucleus, naphthooxazole nucleus, benzoimidazole nucleus, naphthoimidazole nucleus, indolenine nucleus, benzoindolenine nucleus, indole nucleus or quinoline nucleus which may be substituted; R1 and R2 each represents an alkyl group, alkenyl group, alkynyl group or aralkyl group; either or both of R1 and R2 each has at least one sulfonic acid group, carboxyl group or hydroxyl group; j1 and k1 each represents an integer of 0 or 1; n1 represents an integer of 0 or 1;
and x1 represents an acid anion, with the proviso that when n1 is 0, it indicates that an intramolecular salt is formed (II) wherein Z21 has the same meaning as Z1 or represents a thiazole nucleus, selenazole nucleus, oxazole nucleus, imidazole nucleus, thiazolizine nucleus, thiazoline nucleus, benzothiazoline nucleus, naphthothiazoline nucleus, selenazolizine nucleus, selenazoline nucleus, benzoselenazoline nucleus, naphthoselenazoline nucleus, benzooxazoline nucleus, naphthooxazoline nucleus, benzimidazoline nucleus, naphothoimidazoline nucleus, pyrroline nucleus, pyridine nucleus, dihydroprydine nucleus, dihydroquinoline nucleus, benzoiumidazoline nucleus or naphthoimidazoline nucleus which may be substituted; Q2 represents a sulfur atom, oxygen atom, selenium atom or >N-R23; R21, R22, and R23 each has the same meaning as R1; and j2 has the same meaning as j1 (III) wherein Z31 represents benzimidazole nucleus, benzooxazole nucleus, naphthoimidazole nucleus or naphthooxazole nucleus; Z32 represents benzimidazole nucleus, naphthoimidazole nucleus, benzooxazole nucleus, naphthooxazole nucleus, benzolthiazole nucleus or benzoselenazole nucleus which may be substituted; R31 and R32 each has the same meaning as R1 and R2 in the general formula (I); R33 represents a hydrogen atom, lower alkyl group or aralkyl group; j3 and k3 has the same meaning as j1 in the general formula (I); n3 has the same meaning as n1 in the general formula (I); and x3 represents an acid anion.
2. A process for the formation of color images as claimed in claim 1, wherein said band stop filter or a band stop filter layer has an absorption band to absorb light in a wavelength range of from 485 nm to 525 nm.
3. A process for the formation of color images as claimed in claim 1, wherein said band stop filter comprises layers prepared by repeatedly applying a plurality of layers comprising a silicon oxide-containing layer and an aluminium oxide-containing layer on a substrate.
4. A process for the formation of color images as claimed in claim 1, wherein the color mixing degree of a Macbeth chart Y (i =16) of at least one light-sensitive layer of the color printing light-sensitive material is 0.44 or less.
5. A process for the formation of color images which comprises printing on a color printing light-sensitive material from a color print original in a subtractive exposure process, and subsequently color-developing said color printing light-sensitive material, whereby said color printing light-sensitive material comprises at least one blue-sensitive layer, at least one green-sensitive layer and at least one red-sensitive layer provided on a support, characterized in that said green-sensitive layer has an effective spectral sensitive energy distribution which is substantially formed by a J-type spectral sensitization, said red-sensitive layer has an effective spectral sensitive energy distribution which is substantially formed by an M-type or J-type spectral sensitization, the effective spectral sensitive energy distribution of said green-sensitive layer and said red-sensitive layer, and/or the effective spectral sensitive energy distribution of said green-sensitive layer and said blue-sensitive layer are substantially independent, and thereby the average color mixing degree at the printing in each of said light-sensitive layers is 0.12 or less, and the color development process of said color printing light-sensitive material satisfies the following condition (A):
(A) at least one of color development, blix, and rinse and/or stabilization is carried out in the presence of at least one compound represented by the general formula (XI) (XI) that is incorporated into the photographic material prior to processing, wherein R1, R2, R3, and R4 each represent a hydroxy group, a heterocyclic thio group, an alkoxy group, an amino group, an alkylamino group, an aryloxy group or an arlylamino group; X
and Y each represent =N- or =CH-; and M represents a monovalent cation with the proviso that X and Y do not represent =C- at the same time.
(A) at least one of color development, blix, and rinse and/or stabilization is carried out in the presence of at least one compound represented by the general formula (XI) (XI) that is incorporated into the photographic material prior to processing, wherein R1, R2, R3, and R4 each represent a hydroxy group, a heterocyclic thio group, an alkoxy group, an amino group, an alkylamino group, an aryloxy group or an arlylamino group; X
and Y each represent =N- or =CH-; and M represents a monovalent cation with the proviso that X and Y do not represent =C- at the same time.
6. A process for the formation of color images as claimed in claim 5, wherein the said color development process of said color printing light-sensitive material includes the steps of treatment in a pre-bath using a rinsing solution and/or stabilizing solution followed by a blix step using a blix solution, and wherein said process satisfies the further condition (B) the pH value of the blix solution is in the range of 3.5 to 6.0 and a replenishing amount of the rinsing solution and/or stabilizing solution is used in an amount of 3 to 50 times the amount of said solution carried over from a pre-bath.
7. A process for the formation of color images as claimed in claims 5, 6 or 1, wherein a band stop filter having a spectral absorption band of about 10 to 60 nm in the half value width (W1/2) in a wavelength band excluding the maximum wavelength of the effective spectral sensitive light amount distribution of each light-sensitive layer ~ 20 nm is used for printing.
8. A process for the formation of color images as claimed in claim 7, wherein a band stop filter having a ratio of 1/4 value width of the spectral transmittance to 3 /4 value width of the spectral transmittance (W1/4/W3/4) of 0.5 or more in the wavelength band for the green-sensitive layer corresponding to the J-type spectral sensitization is used for printing.
Applications Claiming Priority (8)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| JP150320/87 | 1987-06-18 | ||
| JP15032087 | 1987-06-18 | ||
| JP195222/87 | 1987-08-06 | ||
| JP19522287 | 1987-08-06 | ||
| JP206589/87 | 1987-08-21 | ||
| JP20658987 | 1987-08-21 | ||
| JP11260888 | 1988-05-11 | ||
| JP112608/88 | 1988-05-11 |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| CA1339192C true CA1339192C (en) | 1997-08-05 |
Family
ID=27470006
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| CA 569832 Expired - Fee Related CA1339192C (en) | 1987-06-18 | 1988-06-17 | Process for the formation of color image and band stop filter used therefor |
Country Status (3)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| EP (1) | EP0295716B1 (en) |
| CA (1) | CA1339192C (en) |
| DE (1) | DE3852342T2 (en) |
Families Citing this family (3)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JP2879377B2 (en) * | 1991-03-01 | 1999-04-05 | コニカ株式会社 | Color photographic image forming method with excellent color reproducibility |
| JP2881510B2 (en) * | 1991-03-04 | 1999-04-12 | コニカ株式会社 | Silver halide color photographic image forming method |
| EP0581697A1 (en) * | 1992-07-27 | 1994-02-02 | Eastman Kodak Company | Photographic elements adapted for underwater photography |
Family Cites Families (12)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| DE1015683B (en) * | 1955-06-15 | 1957-09-12 | Agfa Ag | Process for improving color rendering in multilayer color photographic materials |
| US2997389A (en) * | 1957-04-12 | 1961-08-22 | Eastman Kodak Co | Exposure control in color printing |
| BE575793A (en) * | 1959-02-17 | |||
| FR2276601A1 (en) * | 1974-06-27 | 1976-01-23 | France Etat | TAPE FILTERS AND APPLICATION TO THE MANUFACTURING OF PROTECTIVE GLASSES |
| IT1047464B (en) * | 1975-03-06 | 1980-09-10 | Durst Ag | DEVICE FOR GRAPHIC PHOTO PRINTING OF COLOR TRANSPARENCIES |
| JPS5364037A (en) * | 1976-11-19 | 1978-06-08 | Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd | Automatic color printer |
| US4469785A (en) * | 1981-12-19 | 1984-09-04 | Konishiroku Photo Industry Co., Ltd. | Light-sensitive silver halide color photographic material |
| JPS5949537A (en) * | 1982-09-14 | 1984-03-22 | Konishiroku Photo Ind Co Ltd | Method for processing silver halide photosensitive material |
| JPS59131937A (en) * | 1983-01-19 | 1984-07-28 | Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd | Silver halide multilayer color photosensitive material |
| JPS6161160A (en) * | 1984-08-31 | 1986-03-28 | Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd | Processing method of silver halide color photosensitive material |
| JPS61170742A (en) * | 1985-01-24 | 1986-08-01 | Konishiroku Photo Ind Co Ltd | Method for processing silver halide color photographic sensitive material |
| EP0277644B1 (en) * | 1987-02-05 | 1994-01-19 | Konica Corporation | Method for exposing a light-sensitive color photographic material |
-
1988
- 1988-06-17 CA CA 569832 patent/CA1339192C/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 1988-06-20 EP EP88109778A patent/EP0295716B1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1988-06-20 DE DE19883852342 patent/DE3852342T2/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| DE3852342T2 (en) | 1995-05-24 |
| DE3852342D1 (en) | 1995-01-19 |
| EP0295716B1 (en) | 1994-12-07 |
| EP0295716A3 (en) | 1989-11-23 |
| EP0295716A2 (en) | 1988-12-21 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| EP0293917B1 (en) | Color photographic light-sensitive material and method of developing the same | |
| DE3888579T2 (en) | Silver halide photographic light-sensitive materials. | |
| US4880726A (en) | Method of forming a color image | |
| US5037728A (en) | Photographic material package unit | |
| JP2649980B2 (en) | Silver halide photographic material | |
| EP0385461B1 (en) | Silver halide photographic material | |
| JP2649967B2 (en) | Silver halide photographic material | |
| US4078933A (en) | Silver halide photographic light-sensitive element containing dye | |
| US3833380A (en) | Novel photographic elements | |
| US4925780A (en) | Direct positive silver halide light-sensitive color photographic material | |
| CA1339192C (en) | Process for the formation of color image and band stop filter used therefor | |
| AU611990B2 (en) | Silver halide color light-sensitive material comprising pyrazoloazole coupler | |
| US5674674A (en) | Low staining green spectral sensitizing dyes and silver chloride emulsions containing iodide | |
| JP2835611B2 (en) | Color image forming method | |
| JPS5891445A (en) | Photographic silver halide emulsion | |
| JPH037931A (en) | Silver halide photographic sensitive material | |
| JP2665619B2 (en) | Silver halide color photographic materials | |
| JPH0445436A (en) | Silver halide photographic sensitive material | |
| JP2676115B2 (en) | Silver halide photographic material | |
| JP2681525B2 (en) | Silver halide photographic material | |
| DE68922120T2 (en) | Color photographic silver halide materials. | |
| JP2665616B2 (en) | Silver halide color photographic light-sensitive material | |
| JP2888895B2 (en) | Color image forming method | |
| JPH01106047A (en) | Color photographic sensitive material | |
| JPH03208047A (en) | Silver halide photographic sensitive material |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| MKLA | Lapsed |